Home

Yamaha DDK-7 Musical Instrument User Manual

1. MARCH Fast Jazz 2 British 16Beat Bossa Nova 1 Marching Band 1 Combo Swing 16Beat 1 Bossa Nova 2 Marching Band 2 Cool Combo 16Beat 2 Bossa Nova 3 Marching Band 3 o Light Swing 16Beat 3 Pop Bossa Alpine March Afro Cuban 1 16Beat 4 ambo 1 6 8 March 1 Afro Cuban 2 3 Fusion Shuffle 1 Mambo 2 4 6 8 March 2 Bebop Fusion Shuffle 2 Salsa 1 6 8 Kids Five Four Jazz Pop Salsa 2 6 8 Organ March Jazz Ballad 1 16Beat Shuffle 1 Montuno Broadway Jazz Ballad 2 16Beat Shuffle 2 Calypso SF March Movie Swing Pop Shuffle Cha Cha Cha Wild West Piano Trio Eurovision Pop Big Band Cha Cha Baroque Midnight Swing British Pop Pop Cha Cha WALTZ S Slow Jazz 4 Sing Along Rumba Vienna Waltz Moonlight 1 Simple Shuffle 1 Pop Rumba Orchestra Waltz Moonlight 2 Simple Shuffle 2 Fast Rumba Simple Waltz Winter Song 1 Simple Shuffle 3 Guitar Rumba Gentle Waltz Winter Song 2 R amp B Beguine 1 4 Guitar Serenade Foxtrot Blues Rock Beguin
2. Category Preset Preset Preset Category Preset Preset Preset Voice Name Feet Effect 1 Effect 2 Voice Name Feet Effect 1 Effect 2 5 Horn 1 H THRU THRU 5 Sax Ens 1 16 8 THRU THRU Horn 2 8 THRU THRU Sax Ens 2 16 8 THRU THRU Horn 3 H THRU THRU Sax Ens 3 16 8 THRU THRU Horn 4 8 THRU THRU Woodwind Ens 1 H THRU THRU Horn 5 8 THRU THRU Woodwind Ens 2 H THRU THRU Horn 6 H THRU THRU Woodwind Ens 3 H THRU THRU Muted Horn H THRU THRU Woodwind Ens 4 H THRU THRU 6 Tuba 1 16 ST 2BAND EQ RU TUTTI Tuba 2 16 8 THRU THRU 1 Strings amp Winds H THRU THRU Euphonium 16 8 THRU THRU Strings amp Brass 1 8 THRU THRU Brass Bass 1 16 THRU THRU Strings amp Brass 2 H XG HM ENHNCE THRU Brass Bass 2 8 THRU THRU Strings amp Horn 8 THRU THRU Brass Bass 3 8 THRU THRU Brass amp Sax 1 8 THRU THRU WOODWIND FLUTE Brass amp Sax 2 H THRU THRU 1 Flute 1 8 THRU THRU Brass amp Sax 3 H THRU THRU Flute 2 H THRU THRU Brass amp Winds H THRU THRU Flute 3 8 THRU THRU 2 Orchestra Hit H THRU THRU Flute 4 H THRU THRU CHOIR
3. BALLAD DANCE Power Ballad Ibiza 1 Certain rhythms created for use with slow soft Dramatic Ballad ibiza 2 Songs or for Songs that do not use a bass part at the Movie Ballad 1 Euro mance beginning may not have drum sections To use Movie Ballad 2 Disco Teens these rhythms refer to the following information Secret Service techno Party Some sections of the following nine rhythms are 1 Carpenters Pap Glub Dance configured with accompaniment only they do not E Balad eon Pango contain any drum or percussion ove Song ub House 16Beat Ballad 1 UK Pop Category Rhythm Section 16Beat Ballad 2 US Disco wore 6 8 Organ March ain A Main B 16Beat Ballad 3 Swing House Baroque All sections except Intro 1 Easy Ballad US Pop WALZ Simple Waltz Ending 1 Guitar Ballad 1 US Hip Hop Guitar Serenade All sections except Intro 1 Guitar Ballad 2 Classic Hip Hop doni pende Polka sii AMINTA Guitar Ballad 3 Trip Hop MUSIC Beers Ending 1 Organ Ballad Chart Pop Mexican Dance ain A Fill In A Chart Ballad Ground Beat BALLAD Dramatic Ballad ain A S Analog Ballad Hip Hop Groove ROCK RER shuttle Ending 1 nee Ballad lp Hap Pap Some sections of the following five rhythms do not sea Moda AP HO Bait cont
4. Voice Name Category Voice Name Category MSB LSB PRG MSB LSB PRG 0 0 59 XG Tuba BRASS 0 18 82 XG DynamicSaw SYNTH LEAD 0 16 59 XG Tuba2 0 19 82 XG DigitalSaw 0 0 60 XG MutedTrumpet 0 20 82 XG BigLead 0 0 61 XG FrenchHorn 0 24 82 XG HeavySynth 0 6 61 XG FrHornSolo 0 25 82 XG WaspySynth 0 32 61 XG FrenchHorn2 0 40 82 XG PulseSaw 0 37 61 XG HornOrchestra 0 41 82 XG Dr Lead 0 0 62 XG BrassSection 0 45 82 XG VelocityLead 0 35 62 XG Tp amp TbSection 0 96 82 XG Seq Analog 0 40 62 XG BrassSection2 0 0 83 XG CalliopeLead 0 41 62 XG HighBrass 0 65 83 XG PurePad 0 42 62 XG MellowBrass 0 0 84 XG ChiffLead 0 0 63 XG SynthBrass1 0 64 84 XG Rubby 0 12 63 XG QuackBrass 0 0 85 XG CharangLead 0 20 63 XG ResoSynBrass 0 64 85 XG DistortedLead 0 24 63 XG PolyBrass 0 65 85 XG WireLead 0 27 63 XG SynthBrass3 0 0 86 XG VoiceLead 0 32 63 XG JumpBrass 0 24 86 XG SynthAahs 0 45 63 XG AnaVel Brass1 0 64 86 XG VoxLead 0 64 63 XG AnalogBrass1 0 0 87 XG FifthsLead 0 0 64 XG SynthBrass2 0 35 87 XG BigFive 0 18 64 XG SoftBrass 0 0 88 XG Bass amp L
5. DDK 7 Owner s Manual Category Preset Preset Preset Category Preset Preset Preset Voice Name Feet Effect 1 Effect 2 Voice Name Feet Effect 1 Effect 2 STRINGS VIOLIN BRASS TRUMPET 1 Strings 1 e THRU THRU 1 Brass Section 1 8 THRU THRU Strings 2 e THRU THRU Brass Section 2 8 HRU THRU Strings 3 H AMBIENCE RU Brass Section 3 8 HRU THRU Strings 4 8 THRU THRU Brass Section 4 8 ENHANCER THRU Strings 5 8 THRU THRU Brass Section 5 8 ENHANCER THRU Strings 6 8 THRU THRU Brass Section 6 8 HRU THRU Strings 7 8 DELAY LR THRU Trombone Sec 1 167 8 ENHANCER THRU Strings 8 8 THRU THRU Trombone Sec 2 16 8 THRU THRU Strings 9 8 HM ENHANCER THRU Trombone Sec 3 16 8 THRU THRU Chamber Strs 1 8 AMBIENCE RU Trombone Sec 4 16 8 AMBIENCE THRU Chamber Strs 2 8 THRU THRU Trombone Sec 5 16 8 RU HALL 1 Chamber Strs 3 8 THRU THRU 2 Brass1 amp Trp6 8 THRU THRU Chamber Strs 4 H HM ENHANCER RU Brass2 amp Trp6 H ST 2BAND EQ HRU 2 Pizzicato Strs 1 H THRU ROOM S Horn 1 amp 4 8 ST2BANDEQ HALL 1 Pizzicato Strs 2 H AMBIENCE ROOM S Octave Brass 1 H AMBIENCE THRU Pizzicato Strs 3 H AMBIENCE ROOM S Octave Brass 2 8 DELAY LR THRU Pizzicato Strs 4 8 BASEMENT ROOM S Octave Brass 3 8 THRU THRU Tre
6. Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm H 10 00 07 40 3 00 Effect 1 Type MSB LSB 00 O 00 O 00 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 10 00 07 41 2 0000 7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 1 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 42 2 0000 7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 2 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 43 2 0000 7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 3 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 44 2 0000 7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 4 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 45 2 0000 7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 5 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 46 2 0000 7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 6 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 47 2 0000 7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 7 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 48 2 0000 7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 8 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 49 2 0000 7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 9 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 4A 2 0000 7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 10 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 4B 2 0000 7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 11 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 4C 2 0000 7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 12 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 4D 2 0000 7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 13 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 4E 2 0000 7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 14 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 0
7. Seq Click L Dance Perc 2 Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Bass Drum Attack Seq Click H Hi Q Dance 1 Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Bass Drum Heavy Brush Tap Snare Analog 3 Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Tom 4 Brush Swirl Vinyl Noise Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Bass Drum Light Brush Slap Snare Analog 4 Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Tom 3 Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Brush Tap Swirl Brush Tap Swirl Brush Tap Swirl Orch Snare Drum Snare Roll Reverse Dance 2 Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Drum Roll Hi Q 2 HiQ2 Castanet Castanet Castanet Tom 2 Snare Noisy 4 Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Snare Soft SD Brush Roll Sticks Snare Dance 1 Sticks Sticks Sticks Tom 1 Kick 3 Kick Techno Q Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Soft 2 SD Brush Shot 2 Open Rim Shot Rim Gate Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Tom Brush Shot 4 Kick Anlg Short Kick Techno L Kick Tight Kick Tight Gran Cassa SD Brush Shot 1 Kick Analog Kick Techno ick Jazz Kick Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Snare Drum Heavy Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Light Side Stick Light Side Stick Tom Brush Shot 3 Snare Analog Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Snare Drum Light Hand Clap Dance Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Tom Brush Shot 2 Snare Analog 2 Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 SD Accent 2 Tom Analog 1 Tom D
8. When the Registration is stored the numbered button flashes momentarily When recording Registration settings the square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds indicating that the Registration is currently being saved Do not turn the power off while the Registration is being saved DDK 7 Owner s Manual 89 REGISTRATION MEMORY AYOWAW NOILVYLSIDSY 90 El Reference Page Saving Registrations as Registration Data File page 116 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Functions and settings that cannot be memorized The following settings cannot be stored to a Registration Memory number e Pitch page 208 e MIDI Control settings fpage 238 e Mic Volume page 233 e AUX OUT settings page 228 e Mic Reverb page 233 e LCD related settings page 16 e Internet Direct Connection settings page 218 The following settings common to all Registration Memory numbers 1 16 and cannot be stored individually for each number e Transpose page 208 e Attack mode in Organ Flute Voices page 38 e Registration Shift page 94 e Auto Fill setting page 64 e Reverb type page 47 e User Voices page 145 e User rhythms page 172 e User Keyboard Percussion page 79 e Rhythm Sequences page 183 e Disable setting page 91 Ei Selecting Registrations Simply press the num
9. Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm H 13 02 11 1 00 7F Accompaniment Volume 00 MIN O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 13 02 12 1 00 7F Accompaniment Reverb 00 MIN O 00 7F O 00 7F Send Level 7F MAX A B C Function Parameters Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm H 13 03 00 1 00 7F Auto Bass Chord Mode 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 03 01 Single Finger 02 Fingered 03 Custom A B C 13 03 01 1 00 7F Lower Memory On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0N 13 03 02 1 00 7F Pedal Memory On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0N M O C Function Parameters Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm ll 13 04 00 1 00 7F Melody On Chord Mode 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 03 01 1 02 2 03 3 13 04 01 1 00 7F M O C Foot Pedal Control 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 On Off 01 0N Section Parameters Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm ll 13 05 00 1 00 7F Intro 1 On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 13 05 01 1 00 7F Intro 2 On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 13 05 02 1 00 7F Intro 3 On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 13 05 08 1 00 7F Main A On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 13 05 09 1 00 7F Main B On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 13 05 OA 1 00 7F Main C On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 13 05 0B 1 00 7F Main D On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 13 05
10. DDK 7 Owner s Manual 193 Controllers O o 3 2 e ba 2 D 194 El Reference Page Rhythm Structure page 62 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Press the LEFT button at the top right of the display to call up the LEFT Page FOOTSWITCH Display E FOOTSMTCH een GLIDE CE In this display you can assign the control function to the Left Footswitch Rhythm Glide and Rotary Speaker If you choose OFF here the Left Footswitch will not control any function Controlling the Rhythm You can control the rhythm start stop or switch the rhythm sections by using the Left Footswitch HE FOOTSWITCH CET RIGHT MODE OFF mmm sam ROTARY RHYTHM CONTROL E BREAK INTRO 1 INTRO INTRO ENDING 1 ENDING 2 ENDING O STOP Switches the rhythm on off whenever you press the Footswitch O BREAK When you press the Footswitch the Break section turns on This function corresponds to the BREAK button on the panel MAIN A MAIN D These functions correspond to the MAIN FILL IN A D buttons on the panel For example when the MAIN A button is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch the rhythm section is switched to Main A or Fill In A O INTRO 1 INTRO 3 These functions correspond to the INTRO 1 3 buttons on the panel For example when the INTRO 1 button is selected in t
11. MAX MIC VOLUME AC INLET jack For connecting the power cable PHONES jacks El Reference Page For connection of a stereo headphone set Using Headphones page 225 MIC jack For connecting a mono input such as a microphone The DDK 7 outputs the microphone signal with reverb processing through the OUTPUT jacks or AUX OUT jacks O MIC VOLUME knob For adjusting the level of input signal from the MIC jack El Reference Page Connecting a Microphone page 232 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 223 Connections SUONOBUUOD 0 2 0 1 USB TO DEVICE terminal For connecting USB storage devices such as USB flash memory OO E 2 SUSTAIN _1 VOLUME IN GS FOOT PEDAL TO HOST TO DEVICE OPTICAL USB gt OUT TO PEDAL View from rear E Reference Pages Foot Pedal page 196 El Reference Pages Controlling External MIDI Devices from the DDK 7 page 233 Controlling the DDK 7 from an External Device page 234 Connection with Computer page 230 What is MIDI page 235 El Reference Pages Internet Direct Connection page 209 Connecting USB storage devices or USB LAN adaptor page 234 Connection with Computer page 230 El Reference Page Recording the Sounds of the DDK 7 to an External Recorder page 231 224
12. cc Switch dd Remarks Code Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 42 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Brilliance O 00 06 x 00 06 00 BRILLIANT 06 MELLOW 43 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Brilliance 00 06 x 00 06 00 BRILLIANT 06 MELLOW 44 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Brilliance O 00 06 x 00 06 00 BRILLIANT 06 MELLOW 45 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Brilliance O 00 06 x 00 06 00 BRILLIANT 06 MELLOW 46 Lead Voice 1 Brilliance O 00 06 x 00 06 00 BRILLIANT 06 MELLOW 47 Pedal Voice 1 Brilliance O 00 06 x 00 06 00 BRILLIANT 06 MELLOW 48 Pedal Voice 2 Brilliance O 00 06 x 00 06 00 BRILLIANT 06 MELLOW 49 Lead Voice 2 Brilliance O 00 06 x 00 06 00 BRILLIANT 06 MELLOW Sustain cc Switch dd Remarks Code Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 50 Upper Sustain UPPER KNEE O 00 01 O 00 01 00 OFF 01 0N 51 Lower Sustain LOWER KNEE O 00 01 O 00 01 00 OFF 01 0N 52 Pedal Sustain PEDAL O 00 01 O 00 01 00 OFF 01 0N Solo Bar cc Switch dd Remarks Code Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 59 Solo Bar O 00 01 O 00 OFF 01 ON Keyboard Percussion cc Switch dd Remarks Code Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 5B Keyboard Percussion 1 O 00 01 O 00 01 00 OFF 01 ON 5C Keyboard Percussion 2 O 00 01 O 00 01 00 OFF 01 ON Disable cc Switch dd Remarks Code Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 5F Disable D O 00 01 O 00 01 00 OFF 01 0N Rotary Speaker cc Switch dd Remarks Code
13. Contents 1 Voices for each keyboard 24 3 VOICE LISK 6 oii a NAE eae KENE oe ace 32 2 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons 26 e SelectingaVoice 26 e Changing the Voice volume 27 KO Voices for each keyboard A total of 415 voices can be selected on the display which you can call up by pressing the Voice section buttons on the front panel Voices for the Upper Keyboard Up to four different Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Lead Voice 1 and Lead Voice 2 Voices for each section can be selected from the panel Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Lead Voice 1 LOWER1 LOWER2 PEDAL1 PEDAL2 UPPER1 UPPER2 LEAD1 LEAD2 Lead Voice 2 RI 0 0 gt x gt x gt x gt x gt a gt gt gt x gt x 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 z 3 z S Z ES Z Z S 3 z U ATO ATO VTO SOLO LOWER LOWER LOWER CI E eS E DDK 7 Owner s Manual Lead Voice 1 and 2 sound only the highest note or last note played if two or more keys are played together Thi
14. Preset 2 PK Preset 1 LK Preset 1 UK Preset 2 PK Preset 1 LK Preset 1 UK ci Bass Drum Heavy Kick so Brush Roll Side Stick Surdo Mute D1 Snare Drum Heavy Snare Surdo Open sp Brush Shot 1 Claves Hand Clap HiQ El SD Reverb 1 z Snare Tight Whip Slap F1 Snare Drum Light gt Floor Tom L Scratch H im Tom 3 Synth Tom 3 Hi Hat Closed Scratch L Gi Snare Drum Rim 1 Concert BD Floor Tom H Finger Snap SEH tom 2 Synth Tom 2 Hi Hat Pedal Click Noise Al Hi Hat Close Bass Drum Heavy Low Tom Metronome Click ED Tom 1 Synth Tom 1 Hi Hat Open Metronome Bell B1 Hi Hat Open Bass Drum Light Mid Tom L Seq Click L C2 Ride Cymbal 1 Snare Drum Heavy Mid Tom H Seq Click H EA synth tom 3 SD Brush Roll Crash Cymbal 1 Brush Tap D2 Crash Cymbal 1 Snare Drum Heavy High Tom Brush Swirl EA synth Tom 2 SD Brush Shot 1 F Ride Cymbal 1 Brush Slap S E2 Orchestra Cymbal SD Reverb 1 Chinese Cymbal Brush Tap Swirl F2 Snare Drum Light Ride Cymbal Cup Snare Roll WS Synth Tom 1 Tom 3 Tambourine Castanet G2 Snare Drum Rim 1 Splash Cymbal Snare Soft E Tom 2 Sticks A2 Hi Hat Close 3 Kick Soft 5 WOW Tom 1 Open Rim Shot B2 Hi Hat Open z Kick Tight c3 Ride Cymbal 1 Kick Bongo H WE Orch Snare Drum Side Stick Bongo L D3 Crash Cymbal 1 Snare Conga H Mute E Snare Drum Roll Hand Clap Conga H Open ES Orchestra Cymbal Snare Tight Conga L F3 Orch Cymbal R
15. CONGA BONGO Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Splash Cymbal Conga High Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Conga Low Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Conga Slap Hi Hat Open Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal 2 Conga Muff Hi Hat Closed Hi Hat Open Ride Cymbal Cup Conga Slide Hi Hat Pedal Hi Hat Closed Hi Hat Open 2 Bongo High SNARE DRUM Hi Hat Pedal Hi Hat Closed 2 Bongo Low Snare SNARE DRUM Hi Hat Pedal 2 Bongo Slap Snare Tight Snare Short SNARE DRUM Bongo Mute Snare Soft Snare Tight H Snare Ambient CUICA SURDO Snare Roll Snare Soft 2 Snare Tight 2 Cuica High Side Stick Snare Roll Snare Electro Cuica Middle Open Rim Shot Side Stick Light Snare Roll Cuica Low Brush Tap Open Rim Shot H Stick Ambient Tamborim Open Brush Slap Brush Tap Snare Pitched Tamborim Mute Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Surdo Open Brush Tap Swirl Brush Swirl Brush Slap Surdo Mute TOM Brush Tap Swirl Brush Swirl Surdo Rim Floor Tom L TOM Brush Tap Swirl Surdo Muff Floor Tom H Floor Tom L TOM TIMBALES COWBELL Low Tom Floor Tom H Hybrid Tom 1 Timbale 1 High Mid Tom L Low Tom Hybrid Tom 2 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 85 Rhythm Keyboard Percussion uoIssnojag pleogAsy wulAyy 86 Hybrid Tom 3 Tom Room 6 Kick 2 PERCUSSION 1 Hybrid
16. Pedal Voice 1 _ Mur L C C o EEE Pedal Voice 2 7 a dt dt fs tt MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN l ATO ATO YTO SOLO LOWER LOWER LOWER Coc E DDK 7 Owner s Manual 25 Voices SOdlo 26 El Reference Page Voice Edit page 137 DDK 7 Owner s Manual A Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons Since selection of Voices follows the same procedure throughout all Voice sections instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 UPPER 1 are given here Selecting a Voice 1 Press the UPPER 1 button VOICE SECTION LOWER1 LOWER2 PEDAL1 PEDAL2 UPPER1 UPPER2 LEAD1 LEAD2 aua E ais MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN a a ATTY ATO ATO VTO Soo LOWER LOWER LOWER The voice menu of the currently selected category is shown in the display STRINGS VIOLIN Strings 1 Str Strings 9 Chanber Strs 1 Chamber Strs 2 Chamber S
17. Flute Key Click CarEngnignition F2 G2 A2 B2 Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash C3 D3 E3 Cutting Noise 1 Phone Call Burst Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Roller Coaster Door Slam Submarine String Slap Scratch Cut Scratch H 3 F3 G3 A3 B3 Wind Chime Telephone Ring Shower Laugh Thunder Scream Wind Punch Stream Heart Beat c4 D4 E4 Bubble Foot Steps Feed Flute Key Click CarEngnignition F4 G4 A4 B4 Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship C5 D5 E5 Dog Machine Gun Horse Laser Gun Bird Tweet Explosion Firework F5 G5 A5 B5 Ghost Maou C6 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 77 Rhythm Keyboard Percussion uoIssnojag p3gogAsy Wy AyH 78 Arabic Kit Pop Latin Kit Preset 2 PK Preset 1 LK Preset 1 UK Preset 2 PK Preset 1 LK Preset 1 UK ci Kick Soft Bongo H Open 1 f EA ous stick gt Bongo H Open 3 f z D1 Snare Soft Bongo H Rim Arabic Ha
18. 145 e AWM Voice structure 137 4 Quitting Voice Edit 146 2 EditingaVoice 138 5 Recalling an Edited Voice 146 e Selecting a Voice for editing 138 e Editing an AWM Voice 140 KO Voice Structure The internal structure of the Voices of this DDK 7 is explained below AWM Voice structure AWM Voices consist of up to four recorded samples of a real instrument Each waveform referred to as an Element can be edited by changing the level volume filter settings and so on A single Voice contains four boxes AWM 1 AWM4 in which the Elements are put If a Voice consists of less than three Elements some boxes are empty For example Strings 1 consists of two Elements as shown Strings 1 Element 1 Element 2 AWM1 AWM2 AWM3 AWM4 You can add Elements from other Voices Brass for example if a box AWM3 and or AWMA is empty This allows you to create your own original ensemble sounds In the Voice Edit function you can edit not only each Element but also assemble some Elements from other Voices DDK 7 Owner s Manual 137 Voice Edit Upa 9910A 2 Editing a Voice Selecting a Voice for editing 1 Select the Voice you want to edit from the Voice Menu For example if you want to edit Accordion 1 select Accordio
19. 202 e Controlling Glide 195 e Controlling Rotary Speaker 202 e Controlling Rotary Speaker 196 e Controlling Registration Shift 203 2 FOOT Pedal eresi asin ee 196 e Controlling Ekpression 204 e Controlling Sustain 198 3 Expression Pedals 205 e Controlling Lead Slide 199 e Controlling Pitch Bend 206 e Controlling Melody On Chord 200 e Controlling the Rhythm Tempo 207 e Controlling the Solo Function 201 EN Footswitches To use the Footswitches connect the Pedal Unit DDKU P7 to the DDK 7 The Pedal Unit DDKU P7 has two Footswitches on the main expression pedal The Right Footswitch is used for the Registration Shift function The Left Footswitch can El Reference Page be set to control one of the following functions Rhythm Glide and Rotary speaker Connecting a pedal unit See page 94 for the details of the Registration Shift function or Right Footswitch page 229 The explanation on the Left Footswitch is given here Right Footswitch Left Footswitch A YEE EE e E EF Expression Pedal 1 Press the FOOT SWITCH button DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH 23 C2 E
20. Contents 1 Accessory Jacks and Controls 223 6 Connecting External Devices 231 2 Connecting Headphones or External System e Recording the Sounds of the DDK 7 to an External A AA A 225 AA AI aina e Using Headphones 225 e Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through e Playing the Sounds of the DDK 7 Through an the External Speakers of the DDK 7 232 External Audio System 226 e Connecting a Microphone 232 e Using a mixer for live performance 226 e Controlling External MIDI Devices from the DDK 7 e Selecting Outputs for Each Part 228 e 233 3 Connecting a Pedal Unit 229 e Controlling the DDK 7 from an External Device 234 4 Connecting a Foot Pedal 229 e Connecting USB storage devices or USB LAN 5 Connection with Computer 230 AdAP OT iana 234 e Using the USB terminal 230 7 MIDI oe 235 e Using the MIDI IN OUT terminals 231 eWhatis MIDI ooo 235 e MIDI Messages of the DDK 7 236 e MIDI Channels 237 8 MIDI Control 238 KU Accessory Jacks and Controls This section provides brief explanations for each jack control on the DDK 7 For details on connecting to external devices see page 225
21. Computer D Connecting External Devices Recording the Sounds of the DDK 7 to an External Recorder You can record your DDK 7 performance to an external recorder such as an MD recorder or cassette tape recorder using the OPTICAL OUT terminal or AUX OUT jacks Using the OPTICAL OUT terminal allows you to record to external media with exceptionally high quality digital sound providing the external recorder has an Optical In terminal Or you can use the AUX OUT jacks Audio cable Optical digital cable Recording o Recording AUX OUT MAIN R OPTICAL OUT OPTICAL IN Gal Cassette tape recorder etc oo ISS ES Cassette tape recorder etc DT nore Depending on your particular MIDI interface you may have to connect the MIDI Interface and the computer with a serial cable DH ore If you want to record the sound input from the AUX IN jack together with the DDK 7 sound use the AUX OUT MAIN jack DDK 7 Owner s Manual 231 Connections suondauu0 232 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through the External Speakers of the DDK 7 You can connect the AUX IN jacks of the DDK 7 with the LINE OUT of an external device such as a CD player You can also connect the OUTPUT jacks of the DDK 7 to external speakers The sound from the CD player is output from
22. S Saving the edited Voice Edited AWM Voices can be saved as User Voices up to sixteen 1 Press the SAVE button at the top right of the display to call up the SAVE Page VOICE EDIT E UPPER Voce 1 AN 1082 QUE Accordion 1 2 Select the User Voice number you wish to save to The message appears to prompt confirmation of the operation Saving a new Voice automatically erases the Voice previously stored to the selected User number 3 If necessary Press the RENAME button to give a name to your original Voice The method for editing the name is the same as the one for the song name in the M D R section See page 113 for more information Up to sixteen characters can be entered DDK 7 Owner s Manual 145 Voice Edit Upa 9910A 146 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Press the SAVE button to save the Voice or press CANCEL to abort the operation d This operation automatically erases any Voice that had been previously saved to the selected User Voice number Be careful not to erase any important data Always save your important data in advance to a USB flash memory or other external media using the M D R function After saving the Voice be sure to quit the Voice Edit function page 146 before turning the power off Turning off the DDK 7 without quitting Voice Edit erases the User Voice you have edited 4 Quitting Voice Edit You can quit the Voice Edit functio
23. 4 Connecting a Foot Pedal Connecting an optional Foot Pedal FC4 FC5 FC7 FC9 to the DDK 7 allows you to execute various performance functions and switch effects on off without taking your hands from the keyboard To do this you must assign a desired function to the Foot Pedal FOOT PEDAL 1 VOLUME 2 SUSTAIN Foot Pedal El Reference Page Voices for each keyboard page 24 Footswitches page 193 Expression Pedals page 205 El Reference Page Foot Pedal page 196 Controlling Sustain page 198 Controlling Melody On Chord page 200 Controlling Lead Slide page 199 Controlling the Solo Function page 201 Controlling the Rhythm page 201 Controlling Rotary Speaker page 196 Controlling Expression page 204 Controlling Registration Shift page 203 Controlling Glide page 202 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 229 Connections SUONOBUUOD REH wore When you are using the M D R MIDI data cannot be transferred to from the computer 230 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 5 Connection with Computer By using the USB TO HOST terminal or MIDI IN OUT terminals you can connect your DDK 7 to a computer and receive transmit MIDI data for more information about MIDI see page 235 A Before you can actually transfer data between the DDK 7 and a computer via the USB connection you will need to install an appropriate MIDI driver Down
24. E REGIST MEMORY 1 16 Parameter value is set to maximum 234567 ES geg patas CS E Bag KG E In this case pressing OK continues the operation ignoring those parameters at maximum or minimum value Pressing CANCEL aborts the operation DDK 7 Owner s Manual 101 REGISTRATION MEMORY Music Data Recorder MDR The Music Data Recorder M D R is a sophisticated recording system built into the DDK 7 that lets you record your performances and Registration settings to a USB flash memory or other external media Moreover the M D R allows you to perform various other operations to your song data such as copy delete and convert Before purchasing any USB storage device you should check with your Yamaha dealer or an authorized Yamaha distributor for advice on compatibility Contents 1 Calling Up the M D R Display 103 7 Recalling Recorded Registrations 121 2 Formatting External Media 103 8 PlayingBackaSong 122 3 Selecting a Song 104 e Playing Back the Selected Part s 123 e Song Icons L A 108 e Fast Forward Rewind and Pause 123 4 Recording n ouuecu eeuu e ennnen eena 110 e Changing the Tempo 124 e Recording your performance 110 S e e EE E e Re recording Retry 111 A A N e Recording each part separately 411
25. E SEQUENCE END RHYTHM REGIST COPY FROM Instead of pressing the Sequence button on the Program display you can press one of the sequence buttons on the Sequence display or you can press the Sequence buttons in the Rhythm section on the panel to select the sequence number This selects the Sequence number to which a rhythm composition can be saved If you want to copy a rhythm composition from another Sequence number go on to the next step Press the Sequence button SEQ 1 SEQ 4 of the copy source on the right half in the display A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation Press COPY to execute the operation or select CANCEL to abort the operation Programming a Sequence 1 Press the RHYTHM button at the top right of the display to call up the RHYTHM Page 2 Press the CATEGORY button to call up the Rhythm Category Select pop up menu then select the Rhythm category corresponding to the rhythm you want to enter to the sequence If you press User category button you can select a rhythm of your own creation User rhythm The rhythm menu of the selected rhythm category is displayed Marching Band 1 om MB SEQUENCE 1 tear VC EN Git No 1 um A MARCH 5 10 ching Ba Alpine Mar 6 8 March 6 8 Kids 6 8 Organ March Broadway SF March Wild West Baroque 5 POSITION DATA SR El ES SES PS pasay pang jaay 3 Select the desired rh
26. Select the desired Registration by pressing the appropriate button on the display One display page contains 12 Registration buttons Pressing the numbered buttons in the display changes the display pages letting you select up to 48 Registrations from one Registration category button Change the display pages here Quick Introductory Guide E REGISTRATION MENU BASIC Simple 8Beat 1 eege ee sa HEHORY SFI sincte FINGERED custom A B C Lower pepa AB KODE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ The color of the selected Registration name changes to orange indicating that it El Reference Page has been selected and the Auto Bass Chord mode is shown at the bottom of the Auto Bass Chord page 71 display 4 Play your favorite song with the selected Registration DDK 7 Owner s Manual 21 aping Aojonpojjuj yoINO 22 Registration Menu List Page LIVE PERFORMANCE BASIC POPS amp ROCK DANCE amp BALLAD JAZZ amp LATIN SYMPHONY amp WORLD 1 Bell Pop Piano Simple 8 Beat 1 Dynamic 8 Beat Organ Ballad Blow On Sax Fanfare AOR Piano Simple 8 Beat 2 NY Ballad Dramatic Ballad Sax Ensemble String Orchestra Ballad Stack Light Step British Pop Love Ballad Moonlight Romantic Violin Rockin on Piano Sunny Pop 8
27. YAMAHA DUAL MANUAL KEYBOARD D D K Owner s Manual GENERAL PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference A WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock short circuiting damages fire or other hazards These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply Power cord e Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument e Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it e Use only the supplied power cord plug e Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord place heavy objects on it or place it in a position where anyone could walk on trip over or roll anything over it e Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way The instrument contains no user serviceable parts If it should appear to be malfunctioning discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel N CAUTION e Do not expose the instrument to rain use it near water or in damp or wet conditions or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill i
28. 4 Using the five DATA TO BE LOADED buttons select the desired data you want to load 5 Press the LOAD button to load the selected data in the Registration 6 Exit from the Regist Edit display by pressing the CLOSE button at the top right of the display When you select the protected song the buttons DATA TO BE LOADED may be unavailable grayed out For example combining a part of one protcted song with another protected song is not allowed DH ore When you load the Registration data by using the Next Regist function all data will be loaded no matter which buttons you select here WEN ore If you are loading a Registration while a rhythm is playing the sequence data and User rhythms in the Registration data cannot be loaded DDK 7 Owner s Manual 121 Music Data Recorder MDR HAM JepJooay Lq ASNN firn NOTE 8 Playing Back a Song When you play Electone data the resulting song 1 Select the song to be played back balance will vary according F A to the speakers you are For details on selecting a song see page 104 using firn NOTE 2 Press the gt Play button in the display to load the Registration data An hourglass icon appears indicating the Registration data is loading The functions intended for control with the Knee Lever must be assigned to the Foot Pedal If the song contains more than two Registration banks the first one will be loaded You can
29. 99 gt T o gt D gt z O ER pra oc E E O 0 oc ES m o E o gt pe O Zz m O J lt 100 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Select the parameter and part in the Parameter Select pop up menu After selecting the desired parameter the pop up menu automatically closes The amount of the selected parameter for each Registration is shown in the display E REGIST MEMORY 1 16 I E LS ON m ON ON ON ON m ON 2 415 Ile 10 12 13 Parameter value 7 nm TN a nm con HH HE Registration HH e HIH H rr sea H ies a LIB PARA O SETTINGS REVERB INC SET vum ON Selected me CS ez pra PS parameter DEC SELECT ALL OFF OFF 4 Select the targeted Registration numbers and turn them on Parameters in Registrations set to ON will be changed ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Vie e as 6 7 5 oia F2 43 14 16 is UU NANANA AM le NANANAHAN a D BE SBE BS ES 8 8 88 i 8 BN a a a a t ET a EHEH WW III NM BM KM KM UG BU NG BM BK BA BN BN Press the targeted Registration in the display and turn it on with the SETTINGS buttons ALL ON ALL OFE ON OFE and SELECT SETTINGS ALL ON SELECT ALL OFF ALL ON Selects all Registration memory numbers INC SET ON DEC OFF ALL OFF Cancels all Registration memory numbers ON Sets the currently selected Registration memory number to ON OFF Sets the currently selected Registration memory numb
30. PATTERN SETTING INPUT ei 8 SAVE FILE ee DATA CONTROL PART SEP SEAN S Lem em bato QUANTIZE GATE TINE ve RB _ 2 pa Al 3 ne EN E E ACCENT E ja pag El INSTRUMENT KA WA Ee uu _ coso CHANGE Gate time determines the actual length of time a note sounds For example a quarter note is sometimes played as tenuto long length and sometimes played as staccato short length Since 1 beat is made up of 480 clocks a quarter note played tenuto may have a gate time between 450 470 and a staccato quarter note may be about 240 Enter the Rhythmic Chord pattern The methods for entering the Rhythmic Chord pattern are the same as those for entering the rhythm pattern Any key you press sounds a C major triad chord C E and G For information on Step Write see page 156 for information on Real Time Write see page 162 You can also edit the entered Rhythmic Chord pattern using the same method as in Editing Entered Percussion Notes page 157 To change the gate time of the notes of the Rhythmic Chord pattern follow the instructions below Rhythm Program DDK 7 Owner s Manual 165 D gt Ki gt 3 v o Q a 3 166 DDK 7 Owner s Manual To change the Gate Time 1 Select the note for which you want to change the gate time see Step 1 on page 157 2 Press the Gate Time box to enable the box PATTERN SETTING INPUT GE
31. The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument The pan flute and sitar shown in the displays of the DDK 7 are on display at the Hamamatsu Museum of Musical Instruments This device is capable of using various types formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance Asa result this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended DDK 7 Owner s Manual POCOSSONIOS ii 4 8 Voice Edit 137 Main Features aa As bA 5 ji ee EE 137 Editing a Voice 138 PanelLayout 8 Savingihe edited Voice Ka ere E 8 Quitting Voice Edit 146 LCD Display Display Geert 10 Recalling an Edited Voice cece 146 ENEE AA 10 9 Rhythm PrograM 147 Eeer iL Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation 147 Getting Started aiiin 11 Rhythm Pattern Program ii 148 Using he LOD Display cincionasininisze nad 13 Rhythm Sequence Program 183 LCD Display Settings ii 16 Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data Voice EE 18 AUNA 192 Registration Menu 20 Confirming the Version of Your Dk 23 10Controllers 193 Factory Set Unitializing MMe DORA E FOGIS WICE iras 193 e FOOUP EE 196 EE EE 24 Expressio
32. XG Tp amp TbSection XG BrassSection2 XG HighBrass XG MellowBrass XG SynthBrass1 XG QuackBrass XG ResoSynBrass XG PolyBrass XG SynthBrass3 XG JumpBrass XG AnaVel Brass1 XG AnalogBrass1 6 XG SynthBrass2 SYNTH LEAD SYNTH PAD SYNTH EFFECTS XG SoftBrass 1 Oxygen 1 Insomnia 1 XG Rain XG SynthBrass4 Matrix Skydiver XG Clavi Pad XG ChoirBrass WireLead Bubblespace XG HarmoRain XG AnaVel Brass2 HipLead HipaStringPad XG AfricanWind XG AnalogBrass2 HopLead MellowPad XG Carib REED DanceHook Mediterrain XG SoundTrack 1 Sweet TenorSax TechLead NeoWarmPad XG Prologue Sweet AltoSax Tekkline CyberPad XG Ancestral Sweet SopranoSax SoftM
33. Modem Router LAN cable No router capability Cable type LAN cable USB LAN adaptor Here modem refers to an ADSL modem optical network unit ONU or cable modem DT wore Depending on the Internet connection you may not be able to connect to two or more devices for example a computer and the instrument depending on the contract with the provider This means you cannot connect with the DDK 7 If in doubt check your contract or contact your provider EI Reference Page Connecting USB storage devices or USB LAN adaptor page 234 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 209 Internet Direct Connection uoljoauuo9 eg jeu Connection example 2 NOTE Connecting by cable using a modem with router Some types of modems require an optional hub network for simultaneously ADSL modem connecting to several Router capability devices such as computer musical instrument etc LAN cable LAN cable USB LAN adaptor Connection example 3 Wireless connection Modem Router Access point LI Sa CP USB wireless LAN adaptor Here modem refers to an ADSL modem optical network unit ONU or cable modem D Accessing the Website from the DDK 7 To access the website press the INTERNET button while the instrum
34. When the ORIGINAL button is selected the DDK 7 songs are shown in the SONG SELECT Page when the XG button is selected the XG songs are shown MDR SONG SELECT TOOLS U E XG 001 MID USB 01 S0NG S i AEA REMAINING 146 60 NB an vc iw Zi P ORIGINAL ED SS RECORD CUSTOM 4 Select the desired song for playback 5 Press the gt Play button in the display to start song playback The following display appears letting you set the volume or mute settings for each part 1 2 WOR E XG 001MD TEMPO a PART TENPO PLAYING SETUP 100 v RESET PART XG VOLUME PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY 100 ES Pe A E E E E N 9 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLA Cm J om al am am ou om zi PART buttons Sets the each part for playback or mute off Each press of the button toggles between PLAY and OFF zl O XG VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the XG song within a range of 0 100 To set the volume touch the slider in the display directly or use the Data Control dial Music Data Recorder MDR PART SETUP Determines the volume balance of the parts Pressing this button calls up the following display O MDR wm MDR SINGISFIECT ms XG_001 MID cost gt Ef E ch Jom or Ef Sa mj mj E a zc ha Les j ato emt eae ots Lea j cn Le You can adjust the volume of each part within a range of 0 100 Use the ALL slider to adjust
35. when executing Factory Set since it erases all your existing data Always save your important data to external media such as USB flash memory El Kalakal baga Factory Set does not reset the Internet Direct Connection settings If you want to reset Initializing Internet Settin the Internet Direct Connection settings see page 221 po Settings page 221 1 Turn off the power 2 While holding down the ENDING 1 button turn the power back on POWER am ON m OFF ENDING IC N 3 Release the ENDING 1 button after Voice Display appears Reference Page If you don t want to reset the LCD Display settings you can initialize only Registration Initializing Registration settings See page 93 for more information Memory page 93 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 23 Quick Introductory Guide 2 Voices SODI0A 24 The DDK 7 features hundreds of high quality Voices Any of these Voices can be used on the Upper Keyboard and Lower Keyboard If you connect the Pedal Unit to the DDK 7 you can use any of these voices also on the Pedalboard Up to four Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together in a layer while the Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard each have two Voice sections Voices for the Upper Keyboard Voices for Pedalboard B Voices for the Lower Keyboard
36. EN Crash Cymbal 1 Tabel Dom Shaker D4 High Tom Sagat 3 Cabasa ee Di Ride Cymbal 1 Tabel Tak Cuica Mute E4 Crash Cymbal 2 Sagat 2 Cuica Open F4 Duhulla Dom Rik Dom Paila L LS Tambourine Rik Tak 2 Timbale H Open G4 Duhulla Tak Rik Finger 1 MEA Cowbell Rik Tak 1 a H A4 Duhulla Sak Rik Finger 2 Triangle Mute EN Claves Rik Brass Tremolo Triangle Open B4 Doff Dom Rik Sak Paila H C5 Rik Tik Wind Chime E E D5 5 5 E5 H F5 5 G5 S E E A5 S 3 E B5 E 5 c6 E DDK 7 Owner s Manual Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion You can assign any desired drum and percussion sound to any key or pedal and your original setups can be saved to eight memory locations User 1 through User 8 The User setting saved in User memory location can be called up by using the K B P 1 or K B P 2 buttons In the instructions below drum sounds are assigned to User 1 and called up with K B P 1 button 1 Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the K B P 1 button The K B P display appears 2 Press USER 1 on the display This procedure assigns User 1 to the K B P 1 button You can call up the User 1 setting the next time you press the K B P 1 button 3 Select the desired percussion kit See page 75 for selecting the kit 4 Press the ASSIGN button at the top right of the display to call up the ASSIGN Page In the ASSIGN Page you can assign spe
37. KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd 8F 9F Dongsung Bldg 158 9 Samsung Dong Kangnam Gu Seoul Korea Tel 080 004 0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia Sdn Bhd Lot 8 Jalan Perbandaran 47301 Kelana Jaya Petaling Jaya Selangor Malaysia Tel 3 78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue P O Box 885 MCPO Makati Metro Manila Philippines Tel 819 7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte Ltd 03 11 A Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road Singapore 409015 Tel 747 4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co Ltd 3F 6 Sec 2 Nan Jing E Rd Taipei Taiwan 104 R O C Tel 02 2511 8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co Ltd 891 1 Siam Motors Building 15 16 floor Rama 1 road Wangmai Pathumwan Bangkok 10330 Thailand Tel 02 215 2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 481 53 460 2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty Ltd Level 1 99 Oueensbridge Street Southbank Victoria 3006 Australia Tel 3 9693 5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N Z Ltd 146 148 Captain Springs Road Te Papapa Auckland New Zealand Tel 9 634 0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 481 53 460 2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Divis
38. LAST Only the last played key is sounded when two or more keys are played simultaneously TOP Only the highest note is sounded when two or more keys are played simultaneously When the Solo mode is on Lead Voice 2 sounds according to Last mode regardless of the setting made here O POLY only for Pedal Voices Allows you to switch the pedal polyphonic mode on or off Setting POLY to on switches the normally monophonic pedal Voices to polyphonic play This makes it possible to play the Pedalboard in various expressive ways such as playing legato or playing intervals and chords Keep in mind that you cannot exceed the total maximum polyphony 14 notes for all sections Upper Lower and Pedal Voice Condition Page 2 P LEAD VOICE 2 D E 32 4 Strings 1 Strings HN es O 1 mmm er VIBRATO THe E o TRANSPOSE TONE DELAY DEPTH SPEED TIME VIBRATO 0 0 a III ooz dh 6 The items included in this page differ between the Lead Voice sections and the other sections SLIDE 6 only applies to Lead Voice 1 and 2 0 2 0 3 0 4 O VIBRATO The Vibrato function wavers the level of the Voices making them sound warmer and Voice Controls and Effects more animated This effect is applied independently to each Voice section For some Voices vibrato may not be effective at all or the effect may not sound as expected O 1 PRESET USER Vibrato Control Selec
39. PATTERN UPPER UPPER2 LEADI LEAD2 LOWER LOWERZ PEDALI PEDAL2 To copy a preset rhythm To create your own rhythm Rhythm Program DDK 7 Owner s Manual 149 weJ6oJq wyWAyy 150 A Rhythm consists of 15 sections Intro 1 3 Main A D Fill In A D Ending 1 3 and Break In Rhythm Pattern Program you can enter or edit percussion notes one by one or assemble each part from other different rhythms to create your own new User Rhythm Case 1 Creating your own rhythm by changing a preset rhythm Preset Rhythm User Rhythm Intro 1 Main A Fill In A Intro 1 Main A Fill In A Changing Intro 1 2 to Intro 1 2 3 3 Save as a User Rhythm Ending 1 2 3 Ending 1 2 3 All Rhythm sections including any which have not been edited are saved as one User Rhythm Case 2 Creating your own rhythm by assembling parts from other different rhythms Preset Rhythm Intro 1 Main A Fill In A 2 Assemble some 3 sections or parts Ending 1 2 3 User Rhythm Intro 1 Main A Fill In A 2 D Save as a User Rhythm Preset Rhythm Ending 1 2 3 Intro 1 Main A Fill In A 2 3 Ending 1 2 D User Rhythm sounds into Intro 1 Main A
40. QWERTY keyboard Time zone This determines the time setting for the browser LAN In this display page you can make settings for the LAN connection These settings are needed for not only wired LAN connection but also wireless LAN connection SETTING Browser UN Wireless Others Use DHCP ACOSO Jonel O Make a written note of these settings in case you ONS server1 have to enter the settings again DNS server2 IP address Subnet nask Gateway Use DHCP DNS server 1 DNS server 2 IP address EXECUTE Subnet mask CANCEL Gateway Use DHCP Determines whether or not DHCP is used If your router is compatible with DHCP select ON set DNS automatically here DNS server 1 DNS server 2 These determine the addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers These settings must be made when Use DHCP above is set to ON set DNS manually or OFE IP address Subnet mask Gateway These settings are available only when DHCP is not used The settings here are IP address subnet mask and gateway server address These settings must be made when Use DHCP above is set to OFE Wireless LAN In this display page you can make settings for the wireless LAN connection These settings must be the same as the settings on the Access Point SETTING Browser LAN Jj Wireless Others d Access
41. SUSTAIN button page 49 O VOICE DISPLAY button page18 REVERB button page 46 O REGIST MENU button page 20 U ORGAN FLUTES button page 37 FOOT SWITCH button pages 94 193 OIL ORGAN FLUTES button page 37 OQ MDR button page 102 ROTARY SP SPEED button page 50 O INTERNET button page 210 O UTILITY button pages 16 205 208 238 Overview FOOT PEDAL jacks page 224 USB MIDI terminals page 224 AC INLET jack page 223 TO PEDAL connector page 225 1 0 connectors page 225 Upper keyboard Front Panel page 8 eyboard PHONES jack page 223 ia USB TO DEVICE terminal page 224 MIC jack page 223 10 DDK 7 Owner s Manual H Guick Introductory Guide Whether you are an advanced performer or have never touched an electronic keyboard in your life we recommend that you take the time to go through this basic section It shows you in the simplest possible manner how to start playing your DDK 7 Contents 1 Getting Started 11 4 Voice Display 18 2 Using the LCD Display 13 5 Registration Menu 20 e Changing the Display Page 13 e Selecting Registrations 20 e Pressing Buttons on the Display 14 e Registratio
42. This parameter is common to both Upper and Lower Organ Flute Voices FIRST Only the first note played will have attack All other notes played while the first is held have no attack EACH All notes played have an attack sound O REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ Flute Voice When the reverb depth in the REVERB Page 1 control is set to the minimum the setting here will have no effect VOLUME Determines the overall volume of the Organ Flute Voice The volume balance of the individual footages is maintained A minimum setting here produces no Organ Flute sound Press the EFFECT button in the upper right on the display to adjust the Rotary Speaker settings EFFECT Page IMB UPPER ORGAN FLUTES FOOTAGE ATTACK VOLUNE EFFECT EFFECT TYPE XG ROTARY SP PARANETER ratty al E d r EFFECT TYPE Select the Rotary Speaker tremolo effect type Pressing the button for which the effect El Reference Pages type or OFF is displayed calls up a list of the effect types Select the desired type Effect List page 52 from among the list Rotary Speaker page 50 IM UPPER ORGAN FLUTES oe ATTACK VOLINE EFFECT 7 UPPER ORGAN FLUTES ve mom e EFFECT TYPE SELECT ES EFFECT TYPE mmm owes wer wes o FREQUENCY GAI ROTARY SP 4 ROTARY SP 5 2WAY ROT SP DUAL ROTSP 1 R E E E DUAL RoTsP 2 DIST ROT SP ODRV ROT SP AMP ROT SP neren se mmm SP AMP 2ROT SP
43. allowing you to build up your own system and create just the sound you want Large 6 5 inch TFT LCD with Intuitive Touch Panel Operation page 13 This large LCD display not only lets you clearly see a wide selection of settings and parameters at almost any angle it also serves as a touch control panel letting you intuitively make selections and adjust settings simply by touching the screen Once you touch a setting you can even adjust it in finer detail if necessary with the Data Control dial DDK 7 Owner s Manual 5 6 The DDK 7 is compatible with the following formats MISI GM General MIDI is one of the most common Voice allocation formats GM System midleg Level 2 is a standard specification that enhances the original GM and improves Song data compatibility It provides for increased polyphony greater Voice selection expanded Voice parameters and integrated effect processing Wei XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more Voices and variations as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future GS was developed by the Roland Corporation In the same way as Yamaha XG GS is a major G3 enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects STYLE The Style Fil
44. however be displayed on a computer Files in the song File Explanation Extension Performance data This file contains performance data played on the mid keyboards and pedals of the DDK 7 Registration data This file contains Registration settings User Voices b00 User rhythms and Rhythm Sequences XG converted data This file contains XG song data for which DDK 7 mid performance data is converted to XG compatible format In addition one file extension nam is automatically created in each folder for organization maintenance of the folder contents It does not appear on the DDK 7 display DDK 7 Owner s Manual 109 Music Data Recorder MDR HAM Jepsooey Lq ASNN A Never attempt to eject the media or turn the power off during recording reading and playing back A wore You cannot record to a folder which contains songs for the EL series Electone such as EL 900 A Do not remove the media from the instrument while data is being recorded while the hourglass icon or other message is shown 110 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 4 Recording Recording your performance Set the desired Registrations on the DDK 7 Make all the DDK 7 settings necessary for the song you will record This means entering the all Registrations you will need for the entire performance in the Registration Memory Make sure also to select the Registration that you will use at the beginn
45. page 209 Formatting External Media page 103 EH nore If necessary use a USB hub Only self powered battery or external power supply types can be used USB hubs of up to one levels can be used 234 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Controlling the DDK 7 from an External Device You can use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to remotely play the sounds of your DDK 7 and change its Registrations You will need to set the MIDI transmit channels of the MIDI keyboard to match the fixed receive channels on your DDK 7 MIDI cable AAA MIDI messages MIDI IN MIDI OUT P 3 a MIDI keyboard or synthesizer MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used Connecting USB storage devices or USB LAN adaptor Using the USB TO DEVICE terminal s you can connect USB storage devices for saving your DDK 7 data and or a USB LAN adaptor for direct connection to the Internet Compatible USB devices You can connect a single USB LAN adaptor and up to two USB storage devices such as USB flash memory to the USB TO DEVICE terminal s Before purchasing a USB LAN adaptor or USB storage devices please consult your Yamaha dealer or an authorized Yamaha distributor for advice or see the Yamaha website http www global yamaha com Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminals e Never turn the USB device s power o
46. Bong preven sounds of th These songs cannot be stored to media J sch as Sma la cards Wa gt REFRESH STOP a CO SETTING f BOOKMARK Un Download the latest version update for your instrument denne music store About the Official Yamaha Online Music Store AAA Howe 5 a Terms of use Contact us O Offline indicator This is shown when the instrument is not connected to the Internet When this appears you cannot view any web pages Communication Status indicator 3 This flashes when the web page is being loaded indicating that communication with the site is in progress The indicator lights continuously when loading is finished communication is established SSL indicator 3 This is shown when the opened website uses SSL and it indicates that data is encrypted before transmission Wireless LAN indicator When you connect the DDK 7 to Internet using wireless LAN an icon indicating the condition of the connection is displayed If the signal to the DDK 7 becomes weak or there is no signal from the access point move the DDK 7 nearer to the access point 111 Strong Normal Weak not connected to Internet Lu Fe No signal not connected to Internet Communication status indicator The following three messages will be shown depending on the status of accessing web site Now opening web page Indicates loading of the web page Web page has
47. Bongo L Bongo Analog L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Hi Hat Close Conga Analog H Conga Analog H Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Crash Cymbal 1 Conga Analog M Conga Analog M Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Hi Hat Open Conga Analog L Conga Analog L Conga L Conga L Conga L Crash Cym Mute Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Ride Cymbal 2 Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Hi Hat Pedal 2 Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Ride Cymbal 1 Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Hi Hat Pedal 1 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Ride Cymbal Cup Maracas 2 Maracas 2 Maracas Maracas Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle H Cym Brush Shot Samba Whistle L Samba Whistle L Samba Whistle L Samba Whistle L Samba Whistle L Cymbal March Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Analog HH Close Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Orch Cymbal Roll Claves 2 Claves 2 Claves Claves Claves Analog HH Open Wood Block H Dance Perc 3 Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Orchestra Cymbal Wood Block L Dance Perc 4 Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Orch Cymbal Mute Scratch H 2 Dance Breath 1 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Scratch L 2 Dance Breath 2 Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Tam Tam Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Shaker
48. CarEngnignition Crash Cymbal 2 Claves Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal Duhulla Dom Paila L Paila L Tambourine Car Passing Tambourine Timbale H Open Timbale H Open Cabasa Splash Cymbal Car Crash Duhulla Tak Cowbell Siren Cowbell Finger Snap Crash Cymbal 2 Train Duhulla Sak Vibraslap Jet Plane Claves Hand Claps Ride Cymbal 2 Starship Doff Dom Paila H Paila H Wind Bell Down Bongo H Burst Katem Dom Cowbell Top Cowbell Top Agogo High Bongo L Roller Coaster atem Tak Wind Bell Up Conga H Mute Submarine Katem Sak Agogo Low Conga H Open atem Tak Bells Conga L Doff Tak Guiro Short Guiro Short Cowbell 4 Timbale H abla Dom Guiro Long Guiro Long Shaker Timbale L abla Tak 1 Cowbell 3 Agogo H abla Tik Guiro Short Agogo L Shower Laugh abla Tak 2 Tambourine Tambourine Cowbell 2 Cabasa Thunder Scream abla Sak Guiro Long Maracas Wind Punch abla Roll Edge Cowbell 1 Samba Whistle H Stream Heart Beat abla Flam Taiko 2 Samba Whistle L Bubble Foot Steps Sagat 1 Maracas Maracas Ohdaiko 2 Guiro Short Feed abel Dom Shaker Shaker Taiko 1 Guiro Long Sagat 3 Cabasa Cabasa Ohdaiko 1 Claves abel Tak Cuica Mute Ohtsuzumi 2 Wood Block H Sagat 2 Cuica Open Ohtsuzumi 1 Wood Block L Rik Dom Kakegoe 3 Cuica Mute Rik Tak 2 Kotsuzumi 4 Cuica Open Rik Finger 1 Kakegoe 2 Triangle Mute Rik Tak 1 Kotsuzumi 3 Triangle Open Rik Finger 2 Triangle Mute Kakegoe 1 Shaker Rik Brass Tremolo Triangle Open Kotsuzumi 2 Jingle Bells Rik Sak Kotsuzumi 1 Bell Tree Dog
49. HardBass Fiddle OrchestraFlute Trombone ResoBass Banjo OrchestraOboe SoloTrombone HouseBass Sitar Tutti SoftTrombone BigDroneBass Koto Strings MellowTrombone RockBass Shamisen Orch Strings MutedTrombone SuperFretles SoloViolin StringsQuartet BaritonHorn PickBass TremoloStrings ConcertStrings BaritonHit FusionBass PizzicatoStrings AnalogStrings AlpBass Bass amp Cymbal XG Violin ChamberStrings FlugelHorn AnalogBass XG SIwAtkViolin BowStrings Tuba 2 DXFunkBass 2 XG Viola 2 SlowStrings 2 Live HyperBrass DrySynBass XG Cello MarcatoStrings Live PopBrass 80 sSynBass XG Contrabass SynStrings1 Live OctaveBrass HiQBass XG Trem Strings SynStrings2 Live FrenchHorns FunkBass XG SlwAtTremStr OrchestraHit Live Symph Horns MellowFinger XG Suspensestr Live Gospel BrassCombo ClickBass XG PizzicatoStr Live Humm BrassSection PunchyBass XG OrchestralHarp HahChoir BreathBrass TBBass XG YangChin SweetHeaven HybridCompBrass Mega Aco Bass DreamHeaven NaturalBrass Mega FingerBass Live Mmh Sforzando Mega PickBass GothicVox BigBrass Mega Fretless Sunbeam BallroomBrass XG AcousticBass BellHeaven BrightBrass XG JazzRhythm PanHeaven MellowBrass XG VXUprghtBass ProHeaven HybriHorn 3 XG FingerBass 3 Choir 3 Hybripad XG FingerDark AirChoir SoftVel Brass XG FlangeBass VoxHumana 80 sBrass XG Bass amp DistEG Voices SoftBrass XG FingerSlap UuhChoir FullHorns XG FingerBass2 XG Timpani SmoothTrombone XG ModulatedBass XG Strings1 HighBrass XG PickBass XG StereoStr
50. Press the F PEDAL button at the top right of the display to call up the Foot Pedal Page HA FOOT PEDAL FOOT PEDALI GLOBAL D I _MDI_ AUX OUT wm rem SUSTAIN J SLIDE aa SLIDE Kur SOLO RHYTHM CONTROL J GLIDE RHYTHM CONTROL J GLIDE ROTARY SPEAKER REGIST SHIFT ROTARY SPEAKER REGIST SHIFT EXPRESSION OFF EXPRESSION J OFF In this display you can assign the control function to the Foot Pedal 3 Select the control function to be assigned to the Foot Pedal Select the desired function button from the left side of the display if you ve connected the Foot Pedal to the FOOT PEDAL 1 VOLUME terminal select from the right side if you ve connected the Foot Pedal to the FOOT PEDAL 2 SUSTAIN terminal O FOOT PEDAL GLOBAL EXP J MDI AUX OUT FPEDAL FOOT PEDAL POLARITY E FOOT PEDALI wan re SUSTAIN J SLIDE SOLO RHYTHM CONTROL J GLIDE ROTARY SPEAKER J REGIST SHIFT M 0 C Controllers The polarity of the Foot Pedal will automatically be selected depending on the selected function however you can select the polarity manually The effect is constantly applied as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed Releasing the Foot Pedal turns the effect off DDK 7 Owner s Manual 197 Q o 3 o ba 2 D 198 Controlling Sustain You can control the on off status of Sustain for each Voice S
51. TION WAH mmm hafai cue wocciiaeais md Select the desired effect category and the list automatically closes After changing the category the variation type below automatically changes corresponding to the selected category O TYPE Variation Type Determines the type of the variation effect Pressing the TYPE button calls up the effect 3 a type list a gt 3 3 8 PATTERN SETTING INPUT M SAW J SAVE FILE cost S Marching Band 1 mm voice Pan revere CHORUS Aa g7 INTRO 1 VARIATION FLANGER E ULOL Select the desired type and the list automatically closes Variation sliders Determines the amount of Variation effect applied to each accompaniment part Range 0 127 170 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Detailed settings for each percussion instrument You can independently adjust the settings of pan pitch reverb and volume for each instrument 1 Press the DRUM SETUP button at the top of the display to call up the DRUM SETUP Page 2 Select the desired part Main Drum or Add Drum PATTERN SETTING INPUT peee Oe SAVE FILE Marching Band 1 A Symphony Kit J Cc C1 Gran Cassa Mute VOLUME REVERB a Ke Press the appropriate key the key to which the instrument to be 3 changed is assigned The selected instruments name is shown on the display and you can change its settings PITCH
52. aaa EN Jr a E QUANTIZE OUANTIZE Ln lt gt If the part you have select contains a preset accompaniment pattern a message appears prompting you to confirm whether you want to clear the existing data or not To create your own Rhythmic Chord pattern select CLEAR ETT wore Select the desired Voice The Voice menu that appears here is not the same as the Pressing the button showing the Voice name calls up the relevant Voice Menu one for the Voice Sections Select the desired Voice category with the instrument icon buttons then select See th a the desired Voice from the Voice Menu The selected Voice is called up for both Voice List on page 179 the Upper and Lower keyboards D gt Ki gt 3 v o Q a 3 PATTERN SETTING INPUT DG sele SAVE FILE Marching Band 1 E Ry CR EG aa a ka pai Ka es Voices can also be changed even after entering the Rhythmic Chord pattern You can select only one Voice for one part Chord 1 or Chord 2 When you want to create a Rhythmic Chord pattern including two different Voices select one Voice for Chord 1 and another for Chord 2 CHANGE 164 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 4 Set the appropriate Guantize value For details on the Ouantize function refer to page 161 5 Set the Gate Time You can adjust the Gate Time setting by using GATE TIME _4_ _ J buttons in the display or Data Control dial
53. e Cassa ite fon OTE THE SES D NG 77 NA a E ES i SR m el SS INSTRUMENT a a lan JE la e Rhythm Program DDK 7 Owner s Manual 155 uweBoJg wyMyy Reference Page Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern page 151 156 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Set the Gate Time This is optional and only necessary when you want to enter a sustaining sound such as a whistle For a list of instruments that require a Gate Time setting refer to the Percussion Kit List on page 176 For details on Gate Time refer to page 165 Use the ACCENT buttons to enter the sound to the selected point Press each ACCENT button to actually enter the percussion sounds You can change the rhythm clock to which the percussion sound is entered by pressing the QUANTIZE gt buttons PATTERN SETTING Marching Band 1 zi serie SAVE J FILE _ Serben kit C1 Gran Cassa Mute i QUANTIZE GATE TIME si AL rel snot mmm INSTRUMENT E O Rhythm Clock box Displays the current position in the pattern according to measure beat and number of clicks A click is the smallest division of a pattern and one beat is made up of 480 clicks The rhythm clock advances up to the measures set in the SETTING Page and loops back to the beginning of the rhythm 01 01 000 ACCENT buttons Records the instrument and determines its volume or Accent level
54. for example the Voice Brilliance setting for the Upper Keyboard and want the same setting to be applied to the entire instrument Available parameters e Reverb e Rhythm Reverb e Panning e Brilliance e Volume e Sustain 1 Press the VOICE DISPLAY button on the panel Press the 2 button at the top right of the display to select Page 2 E REGIST MEMORY 1 16 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON N SA AA a A a AA 10 n 2 13 4 157 16 CAM NN NG IN EES ES Eg NG NA NM MM VOICE REGIST FOOT DISPLAY MENU SWITCH Eu In A EEE RN BR RR BEEBE RR BIR RR RR A RW Co EEEEEEEEEEEEEEE CG O A A BG on O O SI PARAMETER SETTINGS REVERB INC SET ALL on ON TIME DEC SELECT ALL OFF OFF Press the PARAMETER button indicates the currently selected parameter in the display to select the desired parameter for Parameter menin uruan a changing The Parameter Select pop up menu appears letting you select the desired parameter a REGIST MEMORY 1 16 1 ED 3 l minar Nara 1 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON tle e a e le lz e e CA YAA WANA a8 Na 2225 B EE H 22250 22250 a M El BEER NN NN NG SN SN NN EEE EE SESSRSESSE SES S S JJ PARAMETER SETTINGS REVERB INC J SET J ALL ON TIME DEC SELECT ALL OFF v mehine urmann a AAN emm IR wm PAN auer SUSTAIN DDK 7 Owner s Manual
55. operation Select CLEAR to clear the currently selected rhythm sequence or select CANCEL to abort the operation and return to the previous display DDK 7 Owner s Manual 187 Rhythm Program ueJBoJ 4 WU AyH EH ore If you are loading a Registration while a rhythm is playing the sequence data and User rhythms in the Registration data cannot be loaded Programming a Registration Sequence The Registration Sequence feature allows you to have desired Registrations automatically called up in sequence when playing a Rhythm Sequence It lets you program the timing bar beat clock at which the Registration is changed You can also program the Next Regist function in Registration Sequence A Registration Sequence is saved as a part of the corresponding Rhythm Sequence With this feature you can have the sounds of the instrument change as desired automatically to match the Rhythm Sequence playback 1 Press the REGIST button at the top right in the display to call up the Registration Sequence display M SEQUENCE A CIA The Registration Sequence is programmed from this display The entered Registration number is shown along the Registration row in the middle of the display 2 Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory section 188 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 3 Using the _4 _ J buttons in the
56. 00 7F 13 00 10 1 00 0B Rhythm Selector Number 00 0B O 00 0B O 00 0B 13 00 11 1 00 7F Percussion Volume 00 MIN O 00 7F x 7F MAX 13 00 12 1 00 7F Percussion Reverb Send Level 00 MIN O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 13 00 13 1 00 7F 2nd Expression 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 Tempo Control On Off 01 0N 13 00 14 1 00 7F Footswitch Rhythm Control 00 INTRO 1 O 00 7F O 00 7F 01 INTRO 2 02 INTRO 3 08 MAIN A 09 MAIN B OA MAIN C OB MAIN D 18 BREAK 20 ENDING 1 21 ENDING 2 22 ENDING 3 7E STO 7F OFF INTRO 1 STOP 13 00 15 1 00 7F Add Drum On Off 00 0FF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 13 00 16 1 00 7F Main Drum On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 13 00 17 1 00 7F Chord 1 On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 13 00 18 1 00 7F Chord 2 On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 13 00 19 1 00 7F Pad On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 13 00 1A 1 00 7F Phrase 1 On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 13 00 1B 1 00 7F Phrase 2 On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 13 00 1C 1 00 7F Auto Fill On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 Rhythm Seguence Parameters Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm H 13 01 00 03 1 00 7F Sequence SEQ 1 SEQ 4 00 OFF O 00 7F x 01 0N DDK 7 Owner s Manual 257 Appendix xipuaddy 258 Accompaniment Parameters
57. 1 SCO MENU ASSIGN SETUP a on a DR SC men WI Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Gm Mute Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Orchestra Cymbal Orch Cynbal Rol Orch Cybal Mute Cymbal March Press the key Hold down the Instrument name When the assignment is complete the key name and instrument name is displayed at the top of the display The assignments are saved to the User memory selected in Step 2 in this example User 1 7 Repeat the operation steps above as necessary to construct your own User Keyboard Percussion set To erase one instrument Simultaneously hold down the CLEAR button in the display ASSIGN Page and press the key or pedal corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase MY KBP 1 ux 03 Tam Tam _MENU 7 SETUP aaa TF ka OF LE KB Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cym Mute ch Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Orchestra Cymbal Orch Cymbal Roll Orch Cymbal Mute Cymbal March Cm Brush Shot Tam Tam Multi Kit CYMBAL AN The Keyboard Percussion setting you have created is automatically saved when you switch to another display While data is being saved the square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds Do not turn the power off while the Keyboard Percussion settings are being saved To erase all instruments You can clea
58. 113 Song Delete You can delete data in one song only Registration data only performance data or both of them entire song can be deleted The songs created with the EL series such as EL 900 cannot be deleted To delete the XG song the method is different from the song delete Refer to XG Song Delete page 134 1 Select the song to be deleted For details on selecting a song see page 104 Press the TOOLS button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page DDK 7 Owner s Manual Never attempt to eject the media or turn the power off during copying Music Data Recorder MDR HAW JepJooay Lq ASNN Press the SONG DELETE button to call up the Song Delete D 130 DDK 7 Owner s Manual display MDR SONG SELECT TOS MDR SONG SELECT TORES a SONG 1 USB 01 SONG REG_001 XG_001 MID USB 01 50NG SONG DELETE as REPEAT CHANGE REMAINING ma SETTING EH MEMORY SLA KS SE SS mm SONG SONG 1 XG SONG SONG XG SONG SNG o COPY DELETE DELETE RZ REGIST L SONG CONVERT CONVERT mal TOEL FROMEL TO Confirm that the desired song to be deleted is displayed in upper half of the display If you want to change the song press the CHANGE button to call up the song select display and select the desired song Select the desired data you want to delete REGIST and or SONG When you want to delete the entire song select both REGIST and
59. 18 1 00 7F Break On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 13 05 20 1 00 7F Ending 1 On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 13 05 21 1 00 7F Ending 2 On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 13 05 22 1 00 7F Ending 3 On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0 Keyboard Percussion Parameters Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive RxRange Transmit Tx Range hh mm ll 13 10 11 1 00 7F Volume 00 MIN O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 13 10 12 1 00 7F Reverb Send Level 00 MIN O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX DDK 7 Owner s Manual Overall System Parameters Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm ll 14 00 00 1 00 7F Disable On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F x 01 0N 14 00 01 1 00 7F Organ Flute Attack Mode 00 Each O 00 7F O 00 01 01 First 14 00 02 1 3A 46 Transpose 3A KeyDown O 3A 46 O 3A 46 40 Normal 46 KeyUp 14 00 03 1 01 0C 2nd Expression Range 01 100C O 01 0C O 01 0C 0C 1200 C 14 00 04 1 00 7F Footswitch Mode 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 03 01 Rhythm 02 Glide 03 Rotary Speaker 14 00 05 1 00 7F Pitch 00 PitchDown O 00 7F O 00 7F 40 Normal 7F PitchUp 14 00 06 1 00 7F Footswitch Glide Time 00 FAST O 00 7F O 04 1C 7F SLOW 14 00 08 1 00 7F MIDI Control Expression INT EXT 00 Internal O 00 7F x 01 External 14 00 09 1 00 7F MIDI Control Lead 1 INT EXT 00 Internal O 00 7
60. 2 Cuica Mute Claves 2 Maracas 2 Surdo Mute Cuica Open Guiro Long Vibraslap Analog Surdo Open Cabasa Guiro Short PERCUSSION 2 Cuica Mute Shaker Maracas 2 Kick Dance 1 Cuica Open Agogo H Vibraslap Kick Dance 2 Cabasa Agogo L PERCUSSION 2 Dance Breath 1 Shaker Samba Whistle H Surdo Mute Dance Breath 2 Agogo H Samba Whistle L Surdo Open Cabasa Agogo L PERCUSSION 3 Scratch H 2 Shaker Samba Whistle H Tambourine Scratch L 2 Agogo H Samba Whistle L Castanet Cabasa Agogo L PERCUSSION 3 Jingle Bells Shaker Samba Whistle H Tambourine Bell Tree Agogo H Samba Whistle L Castanet Triangle Open Agogo L PERCUSSION 3 Jingle Bells Triangle Mute Samba Whistle H Tambourine Anlg Bell Tree Wood Block H Samba Whistle L HiQ2 Triangle Open Wood Block L PERCUSSION 3 Jingle Bells Triangle Mute Sticks Tambourine Bell Tree Wood Block H Whip Slap HiQ2 Triangle Open Wood Block L Finger Snap Jingle Bells Triangle Mute Sticks Hand Clap Bell Tree Dance Perc 3 Whip Slap PERCUSSION 4 Triangle Open Dance Perc 4 Finger Snap HiQ Triangle Mute Snare Dance 1 Hand Clap Click Noise Wood Block H Whip Slap PERCUSSION 4 Scratch H Wood Block L Finger Snap Hi Q Scratch L Sticks Dance Clap Click Noise Seq Click L Whip Slap PERCUSSION 4 Scratch H Seq Click H Finger Snap Hi Q Scratch L Metronome Click Hand Clap Click Noise Seq Click L Metronome Bell PERCUSSION 4 Scratch Dance 1 Seq Click H Hi Q Scratch Dance 2 Metronome Click Click Noise Dance Perc 2 Metronome Bell CYMBAL Scratch H Hi
61. 2 S 60 Bongo H Bongo Analog H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H 61 Bongo L Bongo Analog L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L 62 Conga Analog H Conga Analog H Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute 63 Conga Analog M Conga Analog M Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open 64 Conga Analog L Conga Analog L Conga L Conga L Conga L 65 Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H 66 Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L 67 Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H 68 Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Shower O 69 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Thunder O 70 Maracas 2 Maracas 2 Maracas Maracas Maracas Wind O 71 Samba Whistle H O Samba Whistle H O Samba Whistle H O Samba Whistle H O Samba Whistle H O Stream O 72 Samba Whistle L O Samba Whistle L O Samba Whistle L O Samba Whistle L O Samba Whistle L O Bubble O 73 Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Feed O 74 Guiro Long O Guiro Long O Guiro Long O Guiro Long O Guiro Long O 75 Claves 2 Claves 2 Claves Claves Claves 76 Wood Block H Dance Perc 3 Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H 77 Wood Block L Dance Perc 4 O Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L 78 Scratch H 2 Dance Breath 1 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute 79 Scratch L 2 Dance Breath 2 O Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open 80 Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute 81 Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open 82 Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker 83 Ji
62. 6 above Range 64 63 Saving Rhythm Patterns You can save your newly created rhythm pattern as a User Rhythm up to a maximum of 48 patterns If necessary confirm the contents of the rhythm you want to 1 save For details see page 173 2 Press the SAVE button at the top right of the display to call up the SAVE Page If the rhythm is playing it will automatically be stopped Select the User Rhythm number to which you wish to save The following display appears prompting confirmation of the operation PATTERN eme WUT rect sre QUE Fe PATTERN eme WUT rect sere QUE Fe Marching Band 1 1002 AA 1007 WI 5 4 Do you want to save to User 1 E E pal Pa ei E 172 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 4 Press the SAVE button to save the pattern or press CANCEL to abort the operation Remaining Memory amount of memory available for storing rhythms is shown on the display as a percentage DRUM PATTERN SETTING INPUT Zi sene SAVED FILE Marching Band 1 Remaining Memory WW Il User 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 When the pattern cannot be saved because of lack of available memory space a Data full message appears Return to the previous page by pressing OK in this case You should periodically save your rhythm as you are creating it and check the amount of remaining memory If the rhythm currently being edited cannot be saved because of a lack of memory space erase some
63. 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 61 2 0000 7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 16 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 62 1 Sustain On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 7F 01 0N 10 00 07 63 1 Length 7F Hold O 00 7F O 00 7F 7E Long 00 Short Organ Flute Voice Parameters Address mm O 1 UK LK Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm H 11 00 01 00 1 00 7F Footage 16 00 O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 11 00 01 01 1 00 7F Footage 8 00 O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 11 00 01 02 1 00 7F Footage 5 1 3 00 O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 11 00 01 03 1 00 7F Footage 4 00 O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 11 00 01 04 1 00 7F Footage 2 2 3 00 O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX DDK 7 Owner s Manual 255 Appendix xipuaddy 256 Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm H 11 00 01 05 1 00 7F Footage 2 00 MIN O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 11 00 01 06 1 00 7F Footage 1 3 5 00 MIN O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 11 00 01 07 1 00 7F Footage 1 1 3 00 MIN O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 11 00 01 08 1 00 7F Footage 1 00 MIN O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 11 00 01 09 1 00 7F Response 00 FAST O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F SLOW 11 00 01 OA 1 00 7F Attack 4 00 MIN O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 11 00 01 0B 1 00 7F Attack 2 2 3 00 MIN O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F
64. 9 See oa A aeons 128 e Punchan Recording ana maana ka ER ae 113 a De Ge SE ba 5 Changing the Song Name 113 BEE na aN ie Pe Ne a 139 6 Saving Registrations as Registration Data File 116 e XG Song Copy j l a 133 e Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song 117 e XG Song Delete 4384 e Replacing Registrations 118 e Converting to EL format 134 e Next Regist Settings Changing the order of the e Converting from EL format 135 Registrationdata 118 e Checking the Remaining Memory media ID 136 Ed E Song data gt Delete USB flash memory Convert Ya 19pl0D99Y eq ISN AHA Ip im J Y Before using a USB device read through the important section Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminals on page 234 About USB devices compatible with the DDK 7 see Compatible USB devices on page 234 To protect your data write protect switch Some USB flash memory devices are equipped with a write protect switch To prevent accidental erasure of important data saved in USB flash memory slide the write protect switch on the device to the protect position When saving data make sure that the write protect switch is set to t
65. BellChoir 0 O 123 XG Seashore 0 O 103 XG Echoes 0 O 124 XG BirdTweet 0 8 103 XG Echoes2 0 O 125 XG TelephoneRing 0 14 103 XG EchoPan 0 O 126 XG Helicopter 0 64 103 XG EchoBells 0 O 127 XG Applause 0 65 103 XG BigPan 0 0 128 XG Gunshot 0 66 103 XG SynthPiano 64 0 1 XG CuttingNoise 0 67 103 XG Creation 64 0 2 XG CuttingNoise2 0 68 103 XG StarDust 64 0 4 XG StringSlap 0 69 103 XG Reso amp Panning 64 0 17 KGFI KeyClick 0 O 104 XG Sci Fi 64 0 33 XG Shower 0 64 104 XG Starz 64 0 34 XG Thunder 0 O 105 XG Sitar ETHNIC 64 0 35 XG Wind 0 32 105 XG DetunedSitar 64 0 36 XG Stream 0 35 105 XG Sitar2 64 0 37 XG Bubble 0 96 105 XG Tambra 64 0 38 XG Feed 0 97 105 XG Tamboura 64 0 49 XG Dog 0 O 106 XG Banjo 64 0 50 XG Horse DDK 7 Owner s Manual 243 Appendix xipuaddy Voice Number Voice Name Category MSB LSB PRG 64 0 51 XG BirdTweet2 SOUND 64 O 55 XG Ghost EFFECTS 64 0 56 XG Maou 64 0 65 XG PhoneCall 64 0 66 XG DoorSqueak 64 0 67 XG DoorSlam 64 0 68 XG ScratchCut 64 0 69 XG ScratchSplit 64 0 70 XG WindChime 64 0 71 XG TelphoneRing2 64 0 81 XG CarEnginelgn 64 0 82 XG CarTiresSqel 64 0 83 XG CarPassing 64 0 84
66. Block L Whip Slap Jingle Bells Triangle Mute Sticks Finger Snap Bell Tree Wood Block H Whip Slap Hand Clap Triangle Open Wood Block L Finger Snap PERCUSSION 4 Triangle Mute Sticks Hand Clap HiQ Wood Block H Whip Slap PERCUSSION 4 Click Noise Wood Block L Finger Snap Hi Q Scratch H Sticks Hand Clap Click Noise Scratch L Whip Slap PERCUSSION 4 Scratch H Seq Click L Finger Snap Hi Q Scratch L Seq Click H Hand Clap Click Noise Seq Click L Metronome Click PERCUSSION 4 Scratch H Seq Click H Metronome Bell HIQ Scratch L Metronome Click Click Noise Seq Click L Metronome Bell Scratch H Seq Click H CYMBAL Scratch L Metronome Click Electro Kit Crash Analog Seq Click L Metronome Bell CYMBAL Crash Cymbal 2 Seq Click H Crash Cymbal 1 Splash Cymbal Metronome Click RockKit Crash Cymbal 2 Chinese Cymbal Metronome Bell CYMBAL Splash Cymbal Ride Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal 2 DDK 7 Owner s Manual RoomKit Crash Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal Cup CYMBAL Splash Cymbal Ride Cymbal 2 Hat Open Analog Crash Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Hat Close Analog Crash Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Hi Hat Open Hat Close Anlg 2 Splash Cymbal Ride Cymbal 2 Hi Hat Closed SNARE DRUM Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Hi Hat Peda Snare Analog Ride Cymbal 1 Hi Hat Open SNARE DRUM Snare Analog 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hi Hat Clo
67. Cowbell Top Wood Block L Tabla Tak 1 Tambourine Sticks Tabla Tak 2 Guiro Long Whip Slap Tabla Sak Guiro Short Finger Snap Tabla Tik Maracas Hand Clap Tabla Roll Edge Cuica Open PERCUSSION 4 Tabla Flam Cuica Mute HIQ Tabel Dom Cabasa Click Noise Tabel Tak Shaker Scratch H ARABIC 3 PERCUSSION 2 Scratch L Sagat 1 Triangle Open Seq Click L Sagat 2 Triangle Mute Seq Click H Sagat 3 Wind Chime Metronome Click Rik Dom Hand Clap Metronome Bell Rik Tak 1 Rik Tak 2 SFX Kit 1 Rik Sak SFX Rik Tik Cutting Noise 1 Rik Finger 1 Cutting Noise 2 Rik Finger 2 6 Registration Memory Registration Memory allows you to store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and LCD providing a convenient way to instantly change all Voice settings and rhythms while you re playing with the simple touch of a single button on the Registration Memory panel The buttons are conveniently located between the Upper and Lower keyboards for easy access while playing Moreover you can also recall the settings using the right footswitch on the Pedal Unit or optional Foot Pedal All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to a USB flash memory or other external media 8 a E a a E o D 2 o a 12 o bel n 12 D Various types of basic Registrations have been programmed to the numbered Registration Memory buttons 1 16 When you r
68. DDK 7 Owner s Manual O FOOT PEDAL jacks For connecting to an optional FC4 FC5 FC7 FC9 Foot Pedal O 1 VOLUME jack For controlling the volume and a range of other important functions O 2 SUSTAIN jack For controlling the sustain and a range of other important functions MIDI IN OUT terminals For connecting external MIDI devices such a synthesizer or sequencer You can also use these to connect with a computer that has a MIDI Interface USB terminals 1 USB TO DEVICE terminal For connecting USB storage devices such as USB flash memory or a USB LAN adaptor for connecting to the Internet 2 USB TO HOST terminal For connecting to a computer with a USB cable To connect to a computer make sure that an appropriate USB MIDI driver is installed to the computer USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral devices OPTICAL OUT terminal For connection using an optical fiber cable This terminal outputs a digital signal of 44 1 kHz 24 bits TO PEDAL terminal For connecting to the DDKU P7 Pedal Unit AUX IN Phone L L R R jacks This pair of stereo phone jacks is for connection to an external device The signal from the connected external device sounds from external speakers connected to the DDK 7 AUX OUT LEVEL FIXED jacks 1 SUB 1 2 jacks For c
69. Determines the central frequency of the high frequency range that is to be boosted or cut EQ Hi Gain 12 12 dB Determines how much increase decrease the wave frequency point of EQ high frequency HPF Cutoff 500Hz 16 k Hz Determines the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter Frequencies above this value are cut or filtered out Drive 0 127 Determines the amount or depth of the Enhancer effect Mix Level 0 127 Determines how much of the processed enhanced sound is mixed together with the original sound DDK 7 Owner s Manual 57 Voice Controls and Effects Ste PUB SJOJJUO 80104 PITCH CHANGE IMPULSE EXP P t Val D ipti This effect changes the pitch SISTE SE EE Density 0 159 22 61 msec Determines the density Dispersion 4 028 msec 4 000 Determines the resonance Effect Type t time PITCH CHANGE Wet Level 0 127 Determines the level of the XG PCH CHG 1 effected sound XG PCH CHG 2 RESONATOR Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description Type Type1 6 Determines the type Pitch 24 24 Determines the amount of Decay Time 4 028 msec Determines the length of pitch change in semitones 4 000
70. E AA F4 E A4 AH EE EE FE a a a E EE a ng a simo ec 114 DDK 7 Owner s Manual To delete the entered character 1 Move the cursor to the character you want to delete Cursor DATA CONTROL SONGNAME En zuia or Press the DELETE button at the bottom right in the display The character is deleted s3 Ai E E FH E E Hai pai a CO E VE E moj KR To convert into kanji Japanese language This applies only if you are using the 28 Kana Kan button in Japanese 1 When the input Hiragana characters are shown in the reverse display highlighted press the kanji conversion button one or several times to convert to the characters into the appropriate kanji e The reversed area can be changed by the 4 P buttons in the display or the Data Control dial e The converted area can be cleared at once by pressing the cancel button 2 To actually enter the change press the OK button or enter the next character To enter the hiragana character itself without converting it press the delete button A name is not available message may appear when you press the OK button to finish entering the name If this message appears the name is invalid and you should enter another name SA The following names cannot be used xx indicates numbers MDR_xx EVT ELS_SONG NAM MDR xxx TMP TMP MDR xx MID MDR_xx MID REG_xxx TMP TMPE02 MIR xx Bxx REG xxx B00 ELS SON
71. FREQ Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter Range 9600 24000 cent O RESONANCE Determines the amount of resonance harmonic emphasis applied to the signal at the cutoff frequency Some Elements are not affected by this parameter Range 16 140 Filter Cutoff frequency and Resonance Filter modifies the tone by cutting the output of a specific frequency portion of the sound This DDK 7 is equipped with a low pass filter which passes only those signals below the cutoff frequency and cuts signals above the cutoff frequency Cutoff Frequency Level sa A A T TT i These freguencies are passed by the filter Freguency Level Resonance i Frequenc Cutoff Frequency S yi You can produce a relatively bright or darker sound by setting the cutoff frequency Resonance is a parameter that boosts the level of the signal in the area of the cutoff frequency By emphasizing the overtones in this area this can produce a distinctive peaky tone DDK 7 Owner s Manual 143 Voice Edit Upa 3910A El Reference Page Vibrato page 43 144 DDK 7 Owner s Manual LAYER Page 3 E PER VOCE 1 wm ERD o Accordion 1 AWMZ am KUYA am me E E a WE gt LFO AWD SAW 76 0 Ocent 0 H em H Sou TI LFO WAVE Determines the LFO waveform used to vary the sound For details see page 145 O LFO SPEED Determines the speed of the LFO w
72. Hat Closed Hi Hat Closed Hi Hat Closed Gi Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Hybrid Tom 2 om Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 ACA Hi Hat Pedal Hi Hat Pedal Hi Hat Pedal 2 Hi Hat Pedal Hi Hat Pedal Hi Hat Pedal Al Low Tom Low Tom Hybrid Tom 3 om Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 E Hi Hat Open Hi Hat Open Hi Hat Open 2 Hi Hat Open Hi Hat Open Hi Hat Open B1 Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Hybrid Tom 4 om Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4 c2 Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Hybrid Tom 5 om Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5 FEB Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 D2 High Tom High Tom Hybrid Tom 6 om Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 E Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 E2 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal F2 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup SIGA Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Light ambourine Tambourine Tambourine G2 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal E Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell A2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 a Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap B2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 c3 Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H FH Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L
73. Kit List Choose the desired Kit within the list JA KBr 1 Gy oo EP B KBP 1 WENU sne For details of percussion assignments for each kit see the Preset Keyboard Percussion List on page 76 The message Are you sure you want to clear all assignments and setup data may appear when you change the kit Select CLEAR to clear all assignments made in the ASSIGN Page and detailed settings made in the SETUP Page and call up the selected kit on the panel Select CANCEL to call up the selected kit without erasing the assignments and detailed settings Rhythm Keyboard Percussion Adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion Two sliders in the K B P display determine the reverb and volume settings E KBP 1 D sa Ewy KIT DATA CONTROL EL Kit J REVERB VOLUME el a ane vn The settings here determine the reverb volume for the entire Keyboard Percussion setup not for each percussion instrument You can however adjust each percussion instruments reverb volume page 83 5 Play some notes on the keyboards DDK 7 Owner s Manual 75 uoIssnojag pleogAsy wuylAyy 76 Preset Keyboard Percussion List Multi Kit Standard Kit 1 Symphony Kit
74. Lower and Keyboard Percussion parts K B P 2 button is set to on be recorded at the same time DDK 7 Owner s Manual 111 Music Data Recorder MDR HAM JepJooay Lq ASNN 112 DDK 7 Owner s Manual The following setting lets you record only Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard parts mR REMAINING 104 00 MB REC STANDBY QQ R XG_VOLUHE EF REC REC 0 DEF 0 HA FF wo TINE pmm Press the gt Play button and start playing after the hourglass icon disappears Press the M Stop button when you are finished with your performance to stop recording Now you ve recorded the first parts of your performance Press the RECORD button to set up recording of the next part Upper part in this case A message appears prompting confirmation of operation Select OK to overwrite and the Rec Standby display appears Select the parts for recording Set the next parts you want to record in this case the Upper part to REC Also set the part already recorded in this case Lower and Pedal parts to PLAY so you can hear the previously recorded parts as you record new ones Press the CUSTOM button to start recording of the new part or parts Upper part Playback of the previously recorded parts starts immediately The CUSTOM button is used here to record only the parts that have been selected for recording and plays back only those parts that have been selected for playback Wh
75. Machine Gun Rik Tik Wind Chime Horse Laser Gun Bird Tweet Explosion Firework Ghost Maou 178 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting Rhythm Program Voice List PIANO CHROMATIC PERC 3 Trp Kinura VodooLead 1 Live GrandPiano 1 Vibraphone ChapelOrgan1 PowerChord BrightPiano JazzVibes ChapelOrgan2 CampfireGuitar Harpsichord Suspense ChapelOrgan3 SolidGuitar GrandHarpsi Marimba PipeOrgan VintageAmp HonkyTonk Xylophone ReedOrgan AlohaGuitar Live WarmGrand SteelDrums Musette CrunchGuitar BalladStack Celesta Tutti
76. Moves the cursor five steps to the right O DATA These are data controls for entering rhythms and deleting existing rhythms in the rhythm row SET A For initially entering a rhythm to an empty position in the rhythm row or for When you insert an ending replacing a pattern at the cursor position Pressing the SET button enters the Pattern into the editing hytti 1 df berhak H Se sequence any existing rhythm selected from the rhythm menu to the cursor position rhythm data that follows an This operation is not available between measures of an ending pattern Ending pattern is automatically deleted INSERT For inserting a rhythm before the current cursor position The new rhythm is entered just before the cursor position and all other rhythms to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new number This operation is not available between measures of an ending pattern Additional rhythms cannot be entered beyond the Rhythm sequence function s capacity of 140 If the Insert operation results in the rhythm number going over the capacity a Data Full message appears and the operation cannot be executed DELETE For deleting a rhythm at the current cursor position When the ending pattern is selected pressing the DELETE button deletes the entire ending pattern more than one bar CLEAR For erasing all patterns entered to the selected sequence After selecting CLEAR a message appears prompting confirmation of the
77. OFF Select the desired effect type EFFECT Parameters Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type DDK 7 Owner s Manual 39 Organ Flutes 4 Voice Controls and Effects Seu PUB SIOJJUO9 9910A 40 The DDK 7 is eguipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the sound of the Voices Voice Controls and Effects Each Voice has been given certain factory preset effect settings to best enhance its sound However if you wish you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the controls and effects described in this section All built in effects are digital The chart below shows the various Voice controls and effects for the individual Voice sections Available functions are indicated by circles The controls and effects are applied differently according to the different types independently for each Voice section independently for each keyboard or globally for the entire system Controls and Effects Reference Voice sections to which the controls effects are applied Ge Upper Keyboard Lead Voice Lower Keyboard Pedalboard changing Upper Organ Flute Lead Voice 1 2 Lower Organ Flute Pedalboard the settings Keyboard Voice Keyboard Voice Voice 1 2 Voice 1 2 Voice 1 2 Pan page 41 O O O O Touch Tone page 41 O O O O P
78. OUT MAIN jacks Unbalanced Backside of the keyboard L L R R LEVEL FIXED AUX OUT SUB jacks Unbalanced Backside of the keyboard 1 2 LEVEL FIXED OUTPUT jacks Unbalanced Backside of the keyboard L L R R LEVEL FIXED The Unbalanced line is intended for line level signals Power on Procedure Before turning the power on to all components set all volume levels to minimum 0 then turn on the power in the following order 1 DDK 7 and external keyboard s 2 Mixer 3 Powered Speaker To turn the power off first turn down the volume for each devices then turn off the power in the reverse order 3 gt 2 gt 1 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 227 Connections O o 3 5 D Q z2 o 5 D R wore Chorus and variation effects of the Rhythm and Reverb are not applied to the sound output through SUB1 SUB2 and SUB1 amp 2 EH wore The settings in the Utility display are automatically saved when another display is called up 228 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Selecting Outputs for Each Part You can assign each individual part of the DDK 7 s sounds such as Voice Percussion to be output from specific AUX OUT jacks MAIN and or SUB 1 Press the UTILITY button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the Utility display 2 Press the AUX OUT button in the upper right of the display to call up the AUX OUT Page You can assign individual parts to the AUX OUT MAIN and or
79. Owner s Manual 2 Using the LCD Display Wa NOTE This instrument features a special touch panel that allows you to change the parameters fur by simply touching the virtual buttons or sliders on the display Please note that two When cleaning the display use a soft dry cloth or more parameters cannot be operated simultaneously You can also use the Data Control dial to make fine changes to the parameter value A shown in the display Changing the Display Page Do not use any sharp or hard tools to operate the touch panel Doing so may damage the display There are some oval shaped numbered buttons at the top right of the display Pressing these buttons changes the page of the display The selected page s button turns orange Page 1 VOICE DISPLAY D 77 33 UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 ChamStrs1 eem FRE TE LOWER KEYBOARD DAL VOICE 1 VOICE 1 a FingrBass1 SS CCT REGISTRATION OFF HHop Light OFF TEMPO BAR BEAT 120 STOP Press this button to select Page 1 Page 2 JI REGIST MEMORY 1 16 Jo 3 3 Fc re cl ct er We a es ar et ar a DA 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 TUTE HIHIHIHIH WR ANAN IN NN NN NN NN BN NN II H E NN on NN YA BG BG BB NM Ju AA AN Iu In in ON NW NM II CA oM AAA AI PARAMETER SETTINGS REVERB me ser mon nl Press this button to select Page 2 ESOS DDK 7 Owner s Manual 18 Qui
80. PA Pai RAYA sa 70 PART SETUP MID ascii an 106 127 Redal polyphOnIcMO Serio 42 cle fel MU O IA AA 229 Pedal VOICE aa AA 25 PONES EE 223 PHRASE EE 70 PARASE eegene E ere rer rere ete AAA teen ar AA 70 Ple AAA 208 PINCH VOICE SECTION ahaa 42 PITCHES SIO aaa rt raso resina PIAY BACK AA AAA POLY EE PAWA PRESET Vibrato Preset keyboard PElCUSSION rc arias 74 PRESET TEMPO cuca ABA AA ANA 66 PAM a al 42 PROGRAM recie hsoa iasa ER 148 ele Ei eee oe acest 236 Protected SONG EE 131 Punch Record esca a aaa lana 113 Q QUIZE aa 161 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 269 Appendix xipuaddy R T Real Time Write TEMPONMD aka te tes asian a Recording a TEMPO Rhythm Recording Lead Voice 1 Voice oni 111 TIME SING E Recording Part vivos an amn nanana 111 TO LOWER EE REGIST EDIT MDR TOP Lead RT ecu REGIST MENU TOP Shift End sici n ocio cus Registration Memory TOUCH PANEL SOUND Registration Sequence ococccccncninninncccnconconccnncn ccoo cnn ncnnnnnncino 188 TOUCH TONE uu asno toa rior Registration Sh iam E TOEN 94 OUCH BRA EE RELEASE RATE Voice Edit ana kaaa a 142 SIE see EE EE 125 TRANSPOSE Voice SECHON ii 44 RESONANCE ii dc 143 TUNE lee In caian end 44 RESP RESPONSE KE 38 TUNE FINE Voice Bi 142 RG EE 46 REVERB MIG WE 233 U REVERB PAN 46 ORGAN FE aw 37 REVERB Rhythm Pattern Program wee 168 UPPER J 2 ronnen E G
81. Press the EXECUTE to convert The M D R starts playback of the selected song for you to decide whether you convert it to the XG data or not After finishing playback the following message appears MDR SONG SELECT TOOLS Wi SONG SELECT CT TOOLS y USB 01 SONG REG_001 Do you want to convert to XG_001 MID RENAME CONYERT CANCEL 5 If necessary Press the RENAME to give a name to the converted XG song For details of the method to edit the song name see page 113 132 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 6 Press the CONVERT button After the process of the conversion the LCD returns to the original display To call up the XG song in the display press XG button in the SONG SELECT Page of the M D R display For more information see page 126 XG Song Copy 1 Select the KG song to be copied For details to select an XG song see page 126 Press the TOOLS button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page display MDR SONG SELECT y MDR SONG SELECT XG_001 MID USB 01 SONG XG 001 MID USB 01 S0NG XG SONG COPY TOOLS CLOSE SETTING SONG NAME weer FORMAT aoe o FOLDER USB 01 SONG SONG 6_001 MID YG sons SONG XG SING y WA p COPY DELETE DELETE COPY TO CHANGE FOLDER USB 01 SONG EXECUTE ama 3 Press the XG SONG COPY button to call up the KG Song Copy D CONVERT T TO EL Confirm that the desired song to be
82. SETTING Page and listen to the Metronome page 152 metronome click The pattern will automatically repeat or loop for a certain number of measures as set in the SETTING Page 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 above to layer each instrument and complete your own rhythm 162 DDK 7 Owner s Manual You can erase an instrument while rhythm is played To erase an instrument key assignment While holding down the CLEAR button press the key on the keyboard corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase All instances of the selected instrument will be erased from the pattern When you want to erase all instruments or edit entered percussion notes you need to stop the rhythm then edit See page 157 Editing Entered Percussion Notes Creating Backing Patterns Rhythmic Chord Function The Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to use one of the DDK 7 s Accompaniment patterns with your original rhythm You can select and save the Accompaniment pattern that best matches the rhythm that you have created Moreover Rhythm Pattern Program features a Rhythmic Chord function that lets you add your own backing patterns to the rhythms you create To select an appropriate Accompaniment pattern for your newly created rhythm 1 Press the SETTING button at the top of the display to call up the SETTING Page 2 Press the ASSEMBLE button A pop up menu appears letting you select the copy source and destination part 3 U
83. SONG If only REGIST is selected the Registration data in the song will be deleted If only SONG is selected the performance data in the song will be deleted If the song does not contain Registration or performance data you cannot select REGIST or SONG in the display Press the EXECUTE button A message will appear prompting confirmation of the operation Select DELETE to delete the song or CANCEL to abort the operation About Protected Songs If you buy or download the song data it may be protected so that you cannot delete or copy in order to prevent accidental erasure or protect copyright This is Protected Song Protected songs can be saved to a USB flash memory The protected song can be played back as same as the song you created but it cannot be converted to XG format or EL format It is not possible to edit the Registration data in the protected song nor to overwrite the performance data If you want to edit the protected song first copy it within one media folder then edit the copy You cannot copy to another media folder The copy song called protected edit song is available only when the original song called protected original song exists in the same folder Be careful not to delete the protected original song Folder Protected Protected Original Edit Song Song ry mg Copy You can edit this song only when th
84. SUB jacks each Voice section Organ Flute Voice Main drum Add drum Accompaniment Keyboard Percussion XG and microphone to the AUX OUT MAIN and or SUB jacks Turn the desired output on for each part You can select these from MAIN SUB1 SUB2 and SUB1 amp 2 CUN ee Bel Pn Ka so DIO ih hh LA ees Jag la ES SS sue ea If you select a setting other than MAIN no sound will be heard from the headphones and monitor speakers because the parts assigned to SUBI SUB2 and SUB1 amp 2 will not be output through the PHONES and OUTPUT jacks Any parts assigned to the AUX OUT MAIN or SUB1 amp 2 will be output in stereo 1 left 2 right Any parts assigned to AUX OUT SUBI or SUB2 will be output in mono ES Connecting a Pedal Unit Connecting a Pedal Unit DDKU P7 to the DDK 7 allows you to use the Pedalboard right and left Footswitches Expression Pedal and 2nd Expression Pedal These foot operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions and switch effects on off without taking your hands from the keyboard If you connect and disconnect the Pedal Unit you must be sure to first turn off the power of the DDK 7 then use the cable to make the connection If you connect and disconnect the cable while the power to the DDK 7 is on DDK 7 and the Pedal Unit can be damaged Dedicated Cable Messages ff TO PEDAL ES
85. Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting DDK 7 Owner s Manual 177 Rhythm Program we1boId WU AyH pjeoqgAay Jamo pueoghey Jaddn Multi Kit 2 Live Studio Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Arabic Kit Cuban Kit Pop Latin Kit Maracas High Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Open Maracas Low Hi Q Surdo Muff Whip Slap Surdo Rim Scratch H Cuica High Scratch L Hand Clap Surdo Open Finger Snap Cuica Middle Click Noise Tamborim Mute Metronome Click Cuica Low Metronome Bell Conga H Tip Conga H Tip Tamborim Open Seq Click L Conga H Heel Conga H Heel Pandeiro Seq Click H Nakarazan Dom Conga H Open Conga H Open Bongo High Brush Tap Cabasa Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga Slide Brush Swirl Nakarazan Edge Conga H SlapOpen Conga H SlapOpen Bongo Low Brush Slap Hager Dom Conga H Slap Conga H Slap Conga Slap Brush Tap Swirl Hager Edge Conga H SlapMute Conga H SlapMute Conga Muff Snare Roll Bongo H Conga L Tip Conga L Tip Bo
86. Swirl Tom Brush 2 Mid Tom H Snare Analog 4 TOM Tom Brush 3 High Tom Vinyl Noise Floor Tom L Tom Brush 4 BASS DRUM Reverse Cymbal Floor Tom H Tom Brush 5 Gran Cassa Mute TOM Low Tom Tom Brush 6 Gran Cassa Tom Dance 1 Mid Tom L BASS DRUM ick Soft 2 Tom Dance 2 Mid Tom H Kick Jazz PERCUSSION 1 Tom Dance 3 High Tom Kick Tight Conga H Open Tom Dance 4 BASS DRUM Kick Sof Conga L Tom Dance 5 ick Jazz PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Mute Tom Dance 6 ick Tight Conga H Open Bongo H BASS DRUM ick Soft Conga L Bongo L Kick Techno PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Mute Timbale H Kick Techno L Conga H Open Bongo H Timbale L Kick Techno Q Conga L Bongo L Cowbell PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Mute Timbale H Claves Conga Analog M Bongo H Timbale L Guiro Long Conga Analog L Bongo L Cowbell Guiro Short Conga Analog H Timbale H Claves Maracas Bongo Analog H Timbale L Guiro Long Vibraslap Bongo Analog L Cowbell Guiro Short DDK 7 Owner s Manual 87 Rhythm Keyboard Percussion uoIssnojag p3gogAsy Wy AyH 88 String Slap Rik BrassTremolo Flute Key Click CYMBAL SNARE DRUM Shower Crash Cymbal 1 Thunder Crash Cymbal 2 Wind Ride Cymbal 1 Stream Hi Hat Open Bubble Hi Hat Closed Feed Hi Hat Pedal Ghost Snare Drum Maou Snare Soft Dog Side Stick Horse TO
87. Tom 4 BASS DRUM Kick Sof Conga H Open Hybrid Tom 5 Kick PERCUSSION 1 Conga L Hybrid Tom 6 Kick Tight Conga H Open Conga H Mute BASS DRUM Kick Soft Conga L Bongo H Kick Tight H PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Mute Bongo L Kick We Conga H Open Bongo H Timbale H Kick Tight L Conga L Bongo L Timbale L PERCUSSION 1 Conga H Mute Timbale H Cowbell Conga H Open Bongo H Timbale L Claves Conga L Bongo L Cowbell Guiro Long Conga H Mute Timbale H Claves Guiro Short Bongo H Timbale L Guiro Long Maracas Bongo L Cowbell Guiro Short Vibraslap Timbale H Claves Maracas PERCUSSION 2 Timbale L Guiro Long Vibraslap Surdo Mute Cowbell Guiro Short PERCUSSION 2 Surdo Open Claves Maracas Surdo Mute Scratch H 2 Guiro Long Vibraslap Surdo Open Scratch L 2 Guiro Short PERCUSSION 2 Cuica Mute Cabasa Maracas Surdo Mute Cuica Open Shaker Vibraslap Surdo Open Cabasa Agogo H PERCUSSION 2 Cuica Mute Shaker Agogo L Surdo Mute Cuica Open Agogo H Samba Whistle H Surdo Open Cabasa Agogo L Samba Whistle L Cuica Mute Shaker Samba Whistle H PERCUSSION 3 Cuica Open Agogo H Samba Whistle L Tambourine Cabasa Agogo L PERCUSSION 3 HiQ2 Shaker Samba Whistle H Tambourine Jingle Bells Agogo H Samba Whistle L Castanet Bell Tree Agogo L PERCUSSION 3 Jingle Bells Triangle Open Samba Whistle H Tambourine Bell Tree Triangle Mute Samba Whistle L Castanet Triangle Open Wood Block H PERCUSSION 3 Jingle Bells Triangle Mute Wood Block L Tambourine Light Bell Tree Wood Block H Sticks Castanet Triangle Open Wood
88. Voice customize the accompaniment to your persona one for the Voice Sections preference by adjusting the volume and pan and setting the desired effects below See the Rhythm Program Voice List on page 179 Adjusting Volume and Panning Volume and Pan are set in VOICE EFFECT Page VOLUME Display PATTERN SETTING INPUT G serue SAVE FILE Marching Band 1 INTRO 1 O ON OFF Determines the on off status of each accompaniment part When this is set to OFE the part is muted Volume sliders Determines the volume of each accompaniment part Range 0 127 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 167 Rhythm Program PAN Display PATTERN SETTING INPUT G see SAVE FILE Marching Band 1 INTRO 1 SSES ao 134 R36 H H Determines the position of each accompaniment part in the stereo image Range L64 R63 Effect Settings You can set Reverb Chorus and Variation effects as desired for your original rhythm Reverb adds a warm ambience to the sound simulating the complex reflections of actual performance spaces such as a concert hall or a small club Chorus provides a wide variety of sound transformations and enhancements Variation includes many kinds of special effects for changing the sound both subtly and radically These effects are set in the VOICE EFFECT Page REVERB Display PATTERN SETTING INPUT G sene SAVE FILE Marching Band 1 INTRO 1 LUN De
89. Whip Slap Whip Slap 17 Scratch H Scratch Dance 1 O Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H 18 Scratch L Scratch Dance 2 O Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L 19 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap 20 Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise 21 Metronome Click Dance Perc 1 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click 22 Metronome Bell Reverse Dance 1 Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell 23 Seq Click L Dance Perc 2 Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L 24 Seq Click H Hi Q Dance 1 Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H 25 Brush Tap Snare Analog 3 Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap 26 Brush Swirl O Vinyl Noise O Brush Swirl O Brush Swirl O Brush Swirl 27 Brush Slap Snare Analog 4 Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap 28 Reverse Cymbal O Reverse Cymbal O Brush Tap Swirl O Brush Tap Swirl O Brush Tap Swirl 29 Snare Roll O Reverse Dance 2 O Snare Roll O Snare Roll O Snare Roll 30 HiQ2 Hi Q2 Castanet Castanet Castanet 31 Snare Noisy 4 Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Snare Soft 32 Sticks Snare Dance 1 Sticks Sticks Sticks 33 Kick 3 Kick Techno Q Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Soft 2 34 Open Rim Shot Rim Gate Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 35 Kick Anlg Short ick Techno L Kick Tight Kick Tight Gran Cassa 36 Kick Analog Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise 1 37 Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Light Side Stick Light Side Stick Cutting Noise 2 38 Snare Analog Snare Clap
90. adjust some parameters such as Volume Reverb Pan and so on by using the virtual sliders in the display There are two ways to move the slider in the display touching it directly and using the Data Control dial We suggest that you touch the display slider when making coarse adjustments and use the Data Control dial for fine Quick Introductory Guide adjustment Touching the display slider directly Press a point in the slider to which you want to adjust the parameter value The slider will move to the point you pressed Also by sliding your finger up or down while holding down the display slider you can change the parameter value TOUCH TONE TOUCH TONE TOUCH TONE INITIAL AFTER INITIAL AFTER INITIAL AFTER 8 SES 8 E07 8 Or Slider will move to the point you touch Slider will follow your finger Using the Data Control dial Touch on above the slider in the display to enable the parameter and set a rough value then turn the Data Control dial Touch here to enable the parameter KWAA ONAL AFTER DATA CONTROL To control Pan you can move the horizontal slider in the same way as vertical sliders Blue mark DATA CONTROL FO DDK 7 Owner s Manual 15 aping Aojonpojjuj yOINO 16 HEH wore The settings in the Utility Display are automatically saved when another display is called up DDK 7 Owner s Manual El LCD Display Settings Here you can change the display
91. adjusted in the Utility display The settings here cannot be recorded to the Music Data Recorder 1 Press the UTILITY button The Utility display appears DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH O OO CICS CE ELE 2 Press the GLOBAL button at the top right of the display to call up the GLOBAL Page E UTILITY EP w AUX OUT FPEDAL LANGUAGE By TOUCH PANEL T BRIGHINESS TRANSPOSE PITCH INITIALIZE REVERB VOLUME dating In this display you can change the Transpose and Pitch settings TRANSPOSE Jon NOTE Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the Voices and is adjustable in half steps The Transpose setting here is not applied to an XG Song semitones page 126 Range 6 6 O PITCH Determines the fine pitch setting of all the Voices Each step changes the pitch by 0 2 Hz The default Pitch is 440 0 Hz corresponding to key A3 Range 427 2 Hz 452 6 Hz You can also change the Transpose and Pitch for each Voice section in the Voice Condition display For more information see page 43 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 12 Internet Direct Connection This convenient powerful feature lets you directly connect your DDK 7 to the Internet In this section you may come across some unfamiliar terms and phrases related to computers and onl
92. an external audio system via the DDK 7 First turn on the power of the external device s then that of the DDK 7 Reverse this order when you turn the power off O Playing Playing bn gt Speaker Left Speaker Right Playing be OUTPUT MAIN HA y AUX IN L L R UR L L R R I LINE OUT R L L R Eg joo Stereo audio system If youre connecting the DDK 7 to a mono device use only the AUX IN L L R jack Connecting a Microphone By connecting a microphone to the DDK 7 you can enjoy singing along with your own performance The DDK 7 outputs your vocals through the external audio system connected to the AUX OUT or OUTPUT jacks of the DDK 7 1 Connect your microphone to the MIC jack A dynamic microphone is recommended MIC VOLUME To adjust the volume reverb 1 Press the UTILITY button on the panel to call up the Utility display 2 and the volume Using the MIC REVERB and VOLUME sliders in the GLOBAL Page adjust the amount of the reverb applied to the microphone E UTILITY ia ANGUAGE ii la pitt ness H GLOBAL EXP MDI AUX OUT F PEDAL PARES HE TRANSPOSE sone PITCH INITIALIZE EXECUTE ate RB Di A 440 0Hz No sound from the microphone can be heard even though you raise the volume here unless you t
93. bar to view those parts of the page that are not shown INTERNET DIRECT CONNECTION Welcome to Yamaha s special website for using your Electone STAGEA online over the Internet lt Latest News gt Oct 3 2006 Website is now open and online lt mg fi REFRESH STOP Enjoy these specially programmed songs with the rich gorgeous sounds of the STAGEA These songs cannot be stored to media Bang preview a CO such as Smart Media cards SETTING f BOOKMARK version upgrade Download the latest version update for your mstrument Sere sic store About the Official Yamaha Online Music Store m MP HOME Terms of use Contact us Following Links When there is a link in the page it is shown as a button or in colored text etc To select the link press it the button or text directly on the display The touch panel will not sound when you press a link even if the touch panel sound is set to ON in the Utility Display page 17 Internet Direct Connection DDK 7 Owner s Manual 211 uoljoauuo9 eg jeu 212 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Monitoring the Internet Connection Status The four icons and a message indicate the current Internet connection status YAMAHA INTERNET DIRECT CONNECTION Welcome to Yamaha s special website for using your Electone STAGEA online over the Internet lt Latest News gt Enjoy these spectally programmed songs with the rich gorgeous
94. been displayed Indicates the web page has been loaded and the web page is completely displayed Disconnected Indicates the DDK 7 is offline not connected to Internet Refreshing a Web Page Canceling Loading of a Web Page To refresh a web page to make sure you have the latest version of the REFRESH page or to try reloading press the REFRESH button To cancel loading of a page if the page is taking too long to open press STOP the STOP button Return to the Previous Web Page To return to a previously selected web page press the BACK button BACK To return to the page selected before pressing the BACK button press the FORWARD button FORWARD DDK 7 Owner s Manual 213 Internet Direct Connection uoljoauuo9 eg jeu 214 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Saving Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages You can bookmark the page youre viewing and set up a custom link so the page can be instantly called up in the future 1 With the desired page currently selected press the BOOKMARK button in the control menu The Bookmark display appears showing a list of the currently saved bookmarks The title of the web page registered to the selected bookmark is shown below the list SELI w BOOKMARK DOWN guten wy pa Untitled lt s REFRESH ADD J J k CHANGE DELETE J J wove J e D gt MOME ne ne um ES Ju vase nas been dispares Call up the display fo
95. buttons The rhythm pattern of several measures repeats indefinitely MAIN FILL IN A B CG D WII Selected Main section s lamp is lit FILL IN This is designed for use as a temporary and regular rhythmic pattern to spice up a repeating rhythm There are four Fill In sections that can be played by pressing the selected lit MAIN FILL IN A D buttons as desired When one measure pattern of Fill In finishes playing the rhythm is automatically shifts to the Main section ed MAIN FILL IN Siz c ba em TE i y Y N Selected Fill In section s lamp flashes D AV BREAK This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm pattern The Break section is selected by pressing the BREAK button When the one measure Break pattern finishes playing the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section SYNCHRO START BREAK START OGO E The lamp is lit when the Break section is selected ENDING This is used for the ending of the song There are three Ending sections that can be selected with the ENDING 1 3 buttons When the ending is finished the rhythm automatically stops ENDING EOC Selected Ending section s lamp is lit Operating the rhythm from the panel You can turn the rhythm on off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the buttons on the
96. coarse PITCH FINE CO PATTERN SETTING wen D I CREO ae or Marching Band 1 Symphony Kit J C EZE VOLUME REVERB 5 Mik 4 Adjust the parameters Pan Volume Reverb and Pitch PITCH ou PITCH FINE Rhythm Program PATTERN SETTING INPUT Ei BRWD SAVE j FILE j Marching Band 1 A Q Sahani AlLow Tom nme VOLUME REVERB PITCH FINE 127 127 o Pi A la PART B P B P DDK 7 Owner s Manual 171 weiBo1g WU AyH El Reference Page Percussion Kit List O Percussion Kit Name Indicates the currently selected kit Pressing this button calls up the Percussion Kit list letting you select the desired kit When you change the kit the instruments you have already entered are replaced with the instruments of the newly selected kit page 176 O PAN Determines the position of the currently selected instrument in the stereo image Range L63 R63 VOLUME Determines the volume of the currently selected instrument Range 0 127 O REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently selected instrument Range 0 127 O PITCH COARSE Determines the pitch of the currently selected instrument adjustable in semitone 100 cent steps Range 64 63 O PITCH FINE Determines the pitch of the currently selected instrument adjustable in 1 cent steps allowing more detailed tuning of the instrument than in PITCH COARSE
97. create and partly on your own personal preference You can switch between the two methods in editing to create a single rhythm by the use of both methods This would come handy for example in programming the basic beats of a rhythm with Step Write then using Real Time Write to add percussion accents and embellishments Which mode of the operation is selected depends on the play status of the rhythm If the rhythm is stopped Step Write is automatically selected If the rhythm is playing Real Time Write is selected See the instructions below for Step Write and page 162 for Real Time Write Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern Step Write You can enter percussion sounds in the INPUT Page of the display Before entering ed NOTE percussion sounds turn off the Upper and Lower keyboard Voices by setting each The volume of the percussion Vojce s volume to MIN and accompaniment sound ring use of Rhythm Pattern Eo wa a 1 Press the INPUT button at the top of the display to call up the with the VOLUME button of INPUT Page the RHYTHM section When you quit Rhythm Pattern Program the VOLUME of the 2 Select the part MAIN DRUM or ADD DRUM to which you want to RHYTHM section will return ter th to the previous selected enter the percussion level In general main or basic drum percussion instruments such as Bass Drum Snare Drum and so on are entered in Main Drum part and others such as Tambourine Triangle are
98. display the Fill In pattern is automatically played whenever you switch the Main sections To use the Break patterns As you play the DDK 7 along with the rhythm occasionally press the BREAK button SYNCHRO START BREAK START ee Moreover you can start stop the rhythm and switch the sections by using the Footswitch or optional footpedal See page 194 for details Changing the rhythm volume There are two ways to set the rhythm volume using the VOLUME buttons on the panel and using the volume slider in the display The volume buttons let you make coarse adjustments to the volume while the slider gives you fine control Using VOLUME buttons on the panel a coarse OO Press the VOLUME buttons of the rhythm on the panel to o set the desired level The buttons have seven volume ae settings from a minimum of 0 or no sound to a ade maximum of full volume o SEQ 3 SEQ 4 MIN Using VOLUME slider in the display fine Pressing the rhythm button on the panel again or pressing the rhythm name of the selected rhythm in the display again calls up the Rhythm Condition Display RHYTHM 8Beat Light 1 a RHYTHM DATA CONTROL MENU AUTO FILL PERCUSSION DD ACCOMPANIMENT A B C MODE MEMORY ot SINGLE O el CHORD ABC PEDAL BEN To set the volume touch the PERCUSSION VOLUME slider in the display or use the Jon NOTE Data Control Dial The control r
99. display or the Data Control dial set the Bar Beat Clock position at which you want to change the Registration 1 beat 96 Clock E SEQUENCE MENU RHYTHM REGIST DATA CONTROL No 1 5 10 15 REG D D BAR BEAT CLOCK a a 1 1 NEXT REGIST KS ESCH str insert POSITION A A 4 lt j gt J AEM EE When using the Data Control dial first press the number you wish to change in the display then turn the dial Press the DATA SET button in the display 4 The Registration number appears in the display in the timing order indicating that the Registration is entered Up to 140 Registrations can be entered If some Registration numbers are entered to the same Bar Beat Clock the last entered one takes priority 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 above to set the Registration Sequence Entering Next Regist When you program the Next Regist function in Registration Sequence the next registration data in current song can be loaded automatically just by playing the rhythm sequence 1 Using the 4 v buttons in the display or the Data Control dial set the Bar Beat Clock position at which you want to enter the Next Regist 1 beat 96 clock 2 Press the NEXT REGIST INSERT button in the display The Next Regist mark lad appears at the timing point you set in step 1 indicating that the Next Regist is entered Next Regist Loading Time e Loading Next R
100. entered in Add Drum part PATTERN SETTING INPUT Ge saw SAVE FILE pune PP ALIS Symohony kit C1 Gran Cassa Mute ER QUANTIZE GATE TIME m BIL v CHORD1 PPP PP P mp CHORD mf J JI JI T Para ts CHANGE 154 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Select the desired Drum Kit 3 You can select a kit from 20 Drum kits and 5 SFX kits For details on each kit see page 176 Pressing the button indicating the currently selected kit calls up the kit Select the pop up menu then select the desired kit from the pop up menu The selected kit is called up on the Upper and Lower keyboards Drum kit SFX kit PATTERN SETTING INPUT Ze Sey SAVE FILE Marching Band 1 uu INTRO 1 PART e eee You can select only one kit for each part Main Drum or Add Drum When you want to create a rhythm pattern including two different drum kits select one kit for Main Drum and another for Add Drum 4 Select the percussion sound you wish to enter by pressing the key on the Upper or Lower keyboard that corresponds to the sound The selected instrument s name appears on the display Sank a Gran SS Mute Selected key Instrument name Set the appropriate Quantize value 5 Jon NOTE For details on Ouantize refer to page 161 The Quantize setting can be changed in the middle of PATTERN SETTING INPUT Di senpe J SAVE FILE J Step Write Taa o T
101. exist in one media Song Up to 100 songs can exist in one folder Registration Up to 50 Registrations can exist in one song Recording UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL LEAD K B P Playing UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL LEAD K B P XG Sequence Format DDK Original format Copy Protect SMF format 0 1 Format 1 load only Format Conversion Convert TO EL Convert FROM EL Convert to XG CONTROLS Display Control VOICE DISPLAY REGIST MENU FOOT SWITCH MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB Foot Pedal Section 1 Expression 2 Sustain Select Expression Sustain Rhythm Glide Rotary speaker Slide M O C FootSwitch When Left Rhythm Glide Rotary speaker DDKU P7 is used Right Shift Jump User OTHERS LCD Display Size 6 5 inch 144 W x 78 24 H mm Liquid Crystal Display TFT WVGA touch panel Drive Method Active Matrix Dots 800 x RGB x 480 dots Connectors PHONES MIC MIC VOLUME OUTPUT L L R R Phone AUX OUT LEVEL FIXED MAIN L L R R SUB 1 2 Phone AUX IN L L R R Phone TO PEDAL OPTICAL OUT USB TO DEVICE x 2 USB TO HOST MIDI IN OUT FOOT PEDAL 1 VOLUME 2 SUSTAIN AC INLET Power Consumption 51W Dimensions W x D x H Weight 1 150 W x 424 D x 173 H mm 18kg Supplied Accessories Owner s Manual AC Power cord Specifications and descriptions in this owner s manual are for information purposes only Yamaha Corp reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice Since spe
102. in SHIFT mode REGISTRATION Sur Le 2 Current Registration Next Registration The current Registration number left and the next number right are displayed Registration Shift in JUMP mode REGISTRATION JUMP E E gt Destination number v can be changed The current Registration number left and the destination number right will be displayed You can change the destination number even in the middle of the performance by using the a w buttons in the display or the Data Control dial Registration Shift in USER mode REGISTRATION USER G BR SS SS GR Basi PES E Indicates the current position of the Registration Shift You can change the Registration by moving the cursor in orange right left using the displayed buttons or the Data Control dial This is handy if you ve inadvertently advanced the shift setting in the middle of your performance The user Registration settings cannot be edited here HU Moves the cursor to the first position 4 Moves the cursor one step to the left and selects the next Registration gt Moves the cursor one step to the right and selects the previous Registration gt gt Moves the cursor five step to the right and selects the Registration D Unifying a specific parameter gt gt In the Voice Display Page 2 you can conveniently unify a specific parameter used in different Voice groups at one time This is useful when you are changing
103. indicates that the instrument has been erased The following method can also be used to erase one instrument While holding down the CLEAR button press the key on the keyboard corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been erased To erase all instruments Press CLEAR in the display The following display appears prompting confirmation of the operation PATTERN SETTING Gei sep SAVE FILE INTRO PA mt Do you want to clear all data or only Gan Cassa Mute AD aj ORL CHOF a CLEAR ALL CLEAR CANCEL pan Select CLEAR ALL to erase all instruments All instruments are instantly erased When you want to replace the instrument you have already entered with another instrument it s not necessary to delete and re enter You can quickly replace the sound with the following procedure To replace the instrument Before the operation stop the rhythm 1 Select the key to which the instrument you want to replace is assigned The key name you have selected and its instrument name are displayed Synphony Kit E Gran casa Mute Selected key Instrument name 2 Simultaneously hold down the CHANGE button in the display and press the key on the Upper or Lower keyboard that corresponds to the instrument you want to use The instrument is instantly erased and replaced with the newly selected one About Guantize The Ouantize function i
104. instrument sounds drum and percussion assigned to each key on the Upper and Lower keyboards in creating your own rhythms Up to 48 of your original rhythms can be saved as User Rhythms Entering the Rhythm Pattern Program There are two ways to program a User pattern copying a preset rhythm that is similar to the rhythm you want to create and creating your own rhythm from scratch To copy a preset rhythm Copying a preset rhythm lets you make changes to an existing rhythm saving you time if you want to program a rhythm that is similar to an existing preset pattern To create your own rhythm from scratch Load a blank pattern to the Rhythm Pattern Program then create a completely new rhythm To copy a preset rhythm select the rhythm you want to copy from the Rhythm Menu 2 Press the PROGRAM button to call up the Program Display DISPLAY SELECT MDR INTERNET UTILITY VOICE REGIST FOOT PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH y CA EE EE E PROGRAM SELECT ITEM FOR EDITING VOICE RHYTHM PATTERN SEQUENCE UPPERI UPPER2 LEADI LEAD2 RHYTHM LOWERI LOWER PEDAL2 PEDALT To copy a preset rhythm press the RHYTHM button To create your own rhythm from scratch press the NEW RHYTHM button HE PROGRAM SELECT ITEM FOR EDITING VOICE RHYTHM SEQUENCE
105. lit at the same time indicating an intermediate position 28 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Using the VOLUME buttons on the panel coarse Press one of the VOLUME buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired level for each Voice The buttons have seven volume settings from a minimum of 0 or no sound to a maximum of full volume VOICE SECTION LOWER1 LOWER2 PEDAL1 PEDAL2 UPPER1 UPPER2 LEAD1 LEAD2 SI 3 H H EOo000000 0000000 samo a a IA a IA aa ATO ATO YTO SOLO LOWER LOWER LOWER ct ES E Using VOLUME slider in the display fine Pressing the same Voice button on the panel again or pressing the Voice name of the selected Voice in the display calls up the Voice Condition Display Hl UPPER VOICE 1 D 2 5 4 1 NG DATA CONTROL E TONE Pitch FEET REVERB BRILLIANCE E SC ae N maa 20 l 0 Volume slider To set the volume touch the VOLUME slider in the display or use the Data Control Dial The control range is from 0 no sound to 24 full volume VOLUME MAX o 24 24 o 20 23 O 16 i O 12 12 O 8 E o 4 1 O0 o0 j 0 MIN Pres
106. of the Utility display The Glide Effect is now assigned to the Foot Pedal P FOOT PEDAL GLOBAL EXP MDI AUX OUT PEDAL FOOT PEDAL POLARITY SUSTAIN SLIDE M 0 C J SOLO RHYTHM CONTROL J EXPRESSION J FOOT PEDALI mun Lk SUSTAIN J SLIDE J 4 0 6 J SOLO J RHYTHM CONTROL J ROTARY SPEAKER J REGIST SHIFT J _ e GLIDE REGIST SHIFT Pressing the Foot Pedal immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by a half step and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original Controlling Rotary Speaker You can control the Rotary Speaker effect on off not only by using the Left Footswitch but also the Foot Pedal 1 Select ROTARY SPEAKER in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display The Rotary Speaker function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal E FOOT PEDAL GLOBAL EXP J MIDI AUX OUT PEDAL FOOT PEDALI FOOT PEDAL man ER mua EH SUSTAIN J SLIDE SUSTAIN SLIDE KO C SOLO J M 0 C J SOLO RHYTHM CONTROL J GLIDE J RHYTHM CONTROL J GLIDE ROTARY SPEAKER J REGIST SHIFT J REGIST SHIFT A 7 Press the Foot Pedal when you want to switch the Rotary Speaker effect on or off Pressing the Foot Pedal has the same effect as pressing the ROTARY SP SPEED button To use this function you will need to select the Rotary Speaker effect for the desired Voice Refer to page 50 Controlling Registration Shift You can control Re
107. or CUSTOM button to begin re recording the song Re recording starts from the beginning of the song and replaces the previously recorded performance with the newly recorded performance Recording each part separately You can also record the parts of your performance independently This function lets you record Keyboard Percussion and performance control data such as Registration changes and expression pedal operation separately from the other parts of the song Even Keyboard Percussion and Lead Voice 1 Voices can be recorded separately though the Lead Voice 2 Voices will be included in the performance data of the Upper Keyboard The following instruction is an example First record the chords and bass to the song using the Lower and Pedalboard and then record the melody using the Upper Keyboard 1 Follow steps 1 3 on page 110 to call up the Rec Standby display P Select the parts for recording Each pressing of a part button switches the status PLAY OFF and REC PLAY Playback the parts that have been recorded OFF Recording or playback is not active REC Records the part fmn NOTE If you set the Upper part to REC the performance on the Upper Keyboard When vourenerithe including Lead Voice 1 Voices is recorded Setting Lead to REC however Keyboard Percussion make records only the Lead Voice 1 Voices You cannot set both Upper and Lead to sure that the K B P 1 or REC at the same time neither can the
108. or home by means of a special cable Link A highlighted word button or icon within a web page that when clicked opens another web page Modem A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer It converts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line and vice versa NTP Short for Network Time Protocol a standard for setting the internal system clock of the computer over a network For this instrument the internal clock of the computer is used to specify the valid time date for cookies and SSL Provider A communications business that offers Internet connection services In order to connect to the Internet it is necessary to contract to a provider Proxy A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing information on the Internet It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulfill the requests itself If not it forwards the request to the real server Proxy servers are used to improve performance and speed and to filter requests usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal network Router A device for connecting multiple computer networks For example a router is necessary when connecting several computers in a house or office and allow them to all access the Internet and share data A router is usua
109. panel Using the Fill Ins and Break patterns let you add dynamic interest and spice to your performance To start stop the rhythm STA RT SYNCHRO START START The rhythm begins as soon as the START button is pressed To stop the rhythm press the button again SYNCHRO START SYNCHRO START The SYNCHRO START button puts the rhythm in standby Re The rhythm starts when you press a note on the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard When you start the rhythm with the SYNCHRO START button pressing this button again stops the rhythm DDK 7 Owner s Manual 63 Rhythm Keyboard Percussion uOIssnoJeg pigogkay wy uy 64 DT wore When an Intro or Ending pattern is playing the Lower Keyboard cannot be played R wore Pressing the ENDING 1 button during playback of the Main section will first call up the fill in pattern then the Ending 1 pattern DDK 7 Owner s Manual INTRO Pressing one of the INTRO 1 3 buttons automatically adds a short introduction before starting the actual Main rhythm First press one of the INTRO 1 3 buttons then press the START or SYNCHRO START button to actually start the rhythm While the introduction is playing the BAR BEAT display shows the countdown to the first measure of the pattern BAR BEAT For example if there is a four measure lead in for a pattern in 4 4 time the display at right appears ENDING Pre
110. reverb length for each of the Voice sections and the Organ Flute Voice Higher settings increase the reverberance Range 0 3s 30 0s ORGAN jj Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ Flute Voice This parameter El Reference Page corresponds to the REVERB slider contained in the ATTACK VOLUME Page of the Organ Flutes page 37 Organ Flute display Range 0 24 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 47 Voice Controls and Effects lt 9 o fo Q o D E o n D a m E D Q n 48 El Reference Page Connecting a Microphone page 232 El Reference Pages Changing the rhythm reverb page 67 Keyboard Percussion page 74 DDK 7 Owner s Manual REVERB Page 3 E REVERB U 2 2 1 Au A Determines the amount of reverb effect applied to each Voice section Each slider corresponds to the REVERB slider in Voice Condition Page 1 of the respective Voices Range 0 24 REVERB Page 4 My REVERB RHYTHM 1 2 BI a BT UN PERCUSSION ACCOMPANI 8 8 OTYPE Determines the reverb type for rhythm accompaniment keyboard percussion and microphone signal TIME Determines the length of reverb applied to the rhythm accompaniment keyboard percussion and microphone signal Range 0 3s 30 0s RHYTHM Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm with PERCUSSION slider and accompaniment with ACCOMPANI slider Each slider correspo
111. song from one USB flash memory to another Insert the appropriate source and destination USB flash memory devices To copy between a SmartMedia card and USB flash memory Insert the Smartmedia card into the appropriate USB device connected to the DDK 7 as well as the USB flash memory device 1 Select the song to be copied For details on selecting a song see page 104 2 Press the TOOLS button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page 3 Press the SONG COPY button to call up the Song Copy display FOLDER USB 01 SONG MDR SONG SELECT TOOLS XG 001 MID USE 01 S0N6 SA EES COPY FROM CHANGE FOLDER USE 01 SONG SONG SONG 1 v COPY TO CHANGE CANCEL oxen Es Confirm that the desired song to be copied is displayed in the upper half of the display If you want to change the song press the COPY FROM CHANGE button to call up the Song Select display and select another song 4 Press the COPY TO CHANGE button to call up the Song Select display then select the destination song 5 Press the EXECUTE button to execute Song Copy MA If you have not selected a blank song a message appears prompting confirmation whether to overwrite or not Select OVERWRITE to execute or CANCEL to abort the operation The song name of the destination is the same as the one of the source song but is attached at the beginning If you want to change the song name see page
112. the category name is that of the currently assigned Rhythm and is irrelevant to the Rhythm menu below Select the desired rhythm name from the Rhythm menu The Rhythm menu contains many Pops rhythms more than can fit on the display page To change the display pages press the appropriate number buttons in the display RHYTHM E eB KAG J poso Ee ES RG El Reference Page Rhythm Pattern Program 16Beat 1 O EN 2 4 gt page 148 SA 1 1 1 1 e The color of the selected rhythm name changes to orange indicating that it has been selected DDK 7 Owner s Manual 61 Rhythm Keyboard Percussion uoIssnojag p3gogAsy Wy AyH 62 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Rhythm Structure Each rhythm is made up of sections Since each section is a rhythmic variation of the basic rhythm you can use them to add spice to your performance and mix up the beats while you are playing You can freely change the section while the rhythm is played back INTRO This is used for the beginning of the song There are three Intro sections that can be selected with INTRO 1 3 buttons When the Intro finishes playing the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section INTRO BCC Selected Intro section s lamp is lit MAIN This is used for playing the main part of the song There are four Main sections that can be selected with MAIN FILL IN A D
113. the destination Press the EXECUTE button in the display to start conversion A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation Select CONVERT to convert from EL format or CANCEL to abort the operation If the remaining memory of the USB flash memory is insufficient conversion cannot be executed An error message appears and the operation is cancelled Checking the Remaining Memory media ID In the TOOLS Page press the REMAINING MEMORY button This allows you to check the remaining memory in the media the song data capacity of the currently selected song and whether or not the media has an ID WOR E sone 1 REPEAT CHANGE REMAINING SETTING SONG mame wee FORMAT DRIVE USB 01 SONG XG SONG song copy GS CONVERT CONVERT CONVERT TOEL FROMEL 10 XG SONG SELECT MDR SONG SELECT GETOS USB 01 S0N6 REG_001 SONG 1 USB 01 S0N6 REG_001 REMAINING MEMORY os REMAINING 10 136 71 MB Found SONG CAPACITY 198 16 KB ba SONG 1 136 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 8 Voice Edit This DDK 7 has a Voice Edit feature that allows you to create your own Voices We suggest that you read through the Voice Structure below at first to get a firmer understanding of the Voices Then go through the editing steps reading Editing a Voice on page 140 for editing of an AWM Voice Contents 1 Voice Structure 137 3 Saving the edited Voice
114. to the instrument or data that is lost or destroyed Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use 18 11 2 2 The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the unit You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft Model No DDK 7 Serial No bottom DDK 7 Owner s Manual 3 Congratulations You are the proud owner of a fine electronic keyboard the DDK 7 The Yamaha DDK 7 combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state of the art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical versatility In order to make the most of your DDK 7 and its extensive performance potential we urge you to read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference Accessories e Owners Manual e Power cord 4 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Main Features Wide Variety of Registration Menus page 20 The Registration Menu buttons feature a total of 288 Registrations allowing you to instantly set up the DDK 7 for playing your favorite type of music The Registrations in Registration Menu are divided into six basic categories for ease of selection Moreover you can edit any of the Registrations and customize them to fit your own performance ne
115. which you want to apply sustain To turn sustain off press the same button a second time to select OFF To adjust the sustain length value use the display sliders If you set the highest value HOLD some Voices such as organ or synth will sound continuously even when the keys are released The lamp of the SUSTAIN button lights up when you turn on the Sustain effect for one of the Voice sections in the Sustain display When you turn off the Sustain effect for all Voice sections in the Sustain display the lamp turns off Remember to check whether the sustain effects are on or off in the Sustain display before you start to play Range 0 12 HOLD DDK 7 Owner s Manual i gt Voice Controls and Effects Rotary Speaker Rotary Speaker recreates the rich swirling sound of the popular rotating speaker effect The Rotary Speaker effect can be switched in real time as you play with either the front panel button The Rotary Speaker effect CANNOT be turned on only by turning on the ROTARY SP SPEED button The following procedure is needed to use the Rotary Speaker effect 1 Select the Rotary Speaker effect from the desired Voice When you want to set Rotary Speaker to one of the Voice section you can select the effect category of Rotary Speaker in the Voice Condition Display Page 3 or 4 See page 45 for details Select Rotary Speaker here TB UPPER VOICE 1 LA D E 0 1 EJ XG ROTARY SP PARANETER ea
116. 0 07 4F 2 0000 7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 15 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 50 2 0000 7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 16 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 51 3 00 Effect 2 Type MSB LSB 00 O 00 O 00 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 10 00 07 52 2 0000 7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 1 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 53 2 0000 7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 2 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 54 2 0000 7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 3 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 55 2 0000 7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 4 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 56 2 0000 7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 5 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 57 2 0000 7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 6 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 58 2 0000 7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 7 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 59 2 0000 7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 8 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 5A 2 0000 7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 9 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 5B 2 0000 7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 10 MSB LSB 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 5C 2 0000 7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 11 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 5D 2 0000 7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 12 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 5E 2 0000 7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 13 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 5F 2 0000 7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 14 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 0000 7F7F 10 00 07 60 2 0000 7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 15 0000 7F7F 0000
117. 0 3 XG El GrandPiano 0 97 16 XG Santur 0 1 3 XG El GrndPnoKSP 0 0 17 XG DrawbarOrgan ORGAN 0 32 3 XG DetunedCP80 0 32 17 XG DetDrawOrg 0 40 3 XGLayeredCP1 0 33 17 XG 60 sDrawOrg1 0 41 3 XG LayeredCP2 0 34 17 XG 60 sDrawOrg2 0 0 4 XG Honkytonk 0 35 17 XG 70 sDrawOrg1 0 1 4 XG HonkytonkKSP 0 36 17 XG DrawbarOrgan2 0 0 5 XG El Piano1 0 37 17 XG 60 sDrawOrg3 0 1 5 XG El Piano1KSP 0 38 17 XG EvenBarOrg 0 18 5 XG MellowEP1 0 40 17 XG 16 2 2_30rg 0 32 5 XG ChorusEP1 0 64 17 XG OrganBass 0 40 5 XG HardEl Piano 0 65 17 XG 70 sDrawOrg2 0 45 5 XG VXfadeEl P1 0 66 17 XG CheezyOrgan 0 64 5 XG 60 sEl Piano1 0 67 17 XG DrawbarOrgan3 0 0 6 XG El Piano2 0 0 18 XG Perc Organ 0 1 6 XG El Piano2KSP 0 24 18 XG 70 sPercOrg1 0 32 6 KG ChorusEP2 0 32 18 XG Det Perc Org 0 33 6 XG DXEPHard 0 33 18 XG LightOrgan 0 34 6 XG DXLegend 0 37 18 XG Perc Organ2 0 40 6 XG DXPhaseEP 0 0 19 XG RockOrgan 0 41 6 XG DX AnalogEP 0 64 19 XG RotaryOrgan 0 42 6 XG DXKotoEP 0 65 19 XG SlowRotary 0 45 6 XG VXfadeEl P2 0 66 19 XG FastRotary 0 0 7 XG Harpsichord 0 0 20 XG ChurchOrgan 0 1 7 KG Harpsi KSP 0 32 20 XG ChurchOrgan3 0 25 7 XG Harpsichord2 0 35 20 XG ChurchOrgan2 0 35 7 XG Harpsichord3 0 40 20 XG NotreDame 0 0 8 XG Clavi 0 64 20 XG OrganFlute 0 1 8 XG Clavi KSP 0 65 20 XG Trem OrganFl 0 27 8 XG Clavi Wah 0 0 21 X
118. 5 14ch x XG Bn 00 00 7F Bank select 5 14ch x XG Bn 20 00 7F Bn 01 00 7F Modulation 5 14ch x XG Bn 04 00 7F 2nd Expression 16ch 16ch Control 4ch 4ch LEAD 1 Bn 05 00 7F Portamento Time 5 14ch x XG Bn 06 00 7F Data Entry 5 14ch x XG Bn 26 00 7F Bn 07 00 7F Volume 5 14ch x XG Bn OA 00 7F Pan 5 14ch x XG Bn OB 00 7F Expression 16ch 16ch Control 5 14ch XG Bn 40 00 7F Sustain 16ch 16ch Control Hold 5 14ch x XG Bn 41 00 7F Portamento 5 14ch x XG Bn 42 00 7F Sostenuto 5 14ch x XG Bn 43 00 7F Soft Pedal 5 14ch x XG Bn 47 00 7F Resonance 5 14ch x XG Bn 48 00 7F Release Time 5 14ch x XG Bn 49 00 7F Attack Time 5 14ch x XG Bn 4A 00 7F Brightness 5 14ch x XG Bn 4B 00 7F Decay Time 5 14ch x XG Bn 4C 00 7F Vibrato Rate 5 14ch x XG Bn 4D 00 7F Vibrato Depth 5 14ch x XG Bn 4E 00 7F Vibrato Delay 5 14ch x XG Bn 54 00 7F Portamento Control 5 14ch x XG Bn 5B 00 7F Reverb Send Level 5 14ch x XG Bn 5D 00 7F Chorus Send Level 5 14ch x XG Bn 5E 00 7F Variation Effect Send Level 5 14ch x XG Bn 60 00 7F Data Increment 5 14ch x XG Bn 61 00 7F Data Decrement Bn 62 00 7F NRPN LSB 5 14ch x XG Bn 63 00 7F NRPN MSB Bn 64 00 7F RPN LSB 5 14ch x XG Bn 65 00 7F RPN MSB 248 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Code Hexadecimal Function Receive Transmit Remarks Bn 78 00 All Sound Off
119. 5 14ch x XG Bn 79 00 Reset All Controllers Bn 7B 00 All Note Off Bn 7C 00 Omni Off Bn 7D 00 Omni On Bn 7E 00 Mono Bn 7F 00 Poly Cn nn Program Change 5 14ch x XG 16ch 16ch Control Dn 00 7F After Touch ich 1ch UK 2ch 2ch LK 3ch x PEDAL 4ch LEAD 1 5 14ch XG En 00 7F 00 7F Pitch Bend 1ch x UK 2ch x LK 4ch x LEAD 1 1 16ch x XG Can be changed in the MIDI settings page 238 Can be output when assigned to channel 4 1 2 XG Mode Code Hexadecimal Function Receive Transmit Remarks 8n nn 00 7F Note Off 1 16ch x 9n nn 00 Note On 1ch UK 9n nn 01 7F Note Off 2ch LK 3ch PEDAL 1 16ch An nn 00 7F Polyphonic After Touch 1 16ch x Bn 00 00 7F Bank select 1 16ch x Bn 20 00 7F Bn 01 00 7F Modulation x 1 16ch Bn 04 00 7F 2nd Expression x 16ch Control 4ch LEAD 1 Bn 05 00 7F Portamento Time 1 16ch x Bn 06 00 7F Data Entry 1 16ch x Bn 26 00 7F Bn 07 00 7F Volume 1 16ch x Bn OA 00 7F Pan 1 16ch x Bn OB 00 7F Expression 16ch Control 1 16ch Bn 40 00 7F Sustain 1 16ch 16ch Control Hold x Bn 41 00 7F Portamento 1 16ch x Bn 42 00 7F Sostenuto 1 16ch x Bn 43 00 7F Soft Pedal 1 16ch x Bn 47 00 7F Resonance 1 16ch x Bn 48 00 7F Release Time 1 16ch x Bn 49 00 7F Attack Time 1 16ch x Bn 4A 00 7F Brightness 1 16ch x Bn 4B 00 7F Decay Time 1 16ch x Bn 4C 00 7F Vibrato Rate 1 16ch x Bn 4D 00 7F Vibrato Depth 1 16ch x Bn 4E 00 7F Vibrato Delay 1 16ch x B
120. 7 2 Master Coarse Tuning O x X FO 7F 7F 04 05 01 01 01 01 01 PP VV F7 2 Reverb Parameter O x X FO 7F 7F 04 05 01 01 01 01 02 PP VV F7 2 Chorus Parameter O x X FO 7F 7F 09 01 On PP VV F7 2 After Touch Parameter O x D 250 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Code Hexadecimal Message Receive Transmit FO 7F 7F 09 03 On CC PP VV F7 GM2 Control Change Parameter O x XN FO 7F 7F OA 01 On KK CC PP VV F7 GM2 Key Based Controller O x XN Universal Non Realtine Messages Code Hexadecimal Message Receive Transmit FO 7E 7F 09 01 F7 GM ON O x xX FO 7E 7F 09 03 F7 GM2 ON O x xX FO 7E 7F 09 02 F7 GM OFF O x xX FO 7E 7F 08 08 JJ GG MM data F7 GM2 Scale Octave Tuning O x xX XG Native Code Hexadecimal Message Receive Transmit FO 43 1N 4C AH AM AL data F7 XG Parameter Change O x FO 43 ON 4C BH BL AH AM AL data cc F7 XG Bulk Dump O x FO 43 1N 27 30 00 00 MM LL cc F7 XG Master Tuning O x Clavinova Exclusive Code Hexadecimal Message Receive Transmit FO 43 73 01 02 F7 Request for Internal Synch Mode O x 03 Request for External Synch Mode O x Message Exclusive Code Hexadecimal Message Receive Transmit FO 43 60 7A F7 Rhythm Start O x FO 43 60 7D F7 R
121. 74 different real rhythms featuring actual drum and percussion sampled sounds Automatic Accompaniment functions are used with the rhythms providing appropriate and completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the selected rhythm Moreover the DDK 7 has a Keyboard Percussion IC I feature that allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from O the Upper Lower keyboard and Pedalboard ma SEQ 3 SEQ 4 co INTRO SYNCHRO START BREAK 2 START MAIN FILL IN ENDING 2 O noo OC Rhythm Keyboard Percussion D pa 5 Contents ES 1 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button 60 5 Melody On Chord NOCH a na sasansnnnnnn 73 Fi e Selecting a rbwthm a 60 6 Keyboard Percussion 74 d e Operating the rhythm from the panel 63 e Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion 74 O e Changing the rhythm volume 65 e Preset Keyboard Percussion List 76 S Adjustingthetempo 66 e Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion 5 e Changing the rhythm reverb Of ar og Sieh ap al 79 S 2 Rhythm Liest IIIA 68 e Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings 81 3 Accompani
122. 7F Effect1 Parameter13 O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 11 00 01 4E 2 0000 7F7F Effect Parameter14 O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 11 00 01 4F 2 0000 7F7F Effect1 Parameter15 O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 11 00 01 50 2 0000 7F7F Effect1 Parameter16 O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 11 00 01 62 1 00 7F Sustain On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 0N 11 00 01 63 1 00 7F Length 7F Hold O 00 7F O 15 3D 7F 7E Long 00 Short Keyboard Parameters Sustain Parameters Address mm O 2 UK LK PEDAL Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm H 12 00 02 00 1 00 7F Sustain On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F x 01 0N 12 00 02 01 1 00 7F Length 00 Short O 00 7F x 15 3D 7F Long DDK 7 Owner s Manual Keyboard Percussion Parameters Address mm 1 2 K B P 1 K B P 2 Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm H 12 01 02 10 1 00 7F Keyboard Percussion On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F x 01 0N 12 01 02 11 1 00 08 Keyboard Percussion Menu 00 PRESET O 00 08 O 00 08 01 USER 1 02 USER 2 03 USER 3 04 USER 4 05 USER 5 06 USER 6 07 USER 7 08 USER 8 Rhythm Rhythm Parameters Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive RxRange Transmit Tx Range hh mm ll 13 00 00 0B 2 0000 7F7F Rhythm Assign Number 0000 7F7F O 00 7F O 00 7F 00 7F
123. A aaah Naaman cio 38 A E E EE aa 109 elei RE 196 FOOT PEDAL JACKS visita at 224 POONG ahem eerste temas de aora dores tagaan KO 94 193 FOOTAGE Footswitches FORMAT MD Ri wi ama ka an Adana 103 G Gate MMES EEN 165 Ee 195 H KASI eee ee aa 225 elen GENEE 217 ITAL UH 41 nitalize Factory sucias 23 nitialize Internet Gettinge nanan annwnn nan awawnanaaa sans 221 nitialize Registration Memor 93 TERNAL FERNET EA AA IA AA AA WA APA MAA nternet Direct Connection UA E J Jacks and Controls aaa 223 JM Pr E 95 K Keyboard PERCUSSION ii res raros 74 L L ORGAN FLUTES musa nyn Arer seeds 37 LANG ce cece emer ce reer ere E Wa 219 LANGUAGE nm AA Eed E 16 LAST Lead VOICE maam BA ANG 42 LAYER Voice Editions tac 141 ECD BRIGHTNESS o delo ceo 17 LCD Display MR O Lead e erer LEVEL tee Bia 142 LFO Low Frequency Oa 145 LOWER 2 namana aa 8 kowerkeyboard Vol ess maa 25 M Ma Ge TEE 89 73 Le A GG KARA DALA a AINEI IC ASTER VOLUME g tt fie ansera aae eea EEEE aa E E E A a AA AA elody On Chord EMORY AB Cisco 73 ETRONOME aa IM lille asha 152 eg le e o A RA PANA GA BNG IC VOLUME o AA IDI Contro HUN OUT a AA 224 IDIQUFFILTER E Ah E da 238 eelere E 38 ODE Rotary Speaker aneor wakaiba kiimani aka 51 usie Data ee 102 N KE EE 118 NEXT REGIST Shift ERA iia 97 NOTE LIMIT naaa nn NANANG aR 142 NOTE SMIET oe 142 O Nee EE 224 BA 37 OUTPUT MIDI aire 238 P PA PA
124. Accrd SmoothLead MIDIGrand Glockenspiel SmallAccrd 60 sClean OctavePiano1 MusicBox Accordion Live ClassicGtr OctavePiano2 TubularBell TangoAccrd Cool JazzSoloGtr CP80 Kalimba Steirisch VintageOpen Cool GalaxyEP Dulcimer Bandoneon FolkGuitar StageEP Timpani SoftAccordion SolidChord PolarisEP XG Celesta Sweet Harmonica VintageMute JazzChorus XG Glockenspiel ModernHarp PedalSteel HyperTines XG MusicBox 4 BluesHarp LeadGuitar 2 Cool E Piano 2 XG Orgel XG DrawbarOrgan ChorusGuitar PhaseEP XG Vibraphone XG DetunedDrawOrg VintageTrem NewTines XG VibesKSP XG 60 sDrawOrg1 OctaveGuitar FunkEP XG HaraVibes XG 60 sDrawOrg2 DeepChorus DXModern KG Marimba XG 70 sDrawOrg1 TremoloGuitar SmoothTine XG MarimbaKSP KG DrawbarOrgan2 HeavyStacl ChorusBell XG SineMarimba XG 60 sDrawOrg3 BrightClean VintageEP XG Balimba XG EvenBarOrg WahGuitar VenusEP XG LogDrums XG 16 2 2_30rg DXJazzGuitar ModernEP XG Xylophone XG OrganBass Distortion TremoloEP XG TubularBells XG 70 sDrawOrg2 El 12StrGuitar SuperDX XG ChurchBells KG CheezyOrgan FeedbackGuitar SuitcaseEP XG Carillon XG DrawbarOrgan3 18StringGuitar StereoClavi XG Dulcimer XG Perc Organ MutedGuitar PhaseClavi XG Dulcimer2 XG 70 sPercOrg1 FunkGuitar Clavi XG Cimbalom 5 XG Det Perc Org Overdrive 3 WahClavi 3 XG Santur XG LightOrgan Mega SteelGuitar XG GrandPiano ORGAN XG Perc Organ2 Mega HiStrGuitar XG GrndPianoKSP 1 Cool Organ XG RockOrgan Mega 12StrGuitar XG MellowGrPno Cool JazzOrgan XG RotaryOrgan Me
125. Beat Modern Smooth Lead Big Band Baroque Ballad Piano Kids March 1 Rock Band Pop Ballad Clarinet Swing Flute amp Harp LA Fusion Kids March 2 Detroit Pop Guitar Ballad Jazz Combo Serenade 70 s Pops Kids March 3 Techno Pop Acoustic Ballad Medium Jazz Fast March Pop E Piano Synth Rock Sheriff Reggae Healing Guitar Organ Session Wild West Prism E Piano Symphonic March 1 Rock amp Roll Chillout Guitar Combo Vienna Waltz Kool E Piano Symphonic March 2 Power Rock Sweetheart 1 Tender Ballad Polka Spacey E Piano Bluegrass 60 s Guitar Rock Sweetheart 2 Jazz Waltz Chanson Club Smooth E Piano Sea Carnival Unplugged Slow amp Easy Five Four Theatre Organ 2 60 s Soul Basic Waltz Motor City Euro Trance Big Band Samba Flamenco Classic Jazz Org Brass Ensemble Lovely Shuffle 6 8 Trance Mambo Brass Pop Flamenco Organ Band Pure Waltz Gospel Shuffle Cool Hip Hop Mambo Tenor Mexican Dance Bump Organ Rococo Ensemble Joyful Gospel Latin House Montuno Mariachi Kool Dist Organ Pop Cha Cha Frankly Soul Dance Beat Bossa Nova Celtic Dance Rock Dist Organ Comical Rumba Soul Euro Dance Pop Pop Bossa Folk Step Organ Funk Comical Samba Gospel UK Pop Sweet Rumba Italiano Progressive Rock Toy Orchestra 6 8 Soul Jive Beguine Musette Lounge Organ Charleston Hit Pop Disco Queen Cha Cha Cha Country 60 s Cheap Organ Winter Swing New Country Disco Soul Mellow Groove Hawaiian Sunset Reggae Snow Waltz 1 Eternal Pop Pop Disco Modern R amp B Chinese Nocturne Hard Rock Organ Snow Waltz 2 Ground Be
126. Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L D3 Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute SIGAW Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open E3 Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L F3 Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H AA Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L G3 Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H HE Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L A3 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa EE Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas B3 Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle H CA Samba Whistle L Samba Whistle L Samba Whistle L Samba Whistle L Samba Whistle L Samba Whistle L Ka EZE Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short 8 D4 Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long x Di Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves 2 F4 Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H 3 F4 Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L S E Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 G4 Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Scratch L 2 WG Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute
127. Bosg WU AyH ETHNIC XG CarPassing XG AsianBells PERCUSSION 1 XG Agogo XG SteelDrums XG GlassPerc XG ThaiBells XG Woodblock XG Castanets XG TaikoDrum XG GranCassa XG MelodicTom XG MelodicTom2 XG RealTom XG RockTom XG SynthDrum XG AnalogTom XG ElectroPerc XG Rev Cymbal SOUND EFFECTS 1 XG GtrFretNoise KG BreathNoise KG Seashore XG BirdTweet XG TelephoneRing XG Helicopter KG Applause KG Gunshot KG CuttingNoise XG CuttingNoise2 XG StringSlap XG FI KeyClick XG Shower XG Thunder XG Wind XG Stream 2 XG Bubble XG Feed XG Dog XG Horse XG BirdTweet2 XG Ghost XG Maou XG PhoneCall XG DoorSqueak XG DoorSlam XG ScratchC ut XG ScratchSj plit XG WindChime XG Telphone Ring2 XG CarEnginelgn XG CarTiresSqel 182 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 1 Bagpipe KG CarCrash XG Sitar XG Siren XG DetunedSitar XG Train XG Sitar2 XG JetPlane XG Tambra XG Starship XG Tamboura XG Burst XG Banjo XG RollrCoaster XG MutedBanjo XG Submarine XG Rabab XG Laugh XG Gopichant XG Scream XG Oud XG Punch XG Shamisen XG Heartbea
128. C effect The M O C effect is applied constantly as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed When you release the Foot Pedal the M O C effect is cancelled 200 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Controlling the Solo Function You can turn the Solo function on off by using the Foot Pedal See page 30 for more information Controlling the Rhythm You can control the rhythm start stop or switch the rhythm sections not only by using the Left Footswitch but also the Foot Pedal El Reference Page 1 Set the rhythm settings in the LEFT Page of the Footswitch Footswitch Display display page 1947 Select RHYTHM CONTROL in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display The Rhythm Control function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal NO MM FOOT PEDAL om EXP MDI AUX OUT PEDAL FOOT PEDALI FOOT PEDAL man re man e SUSTAIN J SLIDE J M 0 C SOLO J J RHYTHM CONTROL J GLIDE ROTARY SPEAKER J REGIST SHIFT J e Press the Foot Pedal when you want to start stop the rhythm or switch the rhythm sections Controllers DDK 7 Owner s Manual 201 Q o 3 2 o ba 2 D 202 Reference Page Footswitch Display page 194 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Controlling Glide You can control the Glide effect not only by using the Left Footswitch but also the Foot Pedal 1 Set the Glide settings in the LEFT Page of the Footswitch display Select GLIDE in the FOOT PEDAL Page
129. EE 8 Rewind Upper Keyboard YE 220 aani dd ALAGA aaah ta sen es Rhythm USB TO DEVICE wa Rhythm USB TO DEVICE terminal www Pigaan USB TO HOST Rhythm USER Registration Shift Rhythm USER Vibrato Rhythm Pattern Prod sico cc 148 User Keyboard Percussion NEE 147 User RAVN EA Rhythm Sequence Frogrem nnaman 183 Heer VOC AE PAYING CHOPA es 8 BU AA SN ROTARY SP SPEED maa ama LA canada 51 Rota Speake eee eo 50 v VARIATION Rhythm Pattern Program 170 S e A 23 SON rca IO KG AN 62 VIBRATO 43 SHIFT Registration O cena 95 Ke LEE 24 SHIFT END eee 97 VAI IA 26 SINGLE FINGER En 72 VOICE Sa a 0 Tel EE 28 41 VOICE DISPLAY orce AA NA es ee ee e 18 VOCE ett AA AAA AAA HE 137 VISA 24 Volume Accompaniment mawizara 71 Volume Keyboard Percussion 75 VOLUME Ma ia a aena e ra Ea ei 233 VOLUME Organ FIUtES jenini antsiaren VOLUME Rhythm Pattern Program VOLUME RAVNMI kacr ch dal O ITAKUWA 63 VOLUME Voice 7 SEED WHIT En 154 VOLUME XG ennnrnnrnnnennnninnininn STOP Rotary poa cocida 51 STOP Shift ENA caia ceo 97 Si dada 175 W SUM Ra 49 Wireless LAN a ri es 218 SUSTAIN Panel EE 49 SYNCHRO STAR dins 63 X System Exclusive Messages niwa 236 AE rere a ATIA NG NA err ere UNASKIA 6 126 System Messages 270 DDK 7 Owner s Manual For details of products please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below Pour plus de d tails sur les produits veuillez vou
130. ESET Accompaniment parts At the bottom of the display there are seven part buttons such as Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad and so on These parts with the exception of Main Drum and Add Drum are Accompaniment parts 2 Turn the desired parts on The Accompaniment consists of five parts Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 and Phrase 2 and each of them can be set to on or off by pressing corresponding button in the display If you turn all the parts off the Accompaniment does not sound CHORD 1 CHORD 2 These are the rhythmic chord backing parts PAD This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as strings and organ PHRASE 1 PHRASE 2 These parts are used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios Not all parts contain accompaniment data Some parts may be empty depending on the selected rhythm and rhythm section Main Drum and Add Drum contains the drum and percussion rhythm patterns When you turn both Main Drum and Add Drum off the drum and percussion do not sound Generally Main Drum contains the main part of the rhythm and Add drum has additional percussion sounds such as tambourine 3 Adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the Accompaniment Pressing the rhythm button on the panel again calls up the Rhythm Condition display The two sliders at the right side of the display can control the Accompani
131. Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94 8008 Ziirich Switzerland Tel 01 383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC SLOVAKIA HUNGARY SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Austria CEE Department Schleiergasse 20 A 1100 Wien Austria Tel 01 602039025 POLAND Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp z 0 0 Oddzial w Polsce ul 17 Stycznia 56 PL 02 146 Warszawa Poland Tel 022 868 07 57 EL 40 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgefiihrten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragsh ndlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungslandern erh ltlich Para detalles sobre productos contacte su tienda Yamaha m s cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo THE NETHERLANDS BELGIUM LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5 b 4133 AB Vianen The Netherlands Tel 0347 358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70 77312 Marne la Vall e Cedex 2 France Tel 01 64 61 4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S P A Viale Italia 88 20020 Lainate Milano Italy Tel 02 935 771 SPAIN PORTUGAL Yamaha Hazen Musica S A Ctra de la Coruna km 17 200 28230 Las Rozas Madrid Spain Tel 91 639 8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S A The Music House 147 Skiathou Street 112 55 Athens Greece Tel 01 228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J A Wettergrens Gata 1 B
132. F Touch Tone Initial Touch 00 MI O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 10 00 07 17 1 00 7F Touch Tone After Touch 00 MI O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 10 00 07 18 1 00 7F Pitch After Touch 00 NARROW O 00 7F O 32 4E 7F WIDE 10 00 07 19 1 00 7F User Vibrato 00 PRESET O 00 7F O 00 01 01 USER 10 00 07 1A 1 00 7F Vibrato Delay 00 SHORT O 00 7F O 02 1A 7F LONG 10 00 07 1B 1 00 7F Vibrato Depth 00 MI O 00 7F O 00 54 7F MAX 10 00 07 Ve 1 00 7F Vibrato Speed 00 SLOW O 00 7F O 3C 6C 7F FAST 10 00 05 1D 1 00 7F Pitch Horizontal Touch 00 NARROW O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F WIDE 10 00 07 1E 1 00 7F Touch Vibrato On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F ON 10 04 07 1F 1 00 7F TO LOWERW A SOLO KNEE 00 OFF O 00 7F x 01 ON 10 04 05 20 1 00 02 Slide On Foot Pedal Off 00 OFF O 00 02 O 00 02 01 0N 02 Foot Pedal 10 04 05 21 1 00 7F Slide Time 00 FAST O 00 7F O 02 7F 7F SLOW 10 00 07 22 1 00 7F Tune Detune 00 Down O 00 7F O 00 7F 40 Center 7F Up 10 00 01 23 1 00 7F 2nd Expression Pitch Bend 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 04 07 01 ON 10 00 05 24 1 00 7F Footswitch Glide Control 00 OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 ON 10 00 07 25 1 3A 46 Transpose 3A KeyDown O 3A 46 O 3A 46 40 Normal 46 KeyUp 10 06 07 28 1 00 7F Poly On Off 00 Mono O 00 7F O 00 01 01 Poly 10 05 29 1 00 7F Priority Last Top 00 TOP O 00 7F O 00 01 01 LAST 10 00 07 2A 1 00 7F Volume Mute 00 Mute OFF O 00 7F O 00 01 01 Mute ON 254 DDK 7 Owner s Manual
133. F x 01 External 14 00 OA 3 00 04 06 Registration Menu 00 04 06 O 00 04 06 O 00 04 06 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 03 00 0B 00 0B 00 0B 00 0B Effect Parameters Overall Reverb Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive RxRange Transmit Tx Range hh mm ll 14 01 00 1 00 7F Reverb Depth 00 MIN O 00 7F x 7F MAX 14 01 01 1 00 7F Reverb Time Panel 00 FAST O 00 7F O 00 45 7F SLOW 14 01 02 3 00 Reverb Type Panel 00 O 00 O 00 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F Effect Parameters Overall Rhythm Reverb Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm ll 14 02 01 1 00 7F Reverb Time Rhythm 00 FAST O 00 7F O 00 45 7F SLOW 14 02 02 3 00 Reverb Type Rhythm 00 O 00 O 00 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F Effect Parameters Overall Rotary Speaker Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm ll 14 03 00 1 00 7F Rotary Speaker Speed On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F x 01 0N 14 03 01 1 00 7F Rotary Speaker Speed Control 00 STOP O 00 7F O 00 01 Mode 01 SLOW 14 03 02 2 0000 Rotary Speaker Speed Control 0000 SLOW O 0000 007F O 0040 007F 007F Speed 007F FAST DDK 7 Owner s Manual 209 Appendix xipuaddy AUX OUT Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm H 14 04 00 13 1 00 03 A
134. FROM EL button to call up the Convert display DH ore If the source song s name contains full size characters or Japanese characters the converted song name will be shown with question marks such as DH ore When you convert the protected EL data to DDK 7 format set the write protect tab of the EL disk to the overwrite position tab closed ATT wore When converting a protected EL song to the DDK 7 format make sure to use a USB flash memory card with ID DDK 7 Owner s Manual 135 Music Data Recorder MDR HAW Jepsooey Lq ASNN SHIZEN SETTING SONG NAME mc zl als SONG SELECT MDR SONG SELECT Tools USB FD1 SHIZEN USB FD1 CONVERT FRON EL os REMAINING AN MEMORY FORMAT CHANGE FOLDER USB FDI SONG IKIMONO gt r CHANGE TO CHANGE FOLDER USB 01 SONG SONG IKIMONO CONVERT CONVERT CONVERT man TO EL FROM EL TO XG CANCEL D Confirm that the desired song to be converted is shown in upper half of the display If you want to change the song press the CHANGE button of the Change From section to call up the Song Select display and select the desired song Press the CHANGE button of the Change To section in the display then select the destination The specified destination location must be within the range of Song 1 100 in the USB flash memory If a destination is not selected an empty song is automatically set as
135. Fill In A Entering percussion each section 7 Save as 3 a User Rhythm Ending 1 These are blank sections no percussion sounds if you press ENDING 2 or 3 button no sound is played DDK 7 Owner s Manual Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern In the SETTING Page of the display set the conditions of the rhythm such as time signature measure length and so on You can also customize the part settings in this SETTING Page deleting any part or copying a part from another rhythm to the currently selected rhythm 1 Press the SETTING button in the display to call up the SETTING Page PATTERN INPUT G eme SAVE FILE Marching Band 1 MAIN A SECTION MEASURE O METRONOME MAN A ASSENBLE ON BEAT CLEAR 214 3 4 KI 5 4 PART Determines the time signature used for the rhythm You can select the time signature with the BEAT buttons PATTERN emp INPUT crecer serie SAVE FILE Marching Band 1 MAIN A SECTION MEASURE O O O O METRONOWE bg If you start the Rhythm Pattern Program from a preset rhythm pressing a BEAT button that is not the same as the currently selected rhythm calls up the following message PATTERN emp wen mi ge ae FUE lr Dem 1 Mar MAIN All sections will be cleared to set beat Continue Kg pl EE EN w Selecting CLEAR deletes all data in the rhythm and changes th
136. Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks Basic Default 1 2 3 1601 1 3 5 16 2 Channel Changed 1 16 4 Mode Default Mode 3 Mode 3 Messages X x Altered kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk x Note 36 96 3 0 127 4 Number True Voice kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Velocity Note on O 9nH v 1 127 O 9nH v 1 127 Note off X 9nH v 0 X 9nH v 0 or 8nH After Key s X O 6 Touch Ch s O O Pitch Bend O 55 O 0 32 X O 6 Bank Select 1 5 7 10 X O 6 4 O 7 O 7 2nd Expression 6 38 X O 6 Data Entry 11 O 7 O 6 7 Expression Control 16 X x VA After Touch Change 64 O 7 O f6 7 Sustain 65 67 X O t6 71 78 X O 6 Sound Controller 84 91 93 94 X O 6 96 97 X O 6 Data Entry SW 98 99 100 101 X O 6 NRPN RPN Program O 10 O 11 Change True number kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk System Exclusive O O System Song Position X x Common Song Select x x Tune x x System Clock O O 9 Real Time Commands O O FAH FCH All Sound Off X O 120 6 Aux Reset All Cntrls X O 121 6 Messages Local On Off x x All Notes Off x O 123 127 6 Active Sense O O Reset x x ek 1ch UK 2ch LK 3ch PEDAL 16ch CONTROL Notes D 1ch UK 2ch LK 3ch PEDAL 4ch LEAD1 5 14ch XG 15ch KEYBOARD PERCUSSION 16ch CONTROL SCH UK 48 96 LK 36 96 PEDAL 36 60 4 UK LK PEDAL LEAD1 36 96 XG 0 127 PERCUSSION 3 127 45 UK UK HorizontalTouch LK LK HorizontalTouch 6 XG only 7 CONTRO
137. G TMP MDR xx Vxx SONG xxx C02 SONG NAM DDK 7 Owner s Manual 115 Music Data Recorder MDR HAM Jepsooey Lq ASNN 116 DDK 7 Owner s Manual D Saving Registrations as Registration Data File You can also record Registrations by themselves without recording a performance Bulk data including Registration Memory and Registration Shift settings Rhythm Patterns User rhythms Rhythm Seguence data and User Voices are also saved in the operation Registrations 1 16 stored to the numbered buttons are saved together as a bank Registrations 1 First create your original settings you want to save then select the destination blank song For details on selecting a song see page 104 2 Press the REGIST EDIT button in the SONG SELECT Page to call up the Regist Edit display 3 Press the SAVE button A message appears indicating that the Registration is being recorded After the message disappears exit from the Regist Edit display by pressing the CLOSE button and return to the SONG SELECT Page The song to which the Registration is recorded is automatically named SONG XX xx indicates song number Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song When you want to use more than 16 Registration numbers you can save additional Registration banks to a sin
138. G ReedOrgan 0 64 8 XG PulseClavi 0 40 21 XG PuffOrgan 0 65 8 XG PierceClavi 0 0 22 XG Accordion 0 0 9 XG Celesta CHROMATIC 0 32 22 XG Accordlt o 0 10 XG Glockenspiel PERC o O 23 XG Harmonica 0 0 11 XG MusicBox 0 32 23 XG Harmonica2 0 64 11 XG Orgel 0 0 24 XG TangoAccord 0 0 12 XG Vibraphone 0 64 24 XG TangoAccord2 0 1 12 XG VibesKSP 0 0 25 XG NylonGuitar GUITAR 0 45 12 XG HardVibes 0 16 25 XG NylonGuitar2 0 0 13 XG Marimba 0 25 25 XG NylonGuitar3 0 1 13 XG MarimbaKSP 0 43 25 XG Vel GtrHarmo 0 64 13 XG SineMarimba 0 96 25 XG Ukulele 0 97 13 XG Balimba 0 0 26 XG SteelGuitar 0 98 13 XG LogDrums 0 16 26 XG SteelGuitar2 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Voice Number Voice Number Voice Name Category Voice Name Category MSB LSB PRG MSB LSB PRG 0 35 26 XG 12StrGuitar GUITAR 0 18 40 XG ClickSynBass BASS 0 40 26 KG Nylon amp Steel 0 19 40 XG SynBass2Dark 0 41 26 XG Steel amp Body 0 32 40 XG SmoothSyBass 0 96 26 XG Mandolin 0 40 40 XG ModulrSyBass 0 0 27 XG JazzGui
139. GER PHASER TREMOLO AUTO P ROTARY SPEAKER DISTORTION DISTORTION WAH DYNAMIC EO ENHANCER PITCH CHANGE MISCELLANEOUS Ee By selecting PRESET in the list the original factory effect category for the selected Voice is automatically set Selecting THRU bypasses the effect no effect is added to the selected Voice O TYPE 1 Page 3 TYPE 2 Page 4 Determines the type of the effect Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the effect type list corresponding to the selected effect category Select the desired effect type in the list If you have selected the PRESET category the effect type cannot be edited After changing the effect type the effect parameter below is automatically changed corresponding to the selected effect type Effect Parameters Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type DDK 7 Owner s Manual 45 a Voice Controls and Effects Ste PUB SJOJJUO 3210A 46 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 3 Selecting from the panel The Reverb Sustain and Rotary Speaker displays are called up by pressing the respective buttons on the panel Reverb Reverb adds an echo like effect to the sound giving the impression of a performance in a large room or concert hall You can adjust the reverb volume for each Voice sections or adjust the reverb volume for rhythm and accompaniment separately To adjust the reverb effect and call
140. ING MOD Parameter Value Description LO FI Sampling 44 1 kHz 345 0 Hz Determines the sampling DYNA FILTER Control frequency DYNA RINGMOD Word Length 0 127 Determines the resolution or SING MOD roughness of the sound Filter Type Thru PwrBass Determines the filter type ISOLATOR Radio Tel Clean Low AMBIENCE Dry Wet D63 gt W D lt W63 Determ nes the balance of original sound and the effect Parameter Value Description sound DelayTime 0 0 50 0 msec Determines the delay time DYNA FILTER Output Phase Normal Invers Determines the phase of the effect sound Parameter Value Description Dry Wet D63 gt W D lt W63 Determines the balance of Sensitivity 0 127 Determines the sensitivity original sound and the effect The higher the value the sound DDK 7 Owner s Manual greater the change Parameter Value Description Level Offset 0 127 Determines the offset values of the filter frequency The offset value affects the filter frequency when no control signals are received Filter Type LPF 12 dB Determines the filter type LPF 18 dB LPF 24 dB HPF BPF BEF Resonance 16 111 The higher the value the more sharp the frequency response Curve is Dry Wet D63 gt W D lt W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound DYNA RINGMOD Parameter Value De
141. Jer Sere A COC Select SLIDE in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display The Slide effect function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal GLOBAL EXP J MIDI AUX OUT FPEDAL FOOT PEDALI FOOT PEDAL2 mn Lk POLARITY ech rtl HA FOOT PEDAL SUSTAIN J SLIDE M 0 C SOLO J RHYTHM CONTROL J GLIDE ROTARY SPEAKER J REGIST SHIFT J e SUSTAIN J M 0 C J RHYTHM CONTROL J ROTARY SPEAKER J REGIST SHIFT EXPRESSION J OFF Press the Foot Pedal when you wantto apply the Slide effect The Slide effect is applied as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed Releasing the Foot Pedal cancels the Lead Slide effect DDK 7 Owner s Manual 199 Controllers Controlling Melody On Chord 1 Call up the Page 3 of the Voice Display El Reference Page VOICE Display Page 3 Voice display page 18 Jl MELODY ON CHORD a 2 Select one of the modes Reference Page IE MELODY ON CHORD TITI Melody On Chord page 73 M 0 C MODE D Select M O C in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display The M O C function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal P FOOT PEDAL om EXP MDI AUX OUT FOOT PEDALI FOOT PEDAL wan re man EN sustain SLIDE J Kur solo mm emm GLIDE ROTARY SPEAKER wee am EXPRESSION OFF J EXPRESSION OFF Q o 3 2 o ba S D Press the Foot Pedal when you want to apply the M O
142. K 7 Owner s Manual 173 Rhythm Program weiBo1g WU AyH Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program You can quit the Rhythm Pattern Program from any of its display pages 1 Press the PROGRAM button Ifa rhythm is playing it will automatically be stopped If you leave Rhythm Pattern Program without having edited any patterns this simply guits the Rhythm Pattern Program If you have not saved the edited pattern a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation 9 Select EXIT to leave Rhythm Pattern Program or CANCEL to abort the operation and return to the previous display When you leave the Rhythm Pattern Program the square at the top left in the display turns light blue for a few seconds indicating that data is currently being saved Do not turn the power off while the data is being saved Recalling User Rhythm Patterns The User rhythms you have created in the Rhythm Pattern Program can be selected and played from the User menu Refer to Chapter 5 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button page 60 Select USER category here RHYTHM USER RHYTHM K B P 1 K B P 2 RHYTHM OOA mb WAIN ADD p PRESET 2 EEES Select the User Rhythm number 174 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Selecting Rhythm from an External Media You can load rhythms from a USB flash memory or other external media and edit and save them as User Rhythms Data that can be load
143. Kick Short Kick Tight H Kick Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy 37 Side Stick Side Stick Light Stick Ambient Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick 38 Snare Snare Short Snare Ambient Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 39 Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap 40 Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight 2 Snare Tight Snap Snare Rock Tight Snare Noisy 3 41 Floor Tom L Floor Tom L Hybrid Tom 1 Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 om Electro 1 42 Hi Hat Closed Hi Hat Closed Hi Hat Closed 2 Hi Hat Closed Hi Hat Closed Hi Hat Closed 43 Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Hybrid Tom 2 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 44 Hi Hat Pedal Hi Hat Pedal Hi Hat Pedal 2 Hi Hat Pedal Hi Hat Pedal Hi Hat Pedal 45 Low Tom Low Tom Hybrid Tom 3 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 om Electro 3 46 Hi Hat Open Hi Hat Open Hi Hat Open 2 Hi Hat Open Hi Hat Open Hi Hat Open 47 Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Hybrid Tom 4 Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 om Electro 4 48 Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Hybrid Tom 5 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 om Electro 5 49 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 50 High Tom High Tom Hybrid Tom 6 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 om Electro 6 51 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 52 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal 53 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup 54 Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Light Tambourine Tambourine Tambouri
144. L R Depth 0 127 Determines the depth of panning between the left and right channels F R Depth 0 127 Front rear Determines the depth of the front and rear panning effect This controls both level and pitch at the same time Pan L lt gt R L gt R L lt R Determines the Auto Pan Lturn Rturn L R type L lt gt R is a sine wave and L R is a sawtooth wave Dry Wet D63 gt W D lt W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound ROTARY SPEAKER This popular effect used mainly for electronic organ sounds recreates the rich animated pulsing sound of a rotating speaker horn Effect Type Effect Type KG ROTARY SP DUAL ROTSP 2 ROTARY SP 1 DIST ROT SP ROTARY SP 2 ODRV ROT SP ROTARY SP 3 AMP ROT SP ROTARY SP 4 DIST 2ROT SP ROTARY SP 5 ODRV 2ROT SP 2WAY ROT SP AMP 2ROT SP DUAL ROTSP 1 Parameter Value Description EQ Low Freq 32 2 0k Hz Determines the central requency of the low requency range that is boosted or cut EQ Low Gain 12 12 dB Determines the amount over which the low frequency range is boosted or cut EQ Middle 100 16k Hz Determines the central Freq frequency of the middle requency range that is boosted or cut EQ Middle 12 12 dB Determines the amount over Gain which the middle frequency range is boosted or cut EQ Hi Freg 500 16k Hz Deter
145. L only 8 UK only 9 External Mode only 0 CONTROL 0 15 11 UK LK PEDAL CONTROL 0 15 XG 0 127 Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO O Yes X No DDK 7 Owner s Manual 261 xipuaddy Date 6 Apr 2006 YAMAHA XG mode Model DDK 7 Version 1 00 Function Transmitted 1 Recognized Remarks Basic Default 1 2 3 16 1 Channel Changed 1 16 1 Mode Default Mode3 Mode 3 Messages X x Altered KKK K kk kkk kk kkk kkk kkk kkk x Note 36 96 0 127 Number True Voice KAKI KI KIKI KIKI KK AA Velocity Note on O 9nH v 1 127 O 9nH v 1 127 Note off X 9nH v 0 X 9nH v 0 or 8nH After Key s X O Touch Ch s O O Pitch Bend O O 0 32 X O Bank Select 1 5 7 10 X O 40 x 2nd Expression 6 38 X O Data Entry 1110 O Expression Control 16 X x VA After Touch Change 64 O O Sustain 65 67 X O 71 78 X O Sound Controller 84 91 93 94 X O 96 97 X O Data Entry SW 98 99 100 101 X O NRPN RPN Program O0 15 O Change True number KKK KK KKK RARA RRR RK RR RIK System Exclusive O O System Gong Position X x Common Song Select x x Tune x x System Clock O X Real Time Commands O x Aux All Sound Off x O 120 Reset All Cntrls X O 121 Messages Local On Off x x All Notes Off x O 123 127 Active Sense O O Reset x x Notes 1 Same as that in the EL mode Mode 1 O
146. Loads the selected Registration bank to the panel keyboards After loading you can check the Registration by playing the keyboards O SAVE Saves the current panel settings as a Registration bank in the song The currently selected Registration in the Registration Data List will become the destination location O COPY Copies the currently selected Registration to the lowest blank location in the Registration Data List DELETE Deletes the currently selected Registration bank in the Registration Data List Exit from the Regist Edit display by pressing the CLOSE button at the top right of the display Recalling Recorded Registrations Registrations and bulk data recorded to song numbers can be easily loaded back to the DDK 7 by the following procedure The M D R independently records the following five types of data e REGIST USER VOICE e K B P e USER RHYTHM e SEQUENCE You can select and recall the desired data independently 1 Insert the appropriate media and select the song you want to load back to the DDK 7 For details on selecting a song see page 104 2 Press the REGIST EDIT button in the SONG SELECT Page to call up the Regist Edit display 3 Select the Registration you want to load to the DDK 7 MDR SONG SELECT TOS SONG 1 USB 01 SONG REG_001 REGIST EDIT oer EY data TO BE LOADED 1 REG 001 REGIST L eT 2 at SEQUENCE SAVE COPY mm
147. M BASS DRUM Bird Tweet Floor Tom L Floor Tom H Low Tom SFX 1 Mid Tom L Phone Call Mid Tom H Telephone Ring High Tom Wind Chime Kick Soft Door Squeak PERCUSSION Door Slam Conga H Open Scratch Cut Conga L ScratchH 3 Conga H Mute Laugh Bongo H Scream Bongo L Punch Cowbell Heart Beat Claves Foot Steps Cabasa SFX 2 Tambourine CarEngnignition Car Tires Squeal Pop Latin Kit DDK 7 Owner s Manual Car Passing CONGA Car Crash Conga H Tip Siren Conga H Heel Train Conga H Open Jet Plane Conga H Mute Starship Conga H SlapOpen Burst Conga H Slap Roller Coaster Conga H SlapMute Submarine Conga L Tip Machine Gun Conga L Heel Laser Gun Conga L Open Explosion Conga L Mute Firework Conga L SlapOpen Conga L Slap Conga L Slide PERCUSSION 2 BONGO Surdo Mute ARABIC 1 Bongo H Open 1 f Surdo Open Nakarazan Dom Bongo H Open 3 f Cuica Mute Nakarazan Edge Bongo H Rim Cuica Open Hager Dom Bongo H Tip Cabasa Hager Edge Bongo H Heel Shaker Zagrouda H Bongo H Slap Agogo H Zagrouda L Bongo L Open 1 f Agogo L Arabic Hand Clap Bongo L Open 3 f Samba Whistle H Duhulla Dom Bongo L Rim Samba Whistle L Duhulla Tak Bongo L Tip PERCUSSION 3 Duhulla Sak Bongo L Heel Tambourine Doff Dom Bongo L Slap Castanet Doff Tak PERCUSSION 1 Jingle Bells ARABIC 2 Timbale H Open Bell Tree atem Dom Timbale L Open Triangle Open atem Tak Paila H Triangle Mute atem Sak Paila L Wood Block H Tabla Dom
148. M2 Maximum Polyphony Voice Sections 128 notes Organ Rhythm Sections XG 128 notes Multi Timbral Capacity 16 Wave Voice Sections 177MB when converted to 16 bit linear format Organ Rhythm Sections XG 166MB when converted to 16 bit linear format Registration Memory 1 16 D Disable Basic Registration 1 16 Current Registration Registration Menu 288 Registrations Voice Preset Voice Preset 415 Voices 25 Drum Kits XG Only for playing 480 Voices 11 Drum Kits User Voice 16 Voice Sections UPPER 2 LEAD 2 LOWER 2 PEDAL 2 Voice Buttons SECTION SELECT VOLUME UP DOWN TO LOWER LEAD1 PEDAL1 2 SOLO LEAD2 Effects Reverb 29 Types x 2 Voice Rhythm Brilliance Sustain Insertion 1 2 x 183 Types x 8 Organ Flute Voice Organ Sections UPPER LOWER Type SINE VINTAGE Footage 16 5 1 3 8 4 2 2 3 2 1 3 5 11 3 1 Attack 4 2 2 3 2 LENGTH RESPONSE Mode FIRST EACH Organ Effect 15 Type Control U ORGAN FLUTES L ORGAN FLUTES ROTARY SP SPEED Rhythm Rhythm Preset 274 Pattern x 7 parts x 15 Sections User Rhythm 48 Pattern x 7 parts x 15 Sections Rhythm Buttons SECTION SELECT VOLUME UP DOWN Parts Main Drum Add Drum Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase1 Phrase 2 Rhythm Control INTRO 1 2 3 ENDING 1 2 3 MAIN A B C D FILL IN A B C D BREAK Tempo 40 240 Keyboard Percussion Preset 2 U
149. MAX 11 00 01 DC 1 00 7F Attack 2 00 MIN O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 11 00 01 OD 1 00 7F Attack Length 00 Short O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F Long 11 00 01 10 1 00 7F Organ Flutes On Off 00 OFF O 00 7F x 01 0N 11 00 01 11 1 00 7F Volume 00 MIN O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 11 00 01 12 1 00 7F Reverb Send Level 00 MIN O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 11 00 01 13 1 00 7F Type Sine Vintage 00 Sine O 00 7F O 00 01 01 Vintage 11 00 01 40 3 00 Effect Type MSB LSB 00 O 00 O 00 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 1st ParameterMSB 2nd ParameterLSB 11 00 01 41 2 0000 7F7F Effect Parameter MSB LSB O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 11 00 01 42 2 0000 7F7F Effect1 Parameter2 MSB LSB O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 11 00 01 43 2 0000 7F7F Effect1 Parameter3 MSB LSB O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 11 00 01 44 2 0000 7F7F Effect1 Parameter4 MSB LSB O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 11 00 01 45 2 0000 7F7F Effect Parameter5 MSB LSB O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 11 00 01 46 2 0000 7F7F Effect Parameter6 MSB LSB O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 11 00 01 47 2 0000 7F7F Effect Parameter7 MSB LSB O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 11 00 01 48 2 0000 7F7F Effect Parameter8 MSB LSB O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 11 00 01 49 2 0000 7F7F Effect Parameter9 MSB LSB O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 11 00 01 4A 2 0000 7F7F Effect1 Parameter10 MSB LSB O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 11 00 01 4B 2 0000 7F7F Effect Parameter11 O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 11 00 01 4C 2 0000 7F7F Effect1 Parameter12 O 0000 7F7F O 0000 7F7F 11 00 01 4D 2 0000 7F
150. MNI ON POLY Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY 262 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO O Yes X No a Troubleshooting GENERAL OPERATION The sound is not heard for about 10 seconds after turning the power on This is normal the DDK 7 takes a while to start up A cracking noise is sometimes heard Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or an electric power tool such as drill is used in the proximity of the DDK 7 If this occurs plug the DDK 7 into an electrical outlet located as far as possible from the device that seems to be the source of the problem Interference from radio TV or other sources occurs This is caused by the proximity of a high power broadcasting station an amateur ham radio setup or a mobile phone The sound of the DDK 7 causes surrounding objects to resonate Because the DDK 7 is capable of producing powerful bass sounds resonance may be caused in surrounding objects such as cabinets or glass windows To avoid this relocate the objects or lower the DDK 7 s volume In the LCD display there are some black points unlit or white points always lit Unfortunately this is a common characteristic of TFT LCDs The sound is too small even when the volume is set to its maximum e The Master Volume may be set around the minimum position Turn it clockwise e The Expression Pedal or Foot Pedal may not be
151. N MIN MIN ATO ATO VTO SOLO LOWER LOWER LOWER m E A CAUTION Turning the DDK 7 off erases all panel settings you have made If you wish to keep the panel settings you have made save them to a USB flash memory or other external media before turning the DDK 7 off page 92 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 29 Voices s90104 30 Reference Page Foot Pedal page 196 DDK 7 Owner s Manual About the Solo function The Lead Voice 2 section features an exclusive Solo function Solo lets you instantly switch to a solo Lead Voice in the middle of your performance muting all other Upper Keyboard Voices If you connect an optional Foot Pedal to the DDK 7 you can control the solo function without taking your hands from the keyboards 1 Select the Voice that you wish to play solo in the Lead Voice 2 section In this condition all the Voices for Upper Keyboard Upper Keyboard Voice 1 and 2 and Lead Voice 1 and 2 can be played Press the SOLO button in the Lead Voice 2 section This sets Solo to standby status 3 Press the UTILITY button to call up the Utility Display DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH Sii AN paisa ias A E UTILITY MDI j AUX OUT F PEDAL Version BIB vouch PANEL DN TRANSPOSE PITCH _ INITIALIZE LANGUAGE
152. OFF The lamp of the U ORGAN FLUTES or L ORGAN FLUTES button on the panel lights up when the Organ Flutes function is on The lamp turns off when the function is off I UPPER ORGAN FLUTES FOOTAGE ATTACK VOLUME EFFECT U ORGAN TYPE MA SINE mm O e 5 us 223 2 1 3 5 11 3 il Select the wave type for the Organ Flute Voice Selecting SINE button produces a clean clear sound and selecting VINTAGE produces a gritty slightly distorted sound DDK 7 Owner s Manual 37 sam 4 UE 38 Reference Page Reverb page 46 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 4 Adjust flute footage settings over a range of 0 8 The Flute footage levers can be adjusted by directly touching the display The Data Control dial cannot be used Play the keyboard and listen to the changes in the sound as you adjust the footage levels 5 Press the ATTACK VOLUME button in the upper right on the display to adjust the volume and attack settings ATTACK VOLUME Page ATTACK Determines the level of each volume in the percussive portion of the Voice Footage settings are 4 2 2 3 and 2 The LENGTH lever determines the duration of the attack sound RESP Response Determines the overall speed of the keyboard response Moving the lever downward makes the keyboard response slower creating a pipe organ effect MODE Determines which notes in a held group of notes are given an attack sound
153. OFT DELAY LR Synth Decay 2 8 ST2BANDEQ ENS DETUNE 2 Pop Lead 1 8 ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY Synth Decay 3 8 AMBIENCE REVERS GATE Pop Lead 2 8 XG HM ENHNCE TEMPO CROSS Synth Decay 4 8 HM ENHANCER AMP SIM Pop Lead 3 8 CMP OD TDLY ENS DETUNE ORGAN Pop Lead 4 8 PITCH CHANGE TEMPO DELAY 1 Pipe Organ 1 8 AMBIENCE THRU Pop Lead 5 8 DELAY LR THRU Pipe Organ 2 8 THRU THRU Pop Lead 6 H XG HM ENHNCE ECHO Pipe Organ 3 8 THRU THRU Pop Lead 7 16 8 DELAY LCR THRU Pipe Organ 4 8 THRU THRU 3 Synth Cla 1 8 ST 2BAND EQ TEMPO DELAY Pipe Organ 5 8 THRU THRU Synth Cla 2 8 ENS DETUNE DELAY LR Harmonica 1 8 THRU THRU Synth Cla 3 8 XG 3BANDEQ DELAY LR Harmonica 2 8 ST3BANDEQ THRU Synth Cla 4 8 DELAY LR ENS DETUNE Harmonica 3 8 DELAY LR THRU Synth Cla 5 8 ENS DETUNE XG DLY LCR Synth Cla 6 8 XG FLANGER 3 DELAY LR Synth Sax 8 ST2BANDEQ DELAY LR Synth Trumpet 8 ST2BANDEQ DELAY LR Synth Violin 8 ST2BANDEQ DELAY LCR 34 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Voices Category Preset Preset Pr
154. ON page 60 USB TO DEVICE terminal page 224 SUSTAIN button age 49 wee REVERB button page 46 m 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 M Memory button Registration memory page 89 page 89 8 DDK 7 Owner s Manual POWER switch page 12 MASTER VOLUME dial page 12 D 12 10 D Disable button page 91 9 DDK 7 Owner s Manual LCD Display Display Select i i iy a 2 i i a a E VOICE DISPLAY EB Se 70 REGISTRATION OFF HHop Light OFF S TEMPO BAR BEAT Pag A 120 STOP K F DISPLAY SELECT U ORGAN L ORGAN ROTARY SP VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB FLUTES FLUTES SPEED o o COOC ACC CI CJ a o O O O o O 0 LCD display touch panel page 13 PROGRAM button page 138 O DATA CONTROL dial page 15
155. Piccolo A THRU THRU 1 Choir 1 H THRU THRU Recorder 1 A THRU THRU Choir 2 H THRU THRU Recorder 2 A THRU THRU Choir 3 H THRU THRU Ocarina A THRU THRU Choir 4 H THRU THRU Whistle 4 ST2BAND EQ AMBIENCE Choir 5 H THRU THRU 2 Clarinet 1 H THRU THRU Choir 6 H THRU THRU Clarinet 2 H THRU THRU Choir 7 H THRU THRU Clarinet 3 H THRU THRU Choir 8 H THRU THRU Clarinet 4 H THRU THRU Choir 9 H THRU THRU Bass Clarinet 16 8 THRU THRU 2 Vocal H XG HM ENHNCE THRU 3 Oboe 1 8 THRU THRU PAD Oboe 2 8 THRU THRU 1 Smooth Pad 1 H THRU THRU Oboe 3 H THRU THRU Smooth Pad 2 A THRU THRU Oboe 4 H THRU THRU Smooth Pad 3 H THRU THRU Oboe 5 8 HM ENHANCER RU Smooth Pad 4 8 DELAY LR THRU English Horn 1 H THRU THRU Smooth Pad 5 8 DELAY LR THRU English Horn 2 H THRU THRU Smooth Pad 6 H THRU THRU Bassoon 1 16 8 THRU THRU Smooth Pad 7 A XGCHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY Bassoon 2 16 8 THRU THRU Smooth Pad 8 8 XGCHORUS1 XG HM ENHNCE Bassoon 3 16 8 THRU THRU 2 Resonance Pad 1 8 ENS DETUNE TEMPO CROSS 4 Alto Sax 1 16 8 HM ENHANCER THRU Resonance Pad 2 8 XG FLANGER 3 CROSS DELAY Alto Sax 2 16 8 THRU THRU Resonance Pad 3 H JENS DETUNE CROSS DELAY Tenor Sax 1 16 8 THRU THRU Resonance Pad 4 4 CELESTE 2 DELAY LR Tenor Sax 2 16 8 THRU THRU Resonance Pad 5 8 SYMPHONIC DELAY LR Tenor Sax 3 16 8 THRU THRU Resonance Pad 6 8 XG PCH CHG 1 CROSS DELAY Soprano Sax 1 e THRU THRU Resonance Pad 7 8 DELAY LR PHASER 1 Sopra
156. Press one of the ACCENT buttons you wish to set ppp is softer and fff is louder REST is no sound The instrument is automatically inserted at the Accent level to the selected position in the pattern Selection of an Accent level automatically advances the rhythm clock by one step according to the current Quantize resolution value QUANTIZE d gt controls Each press of the buttons advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step The size of a single step is determined by the Quantize value Repeat steps 4 through 7 above to layer each instrument and complete your own rhythm 8 Editing Entered Percussion Notes You can change the accent level position or gate time of the entered sound or delete the entered sound To change the accent level of an entered note 1 Select the desired note for changing the accent level PATTERN SETTING INPUT D sire SAVE FILE a RH Een PART Symphony kit C1 Gran Cassa Mute R Bee ty QUANTIZE SS HO na le i e 6 01553 ah T El ee O NEXT INSTRUMENT Selects the entered instruments one by one from left key to right Ek Ow e 14 NOTE d gt controls Selects the previous next position s note of the currently selected instrument In the above notes for example you can select notes 4 O and Y one by one Rests 2 and are ignored QUANTIZE d g
157. Q Dance 1 Hand Cymbal Scratch L Dance Perc 1 BrushKit O O Hand Cymbal 2 Seq Click L Reverse Dance 1 CYMBAL Splash Cymbal Seq Click H Crash Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal S Splash Cymbal Hand Cymbal 2 S Crash Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup DanceKit Crash Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Hi Hat Open CYMBAL Splash Cymbal Ride Cymbal 2 Hi Hat Closed Crash Analog Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Hi Hat Pedal Crash Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Hi Hat Open SNARE DRUM Splash Cymbal Ride Cymbal 2 Hi Hat Closed Band Snare Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Hi Hat Pedal Band Snare 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Hi Hat Open SNARE DRUM Snare Soft Ride Analog Hi Hat Closed Brush Slap 3 Snare Roll Ride Cymbal Cup Hi Hat Pedal Brush Tap 2 Side Stick Hi Hat Open 3 SNARE DRUM Brush Slap 2 Open Rim Shot Hi Hat Closed 3 Snare Jazz L Snare Roll Brush Tap Hat Close Anlg 3 Snare Jazz M Side Stick Light Brush Slap SNARE DRUM Snare Jazz H Open Rim Shot Brush Swirl Snare Clap Snare Roll Brush Tap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Dry Side Stick Light Brush Slap TOM Snare Techno Open Rim Shot Brush Swirl Floor Tom L Reverse Dance 2 Brush Tap Brush Tap Swirl Floor Tom H Side Stick Anlg Brush Slap TOM Low Tom Rim Gate Brush Swirl Tom Brush 1 Mid Tom L Snare Analog 3 Brush Tap
158. R 3 GM FLANGER V_FLANGER TEMP FLANGER DYNA FLANGER Parameter Value Description LFO Freq 0 00 39 7 Hz Determines the frequency of oscillation or the speed of the wavering effect LFO Depth 0 127 Determines the depth of oscillation or the amount of the wavering effect FEEDBACK 63 63 Determines the amount of LEVEL output sound with the flanging effect that is returned to the input The larger the value the more complex and pronounced the flanging effect becomes LFO Wave Triangle Sine Determines the waveform Random triangular wave sine wave or random DDK 7 Owner s Manual 53 Voice Controls and Effects Ste PUB SJOJJUO 3210A Parameter Value Description Sensitivity 0 127 Determines the sensitivity The higher the value the greater the change Threshold 0 127 Determines the input level at which effect begins to be applied Dry Wet D63 gt W D lt W63 Determines the original sound and the effect sound PHASER Similar to Flanger this produces rolling timbre changes and a pronounced up down filter sweep effect Effect Type PHASER 1 PHASER 2 EP PHASER 1 EP PHASER 2 EP PHASER 3 TEMPO PHASER DYNA PHASER Parameter Value Description LFO Freq 0 00 39 7 Hz Determines the frequency of oscillation or the speed of the wavering effect LFO Depth 0 127 Determines the depth of oscill
159. Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 60 Rotary Speaker Speed O 00 01 O 00 01 00 OFF 01 ON ROTARY SP SPEED Rhythm Sequence cc Switch dd Remarks Code Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 61 Sequence 1 SEQ 1 O 00 01 O 00 01 00 OFF 01 ON 62 Sequence 2 SEQ 2 O 00 01 O 00 01 00 OFF 01 ON 63 Sequence 3 SEQ 3 O 00 01 O 00 01 00 OFF 01 ON 64 Sequence 4 SEQ 4 O 00 01 O 00 01 00 OFF 01 ON DDK 7 Owner s Manual 253 Appendix xipuaddy 3 MIDI Parameter Voice Section Parameters Panel Voice Parameters MIDI Exclusive Format Address mm 0 7 UK1 UK2 LK1 LK2 LEAD 1 LEAD 2 PEDAL 1 PEDAL 2 FO 43 70 78 44 hh mm Il F7 Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm Il 10 00 07 00 0D 5 00 7F Voice Assign Number 00 7F O 00 7F O 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 7F 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 07 10 1 00 0D Voice Selector Number 00 0D O 00 0D O 00 0D 10 00 07 11 1 00 7F Volume 00 MIN O 00 7F x 7F MAX 10 00 07 12 1 00 7F Reverb Send Level 00 MIN O 00 7F O 00 7F 7F MAX 10 00 07 13 1 00 7F Brilliance 00 BRILLIANT O 00 7F x 40 CENTER 7F MELLOW 10 00 07 14 1 00 04 Feet 00 PRESET O 00 7F O 00 04 01 16 02 8 03 4 04 2 10 00 07 15 1 00 7F Pan 00 LEFT O 00 7F O 08 78 40 CENTER 7F RIGHT 10 00 07 16 1 00 7
160. SOUND mang BEER Press the E PEDAL button at the top right of the display to call up the FOOT PEDAL Page ME FOOT PEDAL OO o EX MI y AUX UT EPEDAL FOOT PEDALI FOOT PEDAL mm E mmm Dem 3 susam SLIDE susram SLIDE uc J soto J ur H SoLo J RHYTHM CONTROL J GLIDE RHYTHM CONTROL GLIDE ROTARY SPEAKER J REGIST SHIFT ROTARY SPEAKER REGIST SHIFT O zm 4 Press the SOLO button in the display Select the SOLO button in the left side of the display if you are using the 1 VOLUME of the FOOT PEDAL jacks or select in the right side if you are using 2 SUSTAIN O FOOT PEDAL GLOBAL EXP j MOI j AUX OUT PEDAL FOOT PEDAL POLARITY SUSTAIN am FOOT PEDALI mun E SUSTAIN MOL ED Kar JU mn RHYTHM CONTROL SLIDE ROTARY SPEAKER REGIST SHIFT ROTARY SPEAKER REGIST SHIFT J J vum mam GLIDE J RESSION OFF EXPRESSION Wl e paaa The Solo function is assigned to the Foot Pedal and the polarity is selected automatically In this condition Solo on all Voices set to the Upper Keyboard except for Lead Voice 2 are playable on the Upper Keyboard 5 To temporarily turn Solo on as you play press the Foot Pedal and hold down In this condition only the Lead Voice 2 is playable on the Upper Keyboard All other voices are muted Each time you press t
161. ST2BANDEQ ENS DETUNE Dance Bass 6 16 ST2BANDEQ ENS DETUNE Dance Bass 7 16 THRU THRU Dance Bass 8 16 HM ENHANCER FLANGER 1 36 DDK 7 Owner s Manual LIA WAN nx y H LAY Ki 1 H V Cen ULI PERA VA NAVA VAIN LI WWW VA NEA VV VS TTA u rt H gd lee LUN OWN Vii ju amp AN A A 1 WWA NA Y ke PA PARA NANA OLLA PA OPA TANAN NAVAL IMA MAN ASA ee Ty AAA AAA V ka 111442 171 AN NU NN 4 1 1 bo The DDK 7 has an Organ Flutes feature that allows you to create your own organ Voices giving you access to an unlimited combination of organ sounds With this function you can recreate all of the classic organ sounds by adjusting the flute footage levels and the percussive sounds just like on conventional organs There are nine flute footage settings with three additional footage settings for the attack sound wn bi 1 Press one of the Organ Flutes buttons UPPER or LOWER 2 bi E The Flute Footage Levers appear on the display 5 O FOOTAGE Page 2 UPPER ORGAN FLUTES FOOTAGE ATTACK VOLUME EFFECT U ORGAN TYPE OFF SINE U ORGAN L ORGAN ROTARY SP FLUTES FLUTES SPEED d d ue 513 4 2213 2 13 5 11 3 ik Press the ON OFF button in the display to turn the Organ Flutes function on by selecting ON To turn off the Organ Flutes function press the same button a second time to select
162. Select the repeat mode zl MDR SONG SELECT me sone 1 mi USB 01 SONG REG_001 Music Data Recorder MDR O ALL Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder in order O SINGLE Repeats the currently selected song again and again RANDOM Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder randomly O OFF Cancels repeat playback DDK 7 Owner s Manual 125 HAM JepJooay Lq ASNN El Reference Page Converting to XG page 132 126 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 5 Exit from the Repeat Setting display by pressing the CLOSE button at the top right of the display 6 Press the gt Play button in the SONG SELECT Page to begin playback When you stop playback the repeat setting is automatically cancelled Playing Back XG Songs The DDK 7 allows you to playback XG song data created on the computer or converted from DDK 7 song format to XG format The fast forward rewind and pause controls are available just as with songs performances recorded on the DDK 7 Insert the media containing XG song data into the USB TO DEVICE terminal Select the media that contains the desired XG song in the SONG SELECT Page For details on selecting media see page 107 MDR SONG SELECT TOOLS SONG 1 USB 01 SONG REG_001 FOLDER SELECT oe USB 01 Sa Press the XG button in the SONG SELECT Page to call up the KG songs in the display
163. Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap 17 Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H 18 Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L 19 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap 20 Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise 21 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click 22 Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell 23 Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L 24 Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H 25 Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap 26 Brush Swirl O Brush Swirl O Brush Swirl O Brush Swirl O Brush Swirl O Brush Swirl O 27 Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap 28 Brush Tap Swirl O Brush Tap Swirl O Brush Tap Swirl O Brush Tap Swirl O Brush Tap Swirl O Reverse Cymbal O 29 Snare Roll O Snare Roll O Snare Roll O Snare Roll O Snare Roll O Snare Roll O 30 Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet HiQ2 31 Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Electro Snare Soft Snare Noisy Snare Snap Elec 32 Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks 33 Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Tight L Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick 3 34 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot H Snare Pitched Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 35 Kick Tight Kick Tight Kick Wet Kick Tight Kick 2 Kick Gate 36 Kick
164. Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare 39 Hand Clap Dance Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap String Slap 40 Snare Analog 2 Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 41 Tom Analog 1 om Dance 1 Floor Tom L Tom Brush 1 Floor Tom L 42 Hat Close Analog Hi Hat Closed 3 Hi Hat Closed Hi Hat Closed Hi Hat Closed 43 Tom Analog 2 om Dance 2 Floor Tom H Tom Brush 2 Floor Tom H 44 Hat Close Anlg 2 Hat Close Anlg 3 Hi Hat Pedal Hi Hat Pedal Hi Hat Pedal 45 Tom Analog 3 om Dance 3 Low Tom Tom Brush 3 Low Tom 46 Hat Open Analog Hi Hat Open 3 Hi Hat Open Hi Hat Open Hi Hat Open 47 Tom Analog 4 om Dance 4 Mid Tom L Tom Brush 4 Mid Tom L 48 Tom Analog 5 om Dance 5 Mid Tom H Tom Brush 5 Mid Tom H 49 Crash Analog Crash Analog Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal 50 Tom Analog 6 om Dance 6 High Tom Tom Brush 6 High Tom 51 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal S 52 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click O 53 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup 54 Tambourine ambourine Anlg Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine 55 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal 56 Cowbell Analog Cowbell Dance Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell 57 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 58 Vibraslap Vibraslap Analog Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap 59 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Analog Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal
165. THRU Harpsichord 2 8 THRU THRU Marimba 2 8 TH THRU Clavichord H AMBIENCE RU Xylophone 4 TH THRU Glockenspiel 1 4 TH THRU Glockenspiel 2 4 TH THRU DDK 7 Owner s Manual SOdlo Category Preset Preset Preset Category Preset Preset Preset Voice Name Feet Effect 1 Effect 2 Voice Name Feet Effect 1 Effect 2 2 Celesta 1 A JHMENHANCER THRU 3 Smooth Bass 1 16 ST2BAND E PITCH CHANGE Celesta 2 A HM ENHANCER THRU Smooth Bass 2 16 THRU THRU Music Box 1 A THRU THRU Smooth Bass 3 16 ST2BAND E FLANGER 1 Music Box 2 4 JHMENHANCER STAGE 2 Smooth Bass 4 16 IST 2BAND E PITCH CHANGE Chime 1 A AMBIENCE THRU Smooth Bass 5 16 ST2BANDE ENS DETUNE Chime 2 8 AMBIENCE HALL L Smooth Bass 6 16 THRU THRU Chime 3 H ST2BANDEQ PLATE 2 Smooth Bass 7 16 ST2BANDE PITCH CHANGE TIMPANI WORLD 1 Timpani 1 8 ST2BANDEQ JERI 1 Pan Flute 1 H THRU THRU Timpani 2 H ST2BANDEQ ER2 Pan Flute 2 H THRU THRU Timpani Roll 1 8 ST2BANDEQ JER1 Bagpipe H THRU THRU Timpani Roll 2 8 ST2BANDEQ ER2 Dulcimer H THR
166. Triangle Mute A4 Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open EA Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker B4 Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells C5 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree E D5 E E5 F5 176 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting pjeoqgAay Jamo7 pseoghay Jaddr C 1 D 1 E 1 FA G1 Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit Multi Kit 1 Surdo Mute ick Dance 1 Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Scratc Surdo Open Kick Dance 2 Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Concert BD Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Noise Percussion Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Bass Drum March Scratch H Scratch Dance 1 Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Analog BD Short Scratch L Scratch Dance 2 Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Synth Tom 3 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Analog BD Long Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Synth Tom 2 Metronome Click Dance Perc 1 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Synth Bass Drum Metronome Bell Reverse Dance 1 Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Synth Tom 1
167. U THRU Timpani Roll 3 H ST2BANDEQ_ ER1 Shakuhachi H THRU THRU ELECTRIC BASS Yokobue A THRU THRU 1 Fingered Bass 1 16 THRU THRU Shamisen 8 THRU THRU Fingered Bass 2 8 THRU THRU Koto H THRU THRU Fingered Bass 3 16 THRU THRU Taishokoto A THRU THRU Fingered Bass 4 16 THRU THRU 2 Erhu 1 8 HM ENHANCER THRU Fingered Bass 5 16 THRU THRU Erhu 2 H THRU THRU Slap Bass 1 16 THRU RU Sheng H THRU THRU Slap Bass 2 16 THRU RU Zheng H THRU THRU Slap Bass 3 16 ST2BANDEQ XG PCH CHG 1 Pipa H THRU THRU Slap Bass 4 16 BAND COMP RU Nay H THRU THRU 2 Picked Bass 1 16 THRU THRU Surnay H THRU THRU Picked Bass 2 16 ST 2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE Oud H THRU THRU Picked Bass 3 16 THRU THRU Sitar H THRU THRU Picked Bass 4 16 THRU THRU Kamanche H THRU THRU Fretless Bass 1 16 THRU THRU 3 Steel Drum 8 THRU THRU Fretless Bass 2 16 ST2BANDEQ PITCH CHANGE Log Drum H THRU THRU SYNTH BASS Kalimba H THRU THRU 1 Funk Bass 1 16 THRU THRU Funk Bass 2 16 THRU THRU Funk Bass 3 16 THRU THRU Funk Bass 4 16 JENSDETUNE THRU Funk Bass 5 16 ST2BANDEQ XG FLANGER 1 Funk Bass 6 16 ST2BANDEQ JENS DETUNE Funk Bass 7 16 ST2BANDEQ XG HM ENHNCE Funk Bass 8 16 THRU THRU Funk Bass 9 16 ST2BANDEQ ENS DETUNE Funk Bass 10 16 ST2BAND EQ PITCH CHANGE 2 Dance Bass 1 16 THRU THRU Dance Bass 2 16 THRU THRU Dance Bass 3 16 THRU THRU Dance Bass 4 16 ST 2BANDEQ HM ENHANCER Dance Bass 5 16
168. UX OUT 00 MAIN O 00 04 7F O 00 Address Il 00 07 UK1 UK2 01 SUB1 01 01 LK1 LK2 Lead1 Lead2 02 SUB2 02 02 PEDAL1 PEDAL2 03 SUB1 amp 2 03 03 08 Upper Organ Flutes 09 Lower Organ Flutes OA Main Drum OB Add Drum OC Accompaniment 11 KBP 12 MIC 13 XG Foot Pedal Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range hh mm H 14 05 00 1 00 09 Foot Pedal 1 Assign 00 OFF O 00 0A 7F O 00 01 Expression 01 01 02 Sustain 02 02 03 Slide 03 03 04 MOC 04 04 05 Solo 05 05 06 Rhythm Control 06 06 07 Glide 07 07 08 Rotary Speaker 08 08 09 Regist Shift 09 09 14 05 01 1 00 01 Foot Pedal 1 Porality 00 O 00 O 00 01 4 01 01 14 05 02 1 00 7F Foot Pedal 1 Data ON OFF O 00 7F O 00 7F 14 05 10 1 00 09 Foot Pedal 2 Assign 00 OFF O 00 0A 7F O 00 01 Expression 01 01 02 Sustain 02 02 03 Slide 03 03 04 MOC 04 04 05 Solo 05 05 06 Rhythm Control 06 06 07 Glide 07 07 08 Rotary Speaker 08 08 09 Regist Shift 09 09 14 05 11 1 00 01 Foot Pedal 2 Porality 00 O 00 O 00 01 4 01 01 14 05 12 1 00 7F Foot Pedal 2 Data ON OFF O 00 7F O 00 7F 4 MDR nn Command Receive Transmit 01H Play Start O x 02H Play Stop O x 03H Record Start O x 04H Record Stop O x 05H Fast Forward Start O x 06H Fast Forward Stop O x 09H Rhythm Pointer Reset O x 260 DDK 7 Owner s Manual MIDI implementation Chart YAMAHA DDK Model DDK 7 JE aaa Appendix Version 1 00
169. XG CarCrash 64 0 85 XG Siren 64 0 86 XG Train 64 0 87 XG JetPlane 64 0 88 XG Starship 64 0 89 XG Burst 64 0 90 XG RollrCoaster 64 0 91 XG Submarine 64 0 97 KG Laugh 64 0 98 XG Scream 64 0 99 XG Punch 64 O 100 XG Heartbeat 64 O 101 XG FootSteps 64 O 113 XG MachineGun 64 O 114 XG LaserGun 64 O 115 XG Explosion 64 O 116 XG Firework 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1 DRUM 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2 Refer to 127 0 5 HitKit Drum Kit Map 127 0 9 Room Kit 127 0 17 Rock Kit 127 O 25 Electro Kit 127 0 26 Analog Kit 127 0 28 Dance Kit 127 0 33 Jazz Kit 127 O 41 Brush Kit 127 0 49 Symphony Kit 126 O 1 SFX Kit 1 126 O 2 SFX Kit 2 244 DDK 7 Owner s Manual EN XG Drum Map MSB LSB PC Standard Kit 1 Key Standard Kit2 Key Hit Kit Key Room Kit Key Rock Kit Key Electro Kit Key Note 127 0 1 Off 127 0 2 Off 127 0 5 Off 127 0 9 Off 127 0 17 Off 127 0 25 Off 12 13 Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute 14 Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open 15 Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q 16 Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip
170. Y AUTO WAH TC WAH ODRV XG ODRV DLY ODRV T DLY XG AUTO WAH XG TC WAH 0D CMP DIST DLY CMP DST TDLY TOUCH WAH 1 CLAVI TC WAH CMP ODRV DLY CMP OD TDLY TOUCH WAH 2 EP TOUCH WAH XG CMP DT DL V_DST H TDLY AT WAH DIST WAH DST TDLY XG CMP 0D DL V_DST S TDLY XG AT WH DST WAH OD T DLY AT WAH ODRV WAH DIST DLY XG AT WAH 0D XG WH DST DL 7 ger 5 mem TC WAH DIST WAH ODRV DLY arameter alue escription E XG TC WH DST XG WH OD DLY Dist Drive 0 127 Determines the depth of distortion The higher the value the greater the amount of distortion Parameter Value Description Dist Out Level 0 127 Determines the output level LFO Freq 0 00 39 7 Hz Determines the speed of the of the distorted sound Wah effect L DelayTime 0 1 1486 0 msec Determines the time that LFO Depth 0 127 Determines the depth of the elapses between the original Wah effect sound and the delayed Cutoff 0 127 Determines the central repeat in the left channel frequency that the wah filter R DelayTime 0 1 1486 0 msec Determines the time that acts upon elapses between the original Resonance 1 0 12 0 Determines the frequency sound and the delayed bandwidth around the repeat in the right channel central frequency set in Delay 63 63 Determines the amount of Cutoff above that the wah Feedback delayed repeats in the filter affects sound Drive 0 127 Higher values result in a more Comp 48 6db Determines the input level at distorted sound Threshold which compression begi
171. ached the function wraps around to select the first preset again The numbered buttons light up as they are selected JUMP Pressing the Right Footswitch or with an optional Foot Pedal jumps to select the designated panel Registration You can set the Jump destination with a 1 w 1 buttons in the display or the Data Control dial E FOOTSMTCH REGIST SHIFT _LEFT_ RIGHT MODE OFF J SHIFT we USER J JUMP REGIST aj E sl Registration number of the destination O USER In the User mode each press of the Right Footswitch or with an optional Foot Pedal selects Registrations according to the order you ve specified To set the User Registration order 1 Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory section 2 Press the SET button in the display The Registration number appears in the display indicating that the Registration is entered DDK 7 Owner s Manual 95 REGISTRATION MEMORY AYOWAW NOILVYLSIDSY 96 IT wore When the cursor is positioned at Footswitch or an optional Foot Pedal does not work DDK 7 Owner s Manual Registration row 3 Repeat the above procedure 1 through 2 to set the Registration order E FOOTSMTCH REGIST SHIFT _LEFT_ RIGHT MODE No REGIST TOP SHIFT END O KAT POSITION DATA O la d gt bb l sr INSERT DELETE ce 2 POSITION These are cursor controls used to m
172. ae gem E AL K aL When you want to set Rotary Speaker for the Organ Flute Voice select the effect type in the EFFECT Page See page 39 for details lt 9 o fo Q o 3 E o n D a m E D Q n Select an effect type other than OFF ITO UPPER ORGAN FLUTES FOOTAGE ATTACK VOLINE EFFECT EFFECT TYPE XG ROTARY SP PARAMETER SA EA A E KAN aL 50 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 2 Adjust the rotating speed and mode of the Rotary Speaker Press the ROTARY SP SPEED button on the panel The ROTARY SPEAKER display appears The settings in this display are common to all Voice sections ROTARY SPEAKER Display E ROTARY SPEAKER SPEED CONTROL U ORGAN L ORGAN ROTARY SP FLUTES FLUTES SPEED TOR _ SPEED Determines the speed of the speaker rotation Range 2 69Hz 39 7Hz O MODE Determines the slow stop mode when ROTARY SP SPEED button is off If SLOW is selected a slow chorus effect is applied when you turn off the button on the panel If STOP is selected the Rotary Speaker effect turns off when you turn off the button on the panel Once the Rotary Speaker effect has been turned on and set you can control the effect in real time from the panel 3 Control the Rotary Speaker effect from the panel You can control Rotary Speaker on off from the panel An optional Foot Pedal or the Footswitch on the Pedal Unit can also be u
173. ain an Auto Bass part This means that even SEO e Ed though the Auto Bass Chord is turned on the bass 6 8 Slow Rock 1 Club Latin manang alina 6 8 Slow Rock 2 Latin Disco 1 Guitar Serenade in the WALTZ category 3 6 8 Orchestra 1 Latin Disco 2 e Folk Rock 1 in the POPS category Ha SE e Unplugged 1 ui the POPS category SE Se e Pop Flamenco in WORLD MUSIC category ROCK Pop Beat 1 e New Country in the ROCK category Power Rock Pop Beat 2 Southern Rock Funky Dance 60 s Rock 1 Disco Philly 1 60 s Rock 2 Disco Philly 2 Hard Rock 1 70 s Disco 1 4 Hard Rock 2 70 s Disco 2 Rock Shuffle 1 Disco Funk Rock Shuffle 2 Disco Chocolate Tears Rock 1 Dance Pop Tears Rock 2 Soft Rock British Rock Country Rock 1 Country Rock 2 New Country Cowboy Rock Rock amp Roll 1 2 Rock amp Roll 2 Skiffle Caribbean Rock R amp R Shuffle Jive Boogie Woogie DDK 7 Owner s Manual 69 Rhythm Keyboard Percussion uoIssnojag p3gogAsy Wy AyH 70 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 3 Accompaniment The Accompaniment function provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental embellishments when rhythms are used Accompaniment controls are selected from the Rhythm Menu and Rhythm Condition display 1 Select the desired rhythm name in the display RHYTHM SHINGBJAZZ Big Band 1 Il 4 Big Band 2 Big Band 3 Big Band 4 Big Band 5 Band 6 Big Band 7 Big Band Bop Orch Big Band Orchestra Swing Movie Panther Jungle Drum MAIN ADD PR
174. alizing Registration Memory Deleting all Registration data in Registration Memory initializes the Registration El Reference Page In order to avoid inadvertently losing your important data save it to an external storage Factory Set Initializing the DDK 7 page 23 Memory Be careful when using this operation since it erases all your existing data device 1 Press the UTILITY button on the panel to call up the GLOBAL Page in the Utility display DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH O ODO CJC SI Se y UTILITY E E E Version We TRANSPOSE PITCH INITIALIZE Na IAE win n BUTTER Press the INITIALIZE EXECUTE button on the right side in the display The message Are you sure you want to initialize Registration data appears Press INITIALIZE to actually initialize the data When the operation is complete the DDK 7 will be restarted Press CANCEL to cancel the operation REGISTRATION MEMORY DDK 7 Owner s Manual 93 AYOWAW NOILVYLSIDSY 94 El Reference Page Footswitches page 193 Foot Pedal page 196 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 5 Registration Shift The Registration Shift function allows you to change Registrations without taking your hands from the keyboards By using the Right Footswitch on the expression pedal
175. ance 1 Floor Tom L om Brush 1 Floor Tom L SD Accent 1 Hat Close Analog Hi Hat Closed 3 Hi Hat Closed Hi Hat Closed Hi Hat Closed Tom Brush Shot 1 Tom Analog 2 Tom Dance 2 Floor Tom H om Brush 2 Floor Tom H SD Reverb 2 Hat Close Anlg 2 Hat Close Anlg 3 Hi Hat Pedal Hi Hat Pedal Hi Hat Pedal Snare Drum Rim 2 Tom Analog 3 Tom Dance 3 Low Tom om Brush 3 Low Tom SD Reverb 1 Hat Open Analog Hi Hat Open 3 Hi Hat Open Hi Hat Open Hi Hat Open Snare Drum Rim 1 Tom Analog 4 Tom Dance 4 Mid Tom L om Brush 4 Mid Tom L Synth Snare Drum Tom Analog 5 Tom Dance 5 Mid Tom H om Brush 5 Mid Tom H Analog SD Crash Analog Crash Analog Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal Triangle Mute Tom Analog 6 Tom Dance 6 High Tom om Brush 6 High Tom Tambourine Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal S Triangle Open Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Castanet Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Claves Tambourine Tambourine Anlg Tambourine ambourine Tambourine Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Cabasa Cowbell Analog Cowbell Dance Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 Finger Snap Vibraslap Vibraslap Analog Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Analog Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 S Hand Claps Bongo H Bongo Analog H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Crash Cymbal 2
176. ange is from 0 no sound to 24 full volume Depending on the volume value set by the slider two adjacent VOLUME lamps may be lit at the same time indicating an intermediate position DDK 7 Owner s Manual JI 65 M7 wi Rhythm Keyboard Percussion Adjusting the tempo You can adjust the rhythm tempo by pressing TEMPO Indicator the TEMPO buttons Pressing the right BAR BEAT button increases the tempo and pressing the left button decreases it Each rhythm has its original preset tempo Press the TEMPO buttons simultaneously to restore the tempo to the original setting Decreasing a Increasing v the tempo gt j the tempo TEMPO display shows the current tempo Displayed values are given in beats per minute The tempo range is 40 to 240 beats per minute Each rhythm has its original preset tempo Press PRESET TEMPO button in the display to restore the tempo to the original setting RHYTHM pops S Se Beat Light 1 Bam y Beat Light 1 met Light 2 Beat Lisht 3 Beat Licht 4 Fok Rock 1 Fak Rock Us Beat Asian Pos Unplugged 1 Unplugged 2 Unplugged 3 8Beat Adria D a bes 3 3 x 9 lt o o D o O Dm Q Le n O o 5 When the rhythm begins playing the TEMPO indicator changes function to a BAR BEAT indicator BAR BEAT Indicator Co BAR BEAT Bar measure Beat On the BAR BEAT indicator the number o
177. annot be converted to EL format 134 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Confirm that the desired song to be deleted is shown in the upper half of the display then press the EXECUTE If you want to change the song press the CHANGE button to call up the Song Select display and select the desired song After pressing the EXECUTE button a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation Select DELETE to delete the selected XG song or select CANCEL to abort the operation Converting to EL format You can convert songs created on the DDK 7 to EL series format and save them to a floppy disk The converted data can be used with EL series Electones such as the EL 900 This function is not available for protected songs To use the floppy disk you ll need to install the optional UD FDO1 floppy disk drive 1 Select the song to be converted to EL series format For details on selecting a song see page 104 O In the TOOLS Page press the CONVERT TO EL button to call up the Convert display WOR E sone 1 MDR SONG SELECT SONG SELECT TOOLS USB 01 SONG SONG 1 USB 01 S0NG REG_OO1 CONVERT TO EL EES REPEAT CHANGE REMAINING CHANGE FRON SETTING SONG NAME memory FORMAT mer FOLDER USB 01 SONG SONG SONG 1 XG SONG SONG XG SONG v COPY DELETE DELETE CHANGE TO ouer FOLDER USB 01 SONG SONG 22222772 EXECUTE CONVERT CONVERT CONVERT man TOEL FROMEL TO XG Conf
178. aracters For details on entering characters see page 113 DELETE Deletes the selected bookmark from the Bookmark list O MOVE Changes the order of the bookmarks 1 Select the bookmark you wish to move then press the MOVE button The left part of the display changes letting you select the new position for the bookmark 2 Select the intended position by pressing the desired position in the display or by using the UP DOWN buttons or Data Control dial 3 Move the bookmark to the selected position by pressing the EXECUTE button CLOSE This closes the Bookmark display and returns to the browser display Changing the Home Page You can specify any desired page on the site to be the home page In advance open the page you wish to set as your new home page 1 Press the SETTING button in the control menu to call up the Internet Setting display 2 Press the Browser button to call up the Browser Page SETTING Browser LAN Wireless Others j Encode Western European Hone pase YAMAHA Set this pase as Hone Resister Restore default Hone Initialize Show inazes off On Character entry keys Alphabetical ASCII Time zone Japan GHT 9 00 J EXECUTE CANCEL 3 Press the Register button of the Set this page as Home 4 To return to the browser press the EXECUTE button in the control menu A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation Select YES to retur
179. ard the appropriate chord will sound on the basis of the previously played chord Wu Dm mM DU Wu WU mt Wm Dt Wm Uu Wu an Dm Du Playing fingered chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your performance CUSTOM A B C The Custom A B C mode is a slight variation on the Fingered Chord mode It allows you to determine what bass notes will be played in the accompaniment by playing a note on the Pedalboard along with the chords you play in the Lower keyboard O MEMORY LOWER When this is set to on the Lower keyboard Voices and chord accompaniment keep playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard while the rhythm plays PEDAL When this is set to on the Pedalboard Voices and bass accompaniment keep playing even after you release your foot from the Pedalboard while the rhythm plays In the Single Finger and Fingered modes When this is set to on the bass accompaniment of the Pedalboard Voices keeps playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard When you start the rhythm with SYNCHRO START button set the Lower Pedal Memory to on When Memory is off releasing your fingers from Lower keyboard stops the rhythm EJ Melody On Chord M 0 C The Melody On Chord M O C feature automatically adds a harmony part to the melodies you play on the Upper keyboard The harmony is deri
180. arge The maximum limit for recording performance data is 1 MB An error message appears while entering a folder name or song name e The song folder name is too long The capacity is 50 letters e The song folder name may be an invalid name Refer to page 115 e The path name is too long The capacity of the path name is 234 letters Reduce the layer or shorten the song folder name to shorten the path The rhythm does not start at the beginning of a recording or stops in the middle of the performance The M D R is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very beginning of a recording If you wish to use the rhythm start it after the time indicator appears in the display The floppy disk cannot be formatted when you want to format an unformatted disk Recognizing an unformatted disk takes a few seconds after it is inserted Wait about 30 seconds then try to format again The notes of the recording are stuck and sound continuously During playback you may have removed the USB flash memory or floppy disk Whenever you wish to stop playback always press the ll Stop button before removing the media DDK 7 Owner s Manual 265 Appendix xipuaddy a Specifications KEYBOARD Keyboard Type UPPER 49 Keys C C Standard FS LOWER 61Keys C C Standard FS Touch Tone UPPER Initial Touch After Touch LOWER Initial Touch After Touch TONE GENERATION AW
181. at Hot Disco Dixieland Jazz Japanese Sound 3 70 s Crossover Alpine Polka A Bounce Pop A biza A Jungle Drum A Orchestra March A East Coast Brass Alpine Polka B Bounce Pop B biza B Jungle Drum B Orchestra March B Fat Analog Synth Alpine Polka C Bounce Pop C biza C Jungle Drum C Orchestra March Club Jazz Alpine Polka D Bounce Pop D biza D Jungle Drum D Orchestra March D Distor Guitar Dream Ballad A Blues Jam A Power House A Jazz Club A Pasodoble A Tricky Guitar Dream Ballad B Blues Jam B Power House B Jazz Club B Pasodoble B Wow Guitar Dream Ballad C Blues Jam C Power House C Jazz Club C Pasodoble C Flange Clavi Dream Ballad D Blues Jam D Power House D Jazz Club D Pasodoble D Pop Fusion Lead Pops Orchestra A Evergreen Waltz A Dance Latino A Afro Session A Tango A AOR Lead Pops Orchestra B Evergreen Waltz B Dance Latino B Afro Session B Tango B Sweet Fusion Pops Orchestra C Evergreen Waltz C Dance Latino C Afro Session C Tango C Retro Pop Pops Orchestra D Evergreen Waltz D Dance Latino D Afro Session D Tango D 4 Sweep Pad Kids On Stage A 6 Beat Pop A Twilight Disco A ChaCha Grandee A Show Time A Pop Ballad Kids On Stage B 6 Beat Pop B Twilight Disco B ChaCha Grandee B Show Time B Fat Pad Kids On Stage C 16 Beat Pop C Twilight Disco C ChaCha Grandee C Show Time C Deep Pad Kids On Stage D 16 Beat Pop D Twilight Disco D C
182. at from the second time will not sound L Feedback 63 63 Determines the feedback level in the left channel R Feedback 63 63 Determines the feedback level in the right channel Dry Wet D63 gt W D lt W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound ER KARAOKE Produces early reflections without the subseguent reverb or a deep echo effect like that used in Karaoke sing along applications Effect Type ER 1 ER 2 GATE REVERB REVERS GATE KARAOKE 1 KARAOKE 2 KARAOKE 3 Parameter Value Description Type S H L H Rdm Determines the early Rvs Plt Spr reflection type The response of the early reflections varies depending on the type Room Size 0 1 7 0 Determines the room size The higher the value the longer the ER Type Type A Type B Determines the reverse gate type DelayTime 0 1 400 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat Feedback 63 63 Determines the amount of Level delayed repeats in the sound When this is set to 0 the delayed repeat from the second time will not sound Dry Wet D63 gt W D lt W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and effect sound CHORUS Creates a warm effect as if several of the same sound were playing at once Makes the overall sound richer fatter and more ani
183. ation or the amount of the wavering effect Phase Shift 0 127 Determines the phase relationship between the processed signal and the original This changes the sound characteristics of the Phaser effect Feedback 63 63 Determines the amount of Level output sound with the phasing effect that is returned to the input The larger the value the more complex and pronounced the phasing effect becomes Sensitivity 0 127 Determines the sensitivity The higher the value the greater the change Threshold 0 127 Determines the input level at which effect begins to be applied Dry Wet D63 gt W D lt W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and the effect sound DDK 7 Owner s Manual TREMOLO AUTO PAN This periodically changes the volume and has the effect of moving the sound image both front and back and left and right Effect Type Effect Type TREMOLO 1 ORGAN TREMOLO TREMOLO 2 AUTO PAN XG TREMOLO XG AT PAN 1 EP TREMOLO XG AT PAN 2 GT TREMOLO 1 EP AUTO PAN GT TREMOLO 2 Parameter Value Description LFO Freq 0 00 39 7 Hz Determines the tremolo speed LFO Depth 0 127 Determines the depth of the Tremolo effect AM Depth 0 127 Determines the amount of volume change PM Depth 0 127 Determines the amount of pitch change in the sound Input Mode Mono Stereo Determines the input configuration
184. aveform Higher values make the speed faster Range 2 93 LFO PMD Pitch Modulation Depth Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the pitch of the sound Higher values result in a greater amount of pitch change For the minimum setting the pitch does not change Range 0 400 O LFO FMD Frequency Modulation Depth Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the filter cutoff frequency Higher values result in a greater amount of frequency change For the minimum setting the frequency does not change Range 0 4800 cent O LFO AMD Amplitude Modulation Depth Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the amplitude of the sound Higher values result in a greater amount of amplitude change For the minimum setting the amplitude does not change Range 0 128 When playing a User Voice you have created using the LFO parameters above set the Vibrato setting in the Voice Condition display to Preset not User If Vibrato is set to User and the Vibrato parameters depth and or speed are set fairly high you may not be able to hear the effect of the LFO LFO Low Freguency Oscillator As its name suggests the LFO creates waveforms of a low frequency These waveforms can be used to vary the pitch filter or amplitude to create effects such as vibrato wah and tremolo The following five waveforms are available saw tri squ ne rnd si
185. ay through a song by recalling all the parts in sequence Selecting a Sequence There are two ways to program a rhythm sequence copying an existing sequence that is similar to the sequence you want to create or creating your own sequence from scratch 1 Press the PROGRAM button in the DISPLAY SELECT section DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH J po y o E PROGRAM SELECT ITEM FOR EDITING VOICE Dou SEQUENCE PATTERN mm wm um LEAD2 RHYTHM erc ex LOWER LOWER2 PEDALI PEDALZ A A al Any rhythm currently playing will automatically be stopped when you call up the Rhythm Sequence Program function DDK 7 Owner s Manual 183 Rhythm Program weiBo1g WU AyH 184 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 4 Press one of the Sequence buttons SEQ 1 SEQ 4 in the display to select the rhythm sequence number you want to edit The lamp of the selected numbered sequence button in the Rhythm section lights and the Sequence Display appears E PROGRAM SELECT ITEM FOR EDITING NA sae TS ZA SEQUENCE VOICE RHYTHM PATTERN SEO 3 SEO 4 RHYTHM E UPPERI UPPER2 LEAD1 LEAD2 PEDALT LOWERI LOVER PEDAL2
186. bered button that corresponds to the Registration you wish to select e You can also recall Registrations by using the Foot Contollers This function is called Registration Shift page 94 El Reference Page Controlling the Registration You can also program the Registrations to change automatically at specific points Shift page 203 within the Rhythm Sequence This function is called Registration Sequence page 188 Using the D Disable button Rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns also change when you select different Registration Memory buttons Pressing the D Disable button allows you to keep the same rhythm accompaniment patterns tempo and so on throughout all your Registration changes or make your own rhythm selections if you want to Disable Button 7 8 9 to 1 12 d When the D button is on the following functions will not change even when you change the Registration Memory number e Rhythm menu Rhythm section Rhythm tempo Rhythm volume Rhythm reverb e Rhythm reverb time e Accompaniment volume Accompaniment reverb On Off status of Accompaniment parts e A B C mode A B C memory e M O C mode e Second expression pedal control for rhythm tempo DDK 7 Owner s Manual 91 REGISTRATION MEMORY AYOWAW NOILVYLSIDSY 92 Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory E HE S You can save your Registra
187. ble to use new blank external media such as USB flash memory floppy disks or USB storage devices or old ones that have been used with other devices you may need to format them Formatting erases all the data in the media and makes it ready to record The data erased by formatting will be lost permanently Check whether or not the media contains any important data you wish to keep before executing the operation 1 Connect the device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal Press the TOOLS button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page DDK 7 Owner s Manual 103 Music Data Recorder MDR HAM Jepsooey Lq ASNN NOTE USB FD01 appears in the display only when a floppy disk drive UD FDO1 has been installed to the DDK 7 A Do not remove the media while formatting 104 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 3 Press the FORMAT button in the display MDR SONG SELECT G E SONG 1 USB 01 S0NG REG_001 REPEAT CHANGE REMAINING SETTING SONG NAME y FORMAT XG SONG XG SONG COPY copy DELETE DELE CONVERT CONVERT CONVERT TO EL FROM EL TO XG e Select the desired media you want to format To format a USB flash memory select USB XX To format a floppy disk select USB FD1 MDR SONG SELECT 7008S SONG 1 USB 01 SONG REG_001 FORWAT ac Zen E so Ss Press the EXECUTE button in the display A message appears prompting confirmation of the operat
188. board will be sent on the channels set here You must set the transmit channel here to match the receive channel of the connected device Pressing each OUTPUT button calls up the channel selection pop up menu After you select the desired channel the pop up menu automatically closes Sustain Expression Pedal and 2nd Expression Pedal can be set to OFF MIDI information will not be transmitted MIDI OUT FILTER Deletes unnecessary MIDI data and keeps it from being transmitted from the DDK 7 After Touch second Expression and Rhythm start stop are automatically filtered Set the parameter for which you wish to disable transmission to ON INTERNAL EXTERNAL Switches control over the displayed items between the DDK 7 INTERNAL or the connected device EXTERNAL O 1 LEAD 1 Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voices INT Internal Lead Voice 1 is played from the Upper keyboard of the DDK 7 If the To Lower function is on it is played from Lower keyboard EXT External The Lead Voice 1 is played from the connected instrument via MIDI channel 4 O 2 SYNC To synchronize playback with an external MIDI device you can use either the instruments internal clock int or MIDI clock signals from the external device ext INT Internal The instrument uses its own internal clock EXT External The instrument uses MIDI clock signals from the external device midi 3 EXPRESSION Determin
189. change in output signal hence no compression to 20 1 Higher ratios result in greater compression OutputLevel 0 127 Determines the overall output of the compressed signal Use this to bring up the overall level after you ve reduced the dynamic range with compression EQ ENHANCER This effect boosts or cuts specific frequency bands allowing you to shape the tone of the sound as required by the mix Effect Type ST 2BAND EQ ST 3BAND EQ XG 3BAND EQ EQ DISCO EQ TEL HM ENHANCER XG HM ENHNCE Parameter Value Description EQ LowFreq 50 2 0k Hz ST2BandEQ 32 2 0k Hz Determines the central frequency of the low frequency range that is to be boosted or cut EQ Low Gain 12 12 dB Determines the amount over which the low frequency range is boosted or cut EQ Middle Freq 100 16k Hz Determines the central frequency of the middle frequency range that is to be boosted or cut EQ Middle Gain 12 12 dB Determines the amount over which the middle frequency range is boosted or cut EQ M Width 0 1 12 0 Determines the bandwidth or the range of frequencies around the specific middle frequency that is to be boosted or cut Lower values let you narrow in on a specific frequency while higher values select a broader range of frequencies to be affected EQ Hi Freq 500Hz 16 kHz
190. check the Registration order in the Regist Edit display If the song contains no performance data after loading the Registration data the E Reference Page LCD returns to the SONG SELECT Page Next Regist Settings page 118 9 Playback starts automatically after reading the Registration data the elapsed time is shown In general all parts recorded to the song are played back however you can mute El Reference Page specific parts and playback only selected parts For more information see page Song Part Information 123 page 106 When the end of the recorded performance is reached playback automatically stops You can however stop playback in the middle of the song by pressing the IM Stop button in the display Custom Play If you want to play back the song without resetting the Registrations press the CUSTOM button instead of the P gt Play button This displays the song time and starts playback immediately MDR SONG SELECT TOOLS Gi SONG 1 USB 01 SONG MG SE REMAINING 169 87 MB mmen j ORIGINAL o sewe epi RESET INAL BI mana o ao Femme e ee gt vom ZE When you play the song using the Next Regist function always press the Play button to start the song not the CUSTOM button 122 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Playing Back the Selected Part s You can also play back selected parts of your recorded performance while other parts are t
191. cific drum sounds to any of the keys pn e Leen one we a Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cym kute Ride Cymbal Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Orchestra Cymbal Orch Cymbal Roll Orch Cymbal Mute Cymbal March Cym Brush Shot Tam Tam 5 Select the desired drum instrument that you wish to assign to a key El Reference Page Select the desired drum instrument category with the category buttons in the Kit Assign List page 85 display The drum instrument menu of the selected category appears Drum Instrument Category Cp 1 MENU SETUP lt om Kal GA Y ma ise Crash Cmbal 1 Crash Gmbal 2 Crash Cym Mute Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Drum Instrument Menu Orchestra Cymbal Orch Cymbal Rol Orch Cymbal Mute Cymbal March Cym Brush Shot Tam Tam DDK 7 Owner s Manual 79 Rhythm Keyboard Percussion uoIssnojag p3gogAsy Wy AyH 80 A wore Though eight User Keyboard Percussion setups can be created they cannot be memorized to Registration Memory Only on off data and the Keyboard Percussion Menu are memorized to Registration Memory DDK 7 Owner s Manual 6 Assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal by simultaneously holding down the desired instrument name in the display and pressing the key or pedal to which the instrument is to be assigned The key to which the instrument is to be assigned Instrument Name O KBP
192. cifications equipment or options may not be the same in every locale please check with your Yamaha dealer DDK 7 Owner s Manual 267 Appendix xipuaddy Da Index Numerics 2nd Expression Pedaliere 205 A EE ee 223 ACCEN Tesista 156 eeler Un 70 AdO DPU sad t ee 70 Et NEE Eet tee ee 42 AFTER touch Touch TONE aaa cid ia 41 ASSEMBLE aaa ect inti suso 153 ASSIGN Keyboard Percussion 79 ATTACK Organ Flutes ATTACK RATE Voice Edit Auto BaSS TERA TANA AA AULO Eengel AUAN a ee eee AUX QUT LEVEL FIXED enin ee B BAR BEA Aa 66 BOOM AA AAA AA 214 BREA 63 JA 211 218 C CHANGE SONG NAME ees geet e nk 114 Channel Messages Ja nanaanawwnn wana wwa nanana nananana nananana nnaananans 236 CHORD aaa a ANA 70 Am AAA EU AAA 70 CHORUS Rhythm Pattern Program 169 COMO CHANGE EA AAA kab mhal 236 Control Menu CONVERI CONVERI CONVERI CUSTO CUTOFF FREQ D DE Disable acia NAAN 91 DATA CONTROL dial DELA RE e DEPTH ROAD EE BERTA bao AA AA AA a Display AAA 268 DDK 7 Owner s Manual E EACH Organ Elutes imu 38 EG AA 45 Effect category Voice 45 Effect Parameters Ka 45 EFFECT TYPE Otgan Saa 39 Effect type VOICE AA 45 AA aa AA ENDING EQ Equalizer EXTERNAL mc TANA Reece F ele 23 O 123 A GANAN Aa 42 KA O eda 109 FIUL IN WE 62 Ea AA E T 143 FINGERED CHORD i wata diia ios S ine 72 FIRST Org n AA
193. ck Introductory Guide Pressing Buttons on the Display There are three types of buttons those that select a function those that switch a function on off and those that open a list or menu of parameters To select the desired function simply press the button in the display directly For switching on off or opening a parameter list see the instructions below aping Aojonpojjuj Yin To switch the function on or off Off or mute button is grayed out On VOICE DISPLAY EB 23 UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 ChamStrs1 LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 UPPER KEYBOARD UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 VOICE 2 ChamStrs1 Brass amp Sax2 LOWER KEYBOARD PEDAL VOICE 1 VOICE 1 espan FingrBass1 Papag D REGISTRATION AA ERT REGISTRATION AA HHop Light OFF HHop Light OFF a a 120 BAR BEAT STOP KA a ien 120 BAR BEAT STOP En You can independently mute each Voice section in the Voice Display each accompaniment part in Rhythm Menu display and each Element in the Voice Edit display To open the parameter list I UPPER VOICE 1 JO LL IB UPPER VOICE 1 1 2730 Strings 1 bal EA meer m meer ak 1 mn 1 ouer eege gt CHORUS FLANGER PHASER TRewoLo auTo P When you press the button a parameter list will appear in which you can select the desired parameter 14 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Adjusting Parameter Values by Using the Display Sliders You can
194. copied is displayed in upper half of the display If you want to change the song press the COPY FROM CHANGE button to call up the Song Select display and select the desired song 4 Press the COPY TO CHANGE button to call up the folder select display then select the destination media 5 Press the EXECUTE button to execute the XG Song Copy Select CANCEL or CLOSE to abort the operation If the remaining memory of the destination media is insufficient XG Song Copy cannot be executed An error message will appear and the operation is cancelled Up to 120 XG songs can be saved in one folder DDK 7 Owner s Manual 133 Music Data Recorder MDR HAM JepJooay Lq ASNN XG Song Delete 1 Select the KG song to be deleted For details on selecting an XG song see page 126 2 Press the TOOLS button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page then select the XG SONG DELETE button The XG Song Delete display appears WOR El XG 001MD REPEAT CHANGE es SONS TO BE DELETED SETTING SONG mame memory FORMAT CHANGE FOLDER USB 01 50NG SONG X6_001 M1D XG SONG SONG XG SONG gt SONG COPY copy DELETE DELETE XECUTE CONVERT CONVERT CONVERT pro TOEL FROMEL TO XG SS SONG SELECT j MDR SONG SELECT Tous USB 01 SONG j XG 001 MID USB 01 50N6 NG SONG DELETE os E Reference Pages About Protected Songs page 131 REH wore User rhythms c
195. cted Edit Song See page 131 for more information These icons are shown when you select a song created on the Electone OI DU Indicates a song that has been created with the ELS 01 Indicates a song that has been created with the ELS 01C or ELS 01X Indicates a song that has been created with an EL series Electone such as the EL 900 Media Contents Folders Songs and Files Folders A folder is a storage location in the media used to organize multiple songs in groups If you ve saved hundreds of songs to a USB flash memory or USB storage device it may be difficult to find the desired song quickly Organizing your songs in folders with similar songs grouped together for example according to genre or tempo makes it easier to find the songs you want Song 1 2b Folder A Creating folders sore Folder B USB flash memory USB flash memory Songs A song is the DDK 7 data for a piece of music recorded to external media A single song can contain a variety of data including the recorded performance Registrations and so on Files A file is an element of data in a song For example a single song consists of various files such as Registration files and performance files The following files are created with the M D R The extension will not appear in the DDK 7 display They will
196. cussion function features many types of drum and percussion sounds playable from the keyboards and Pedalboard Keyboard Percussion has two different modes Preset and User Preset Keyboard Percussion lets you play the preset drum kit sounds from the keyboards assigned beforehand to the keys while the User Keyboard Percussion lets you freely assign the drum sounds to any key or pedal you wish Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion 1 Turn off the Upper Lower and or Pedal Voices by setting each Voice s volume to MIN WI 2 Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the elas K B P 1 or K B P 2 button The Keyboard Percussion K B P Display appears In the Voice Display each Voice section can be muted page 19 O KBP 1 ASSIGN SETUP KIT Multi Kit J REVERB VOLUME USERS USERS Fw ON USERS USERT Two Keyboard Percussion sets K B P 1 and K B P 2 can be played at the same de by setting both buttons Pressing the K B P 1 button calls up the Preset 1 kit on the Upper Lower Se keyboards and pressing K B P 2 button calls up the Preset 2 kit on the Pedalboard El Reference Page Connecting a Pedal Unit page 229 74 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 3 Select the desired percussion kit As a default Multi Kit is assigned to the keyboards but you can change the kit from a total of 16 different kits Pressing the Kit button on the display calls up the Percussion
197. deEl P2 Vox8 Cool PowerLead XG FeedbackGtr XG Harpsichord Thtr Trp 8 Cool BluesGuitar XG FeedbackGtr2 5 XG Harpsi KSP Thtr Trp 1648 RockGuitar XG GtrHarmonics XG Harpsichord2 Tibia Vox VintageStrum XG GtrFeedback XG Harpsichord3 Live 12StrGuitar XG GtrHarmonics2 XG Clavi Live DynoSteel2 KG Clavi KSP Cool CleanGuitar KG Clavi Wah KG PulseClavi XG PierceClavi DDK 7 Owner s Manual 179 Rhythm Program weiBo1g WU AyH BASS STRINGS ENSEMBLE BRASS 1 Cool FingerBass 1 Sweet Violin 1 Live Strings 1 Sweet Trumpet AcousticBass Viola Live Allegro Sweet Trombone Cool DynoPick Cello Live Orchestra Sweet MutedTrp Cool Fretless Contrabass Symphon Str Sweet FlugelHorn SlapBass Harp OberStrings JazzTrumpet SubBass Hackbrett OrchestraHorns SoloTrumpet
198. e percussion sounds or some organ Voices DDK 7 Owner s Manual O D UI O E ba a o 5 o o o 2 o gt Ste PUB SJOJJUO 3210A 42 El Reference Page Solo function page 30 DDK 7 Owner s Manual PITCH Controls pitch according to the play style of After Touch AFTER touch Controls the pitch according to the pressure you apply to the keys after playing them The minimum setting produces no effect at all Higher positive settings make the pitch higher according to the pressure and lower negative settings make the pitch lower The setting of 14 or 14 results in the widest pitch change Range 14 14 O FEET Determines the octave setting of the Voice letting you use the Voice over a wide register There are three settings 4 8 and 16 4 is highest and 16 is lowest A 2 setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections PRESET is the original factory setting O REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section When the REVERB control in the Reverb Page 1 is set to the minimum the setting here will have no effect See page 46 for details O BRILLIANCE Adjustment of the Voice tone brighter or mellower Range is from 3 to 3 Higher settings makes the voice tone brighter O VOLUME Fine adjustment of the Voice volume See page 28 for more information O PRIORITY only for the Lead Voice 2 Determines the mode of Lead Voice 2 Last or Top
199. e 2 Snow Waltz Slowfox Motor City Cuban Bolero Classic Waltz Quickstep Soul 1 Tango 1 Mariachi Dixieland 1 Soul 2 Tango 2 Alpine Waltz 4 Dixieland 2 16Beat Soul Tango Orchestra Musette Dixieland Jazz 4 Frankly Soul Tango Milonga Jazz Waltz 1 Ragtime Gospel Funk WORLD MUSIC Jazz Waltz 2 Charleston Jazz Funk Bolero Jazz Waltz 3 Guitar Swing Funk Beat 1 Flamenco 2 Jazz Waltz 4 POPS Funk Beat 2 Pop Flamenco Modern Waltz 8Beat Light 1 Detroit Pop 1 Pasodoble Pop Waltz 8Beat Light 2 Detroit Pop 2 Polka 1 Country Waltz 8Beat Light 3 New R amp B Polka 2 SWING amp JAZZ 8Beat Light 4 Modern R amp B Banda Polka Big Band 1 Folk Rock 1 New Gospel rish Dance Big Band 2 4 Folk Rock 2 Cool Blues Tarantella Big Band 3 60 s 8Beat Gospel Shuffle Sirtaki Big Band 4 Asian Pops 2 Gospel Sisters Enka Big Band 5 Unplugged 1 Amazing Gospel Reggae 4 Big Band 6 Unplugged 2 6 8 Blues Happy Reggae Big Band 7 Unplugged 3 Slow Blues Sheriff Reggae Big Band Bop 8Beat Adria 6 8 Soul Shuffle Reggae Orch Big Band Bubblegum Pop Blues Shuffle Bluegrass 1 Orchestra Swing 70 s 8Beat LATIN Bluegrass 2 Movie Panther Tijuana Samba Hoedown Jungle Drum o SingerSongWriter Big Band Samba Country 2 4 Jazz Club Surfin 8Beat 4 Light Samba 1 Country Shuffle o Simple Swing Finger Pickin Light Samba 2 Country Band Acoustic Jazz Heart Beat Pop Samba 1 Hawalian Medium Jazz Guitar Pop Pop Samba 2 Mexican Dance DDK 7 Owner s Manual
200. e Format combines all of Yamaha s auto accompaniment know how into a single FILE unified format A GESS This product utilizes NE an embedded Internet browser from ACCESS Co Ltd NF is used with the patented LZW licensed from Unisys Co Ltd NF may not be separated from this product nor may it be sold lent or transferred in any way Also NF may not be reverse engineered reverse compiled reverse assembled or copied This software includes a module developed by the Independent JPEG Group e The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co Ltd e This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others copyrights Such copyrighted materials include without limitation all computer software styles files MIDI files WAVE data and sound recordings Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws Any violation of copyright has legal consequences DON T MAKE DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES Copying of the commercially available music sequence data and or digital audio files is strictly prohibited except for your personal use Electone and STAGEA are the trademarks of Yamaha Corporation The company names and product names in this Owner s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies
201. e Note Limit range An error message appears while the Voice name is entered Voice name capacity is 16 characters Delete the unnecessary letters or spaces RHYTHM PROGRAM During use of the Rhythm Pattern Program no sound is produced even when you play a certain percussion sound If percussion sounds have been recorded while memory is full no subsequently selected instruments can be heard or recorded If necessary erase some of the less necessary percussion sounds and play again MUSIC DATA RECORDER Recording or playback cannot be performed e The part buttons in the Rec Standby display or Playing display may have been turned off Turn the desired part to REC or PLAY e The performance data is too large The maximum limit for recording performance data is 1 MB e The media is write protected Cancel the write protect e The media folder may contain EL format songs You cannot record to the media folder that contains EL format songs Create a new folder and record the song to it Recording is stopped before the performance is finished e The amount of recorded data on the media is close to the maximum limit Either use another media or delete the data of unnecessary songs e When you overwrite the song the length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts Delete the previously recorded song then record again page 129 e The performance data is too l
202. e O 00 7F O 00 7F Volume Data 00 MAX 7F 15 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Volume O 00 7F O 00 7F Volume Data 00 MAX 7F 16 Lead Voice 1 Volume O 00 7F O 00 7F Volume Data 00 MAX 7F 17 Pedal Voice 1 Volume O 00 7F O 00 7F Volume Data 00 MAX 7F 18 Pedal Voice 2 Volume O 00 7F O 00 7F Volume Data 00 MAX 7F 19 Lead Voice 2 Volume O 00 7F O 00 7F Volume Data 00 MAX 7F 1A Percussion Volume O 00 7F O 00 7F Volume Data 00 MAX 7F 1B Reverb Depth O 00 7F O 00 7F Depth Data 00 MAX 7F MIN Organ Flute Voice cc Switch dd Remarks Code Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 30 Upper Organ Flute Voice O 00 01 O 00 01 00 OFF 01 ON U ORGAN FLUTES 31 Lower Organ Flute Voice O 00 01 O 00 01 00 OFF 01 ON L ORGAN FLUTES To Lower cc Switch dd Remarks Code Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 36 Lead Voice 1 To Lower O 00 01 O 00 01 00 OFF 01 ON TO LOWER el 37 Pedal Voice 1 To Lower O 00 01 O 00 01 00 OFF 01 ON TO LOWER A 38 edal Voice 2 To Lower O 00 01 O 00 01 00 OFF 01 ON TO LOWER A Solo Mode cc Switch dd Remarks Code Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 39 Lead Voice 2 Solo Knee O 00 01 O 00 01 00 OFF 01 ON SOLO FOOT PEDAL 252 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Brilliance
203. e Program 190 e Playing Rhythm Sequences 191 e Playing All Sequences in Order 191 4 Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data to external media 192 EN Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation Entering percussion sounds and or editing them y Creating the backing Rhythmic Chord patterns and or editing them y y Saving your rhythm patterns as User rhythms Rhythm Pattern Program pages 148 173 You can create your original rhythm patterns by entering percussion sounds or editing preset rhythm patterns Effect settings and detailed settings for each percussion Voice Panning Tuning and so on y Selecting the destination of the sequence y Entering a rhythm pattern one by one y Programming the Registration Sequence Rhythm Sequence Program pages 183 190 You can connect any of the rhythms together to make complete rhythm compositions Moreover you can also program Registration Shift events at any point in the composition so that the Registration Memory settings automatically change as the rhythm sequence plays back DDK 7 Owner s Manual 147 Rhythm Program ueJBoJ 4 WU AyH NOTE Pressing the PROGRAM button while the rhythm is running automatically stops the rhythm 148 DDK 7 Owner s Manual A Rhythm Pattern Program Rhythm Pattern Program lets you use any of the different
204. e Program includes an automatic Registration Shift feature called Registration Seguence Contents 1 Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation 147 2 Rhythm P e Entering e Basic set e Entering attern Program he Rhythm Pattern Program tings for the Rhythm Pattern Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern Step WING namana a rc DAG e Editing Entered Percussion Notes e Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern Real Time Writes A3 eee bua aed are madaanan e Creating 148 151 154 157 162 Backing Patterns Rhythmic Chord Function 163 e Changing the Voices for Accompaniment Parts 166 e Adjusting Volume and Panning ESC le EE e Detailed settings for each percussion instrument 171 e Saving Rhythm Patterns 167 168 172 e Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program 174 e Recalling User Rhythm Patterns 174 e Selecting Rhythm from an External Media 175 e Percussion kriet 176 3 Rhythm Sequence PrograM 183 e SelectingaSeguence 183 e Programming a Sequence 185 e AuditioningaSeguence 186 e Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence 186 e Programming a Registration Sequence 188 e Editing an Existing Registration Sequence 189 e Quitting the Rhythm Sequenc
205. e keys SLIDE only for Lead Voices Applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato The Slide function is effective within a one octave range for Lead Voices Slide has no effect when playing notes beyond a one octave range By connecting an optional Foot Pedal to the DDK 7 you can use it to control the slide function 1 ON OFF On Off switch the Slide effect 2 TIME Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect Higher settings makes the slide speed slower Range 0 14 O TRANSPOSE Changes the pitch in semitones for each Voice section Range is from 6 to 6 O TUNE Determines the fine pitch settings detune for each Voice section producing a richer sound Each step represents a 1 cent change in pitch Range 64 63 Voice Condition Page 3 4 E LEAD Voice 2 III Up 3 Strings 1 Ze ME Na omg cows PARANETER INPUT MODE TFO TFO FREQUENCY wn DRY ET 0 08Hz 38 D lt W63 ono You can edit the effect parameters from these two displays Both displays have the same contents You can select two effects for each Voice section with these displays Voice Condition Pages 3 and 4 EFFECT 1 Page 3 EFFECT 2 Page 4 Selects the effect category Pressing the effect button on the display calls up the effect El Reference Page category list Select the desired effect category in the list ERR SS LEAD VOICE 2 IT J LES mm FLAN
206. e length of sustaining sounds such as Snare Roll and Whistle can be changed by adjusting the Gate Time See page 166 for more information To erase an entered note 1 Select the note you want to erase as in Step 1 on page 157 Press the REST button in the ACCENT section of the display The selected note is deleted and replaced with a rest PATTERN SETTING INPUT Ei seme SAVE FILE Marching Band SCC A EN INTRO 1 PART Symphony Kit EB C en Cessa Gran Cassa Mute Mute QUANTIZE IA au OLA AAA ia ACCENT onon REST e e e Jo INSTRUMENT aaa GU CHORD CHANGE You can also erase all notes of a single instrument or all notes entered To erase one instrument 1 Select the key to which the instrument that you want to erase is assigned The key name you have selected and its instrument name are displayed Symphony Kit en See Mute Selected key Instrument name Rhythm Program 2 Press CLEAR in the display The following display appears prompting confirmation of the operation PATTERN SETTING INPUT D serie J SAE J FILE Mar Dand 1 INTRO PM a Do you want to dear all data or only Gan Cassa Mute AD DRI CHOF CLEAR ALL CLEAR NOTE DUANTIZE QUANTIZE lt a gt WI a DDK 7 Owner s Manual 159 weiBo1g WU AyH 160 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Select CLEAR to erase the selected instrument A bell sound
207. e song name See page 113 for more information O RENAME FOLDER Calls up the Rename Folder display You can change the folder name of the currently selected folder in the Media Folder List See page 113 for more information O DELETE FOLDER Deletes the folder that is selected in the Media Folder List DDK 7 Owner s Manual 107 Music Data Recorder MDR HAM JepJooay Lq ASNN EH wore A message prompting initialization of the Registration data may appear when you select a folder Select INITIALIZE to initialize the Registration called up on the panel then select a new Song Media is not initialized after the operation is complete 108 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 2 Select the desired media and or folder in the Media Folder List To call up the folder in the media in the display press the selected media button in the Media Folder List again 3 Press the EXECUTE button To abort the operation press the CLOSE button Song Icons These icons are shown when you select a media folder and song E G rr Indicates media such as a USB flash memory or floppy disk This icon is displayed in the Media Folder List Indicates a folder Indicates that write protect or copy protect is effective for the media Indicates that performance data is contained in the song Indicates a Protected Original Song See page 131 for more information Indicates a Prote
208. e time signature Select CANCEL to abort the operation DDK 7 Owner s Manual 151 Rhythm Program 3 Select a section to which you want to enter or edit the rhythm pattern Pressing the SECTION button on the display calls up the Section Select pop up menu After selecting the desired section the pop up menu automatically closes PATTERN emp wu Ze seme SAVE FILE PATTERN SETTING INPUT crer seue SAVE me Marching Band 1 MAIN A SECTION MEASURE ME TRONOME ASSEMBLE ON CLEAR j e You can play the selected section by pressing the Rhythm START button on the panel You can also change the section while the rhythm is playing For details on muting the accompaniment part refer to page 167 4 Sets the measure length of the rhythm pattern Pressing the MEASURE button on the display calls up the Measure Select pop up menu Select the desired measure in the pop up menu If you select Break or Fill In as the section the measure cannot be changed 5 If necessary Set the Metronome Part Assemble and Part Clear parameters PATTERN INPUT Zi sene SAVE FILE Marching Band 1 MAIN A SECTION MEASURE MAIN A 2 Jeme METRONOME sl Reference Pages El Turns the metronome click on or off When set to ON the metronome sounds on each Step Write and Real Time Write page 154 D gt Ss gt 3 Ha o a D 3 beat of the measu
209. ePickBass 0 65 50 XG Strings3 0 0 36 XG FretlessBass 0 0 51 XG SynStrings1 0 32 36 XG FretlessBass2 0 27 51 XG ResoStrings 0 33 36 XG FretlessBass3 0 64 51 XG SynStrings4 0 34 36 XG FretlessBass4 0 65 51 XG SynStrings5 0 96 36 XG Syn Fretless 0 0 52 XG SynStrings2 0 97 36 XG SmthFretless 0 0 53 XG ChoirAahs 0 0 37 XG SlapBass1 0 3 53 XG StereoChoir 0 27 37 XG ResonantSlap 0 16 53 KG ChoirAahs2 0 32 37 XG PunchThumb 0 32 53 XG MellowChoir 0 0 38 XG SlapBass2 0 40 53 XG ChoirStrings 0 43 38 XG Vel SwSlap 0 0 54 XG VoiceOohs 0 0 39 XG SynthBass1 0 0 55 XG SynthVoice 0 18 39 XG SynBass1Dark 0 40 55 XG SynthVoice2 0 20 39 XG FastResoBass 0 41 55 XG Choral 0 24 39 XG AcidBass 0 64 55 XG AnalogVoice 0 35 39 XG Clavi Bass 0 0 56 XG OrchestraHit 0 40 39 XG TechnoBass 0 35 56 XG OrchestraHit2 0 64 39 XG Orbiter 0 64 56 XG Impact 0 65 39 XG SquareBass 0 0 57 XG Trumpet BRASS 0 66 39 XG RubberBass 0 16 57 XG Trumpet2 0 96 39 XG Hammer 0 17 57 XG BriteTrumpet 0 0 40 XG SynthBass2 0 32 57 XG WarmTrumpet 0 6 40 XG MellowSyBass 0 0 58 XG Trombone 0 12 40 XG SequencedBass 0 18 58 XG Trombone2 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 241 Appendix xipuaddy 242 Voice Number Voice Number
210. each time you visit the site DHCP This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low level network configuration information can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the Internet DNS A system that translates names of computers connected to a network to their corresponding IP addresses Download Transferring data over a network from a larger host system to a smaller client system s hard drive or other local storage device much like copying files from your hard disk drive to a floppy disk For this instrument this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the instrument Gateway A system which links different networks or systems and makes possible data transfer and conversion despite differing communications standards Home page The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet This phrase is also used to mean the front screen or top page of a website Internet A huge network made up of networks the Internet allows high speed data transfer among computers mobile phones and other devices IP address A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network and indicating the device s location on the network LAN Short for Local Area Network this is a data transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single location such as an office
211. ead 0 40 64 XG SynthBrass4 0 16 88 XG Big amp Low 0 41 64 XG ChoirBrass 0 64 88 XG Fat amp Perky 0 45 64 XG AnaVel Brass2 0 65 88 XG SoftWhirl 0 64 64 XG AnalogBrass2 0 0 89 XG NewAgePad SYNTH PAD 0 0 65 XG SopranoSax REED 0 64 89 XG Fantasy 0 0 66 XG AltoSax 0 0 90 XG WarmPad 0 40 66 XG SaxSection 0 16 9 XG ThickPad 0 43 66 XG HyperAltoSax 0 17 90 XG SoftPad 0 0 67 XG TenorSax 0 18 90 XG SinePad 0 40 67 XG BreathyTenor 0 64 90 XG HornPad 0 41 67 XG SoftTenorSax 0 65 90 XG RotaryStrings 0 64 67 XG TenorSax2 0 0 91 XG PolySynthPad 0 0 68 XG BaritoneSax 0 64 91 XG PolyPad80 0 0 69 XG Oboe 0 65 91 XG ClickPad 0 0 70 XG EnglishHorn 0 66 91 XG AnalogPad 0 0 71 XG Bassoon 0 67 91 XG SquarePad 0 0 72 XG Clarinet 0 0 92 XG ChoirPad 0 0 73 XG Piccolo PIPE 0 64 92 XG Heaven 0 0 74 XG Flute 0 66 92 XG ltopia 0 0 75 XG Recorder 0 67 92 XG CCPad 0 0 76 XG PanFlute 0 0 93 XG BowedPad 0 0 77 XG BlownBottle 0 64 93 XG Glacier 0 0 78 XG Shakuhachi 0 65 93 XG GlassPad 0 0 79 XG Whistle 0 0 94 XG MetallicPad 0 0 80 XG Ocarina 0 64 94 XG TinePad 0 0 81 XG SquareLead SYNTH LEAD 0 65 94 XG PanPad 0 6 81 XG SquareLead2 0 0 95 XG HaloPad 0 8 81 XG LMSquare 0 0 96 XG SweepPad 0 18 81 XG Hollow 0 20 96 XG Shwimmer 0 19 81 XG Shroud 0 27 96 XG Converge 0 64 81 XG Mellow 0 64 96 XG P
212. ecord your own Registration settings to a numbered button the preset Registration for that button will be overwritten and erased as a result When you initialize the Registration Memory page 93 the preset settings will be recalled and your own Registration setting s will be erased and replaced with the factory defaults Contents 1 Storing Registrations 89 5 Registration Shift 94 2 Selecting Registrations 91 e Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift 3 Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory GISDIAY caia AA Bods 94 WA WAA WAA AA rer 92 e Confirming the Registration Shift setting in the Voice 4 Initializing Registration Memory 93 Display aaa 97 6 Unifying a specific parameter 99 H Storing Registrations Newly created Registrations you make can be stored to the Registration Memory panel buttons All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to a USB flash memory or other external media for future recall El Reference Pages Selecting a Voice page 26 Selecting a Rhythm page 60 While holding down the M Memory button in the Registration voice Controls and Effects Memory section press the numbered button to which you wish P298 40 to save your Registration 1 Create your original Registration 1 While holding down M button 2 Press desired numbered button
213. ection by using the Foot Pedal Sustain for the Pedalboard cannot be controlled 1 Press the SUSTAIN button to call up the Sustain display then turn the desired Voice section on from the display El Reference Page Sustain page 49 DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH J Il E E 2 E SUSTAN ED 2 E ka LEADI LEAD KE Select SUSTAIN in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the UTILITY display The Sustain function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal P FOOT PEDAL Goba EX MDI AUX OUT PEDAL FOOT PEDALI FOOT PEDAL mum EEN POLARITY Esc SUSTAIN J SLIDE Lt SOLO J RHYTHM CONTROL J GLIDE ROTARY SPEAKER J REGIST SHIFT J e RHYTHM CONTROL ROTARY SPEAKER REGIST SHIFT EXPRESSION OFF To apply sustain press the Foot Pedal Sustain is constantly applied as long as the Foot Pedal is pressed Releasing the Foot Pedal turns sustain off DDK 7 Owner s Manual Controlling Lead Slide Call up the Voice Condition display Page 2 of the Lead Voice section to which you wantto apply the Lead Slide effect E Reference Page Voice Condition Display page 41 2 Press the ON button of the Slide section on the display M LEAD VOICE 1 JO 3 2 Trumpet 1 SE NG VIBRATO SL iR RE TRANSPOSE TUNE DELAY
214. ed includes not only that of the DDK 7 but also all Style File Format files 1 Insert the media which contains the desired pattern into the USB TO DEVICE terminal Press the PROGRAM button on the panel If you open the FILE Page while the rhythm is playing the rhythm will automatically be stopped Press the SELECT button to select the desired pattern file The method for selecting a file is the same as that in the M D R section See page 104 for more information 3 Press FILE at the top right in the display Pattern File 5 Si BubblegumPop sty Cool8Beat sty PATTERN SETTING INPUT Zi SAM y SAVE FILED PATTERN SETTING INPUT ceter sere SAVE EE f FILE stir USB 01 SELECT PATTERN FILE SE Si Si Si Folder USB 01 60 s8Beat sty 70 s8Beat sty 8BeatModern sty DELETE FOLDER 5 Press EXECUTE or press the highlighted selected button again to load the pattern To edit the loaded pattern go to the INPUT Page page 157 then save your created pattern s as a User Rhythm page 172 About file types that can be loaded to the DDK 7 This DDK 7 is compatible with Style File Format data The Style File Format SFF is Yamahas original style data STYLE format which uses a unique conversion system to provide F LE high quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types In this format each rhythm pattern called a style is made up of fifteen sections In
215. eds Richly textured four layer AWM Voices and High Quality Digital pages 24 Effects and 52 The DDK 7 contains a huge amount of exceptionally high quality Voices 415 altogether created with the AWM Advanced Wave Memory tone generation system The authentic touch response keyboard lets you play these Voices with all the expressiveness and control of an actual acoustic instrument Whats more there are 183 different effect types in 15 categories that you can apply to each Voice section letting you enhance and even completely change the character of the Voices without having to use the Voice Edit features Dynamic Contemporary Rhythms and Auto Accompaniment page 60 The exceptionally of wide selection of 274 rhythms lets you choose exactly the rhythm you need in your performance Each rhythm contains 15 variations sections such as Main Fill In Intro Ending and Break that you can easily switch while you play to make your performance even more dynamic and professional Each rhythm has its own matching accompaniment divided into five instrument parts providing basic backing as well as embellishments page 223 Comprehensive input and output connectors ideal for live performance Since the DDK 7 is equipped with two types of AUX OUT jacks MAIN and SUB you can select outputs for each part This lets you add an external effect to a specific part or adjust the volume balance among the parts with an external mixer
216. eference Page Auto Bass Chord page 71 Reference Page Adjusting the tempo page 66 El Reference Page Registration Shift page 94 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 19 Quick Introductory Guide aping Aojonpojjuj Yaind 20 H wore Additional basic Registrations are preset on the Registration Memory locations from 1 to 16 See page 89 for details DDK 7 Owner s Manual 5 Registration Menu A Registration consists of panel settings including the selected Upper Keyboard Voices Lower Keyboard Voices Pedal Voices rhythm and so on The Registration Menu button includes 288 Registrations specially suited for playing in a different music style Selecting Registrations 1 Press the REGIST MENU button to call up the Registration Menu display DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH II II CZJ ZJ ht 2 Select the desired registration category with the category buttons in the display Each button has different Registrations for different music genres For example if you want to play Jazz press the JAZZ amp LATIN button For details on the Registration Menu see page 22 Live Performance Basic Pops amp Rock Dance amp Ballad SYNPHONY SWORD Jazz 8 Latin 0000096 Symphony amp World
217. egist may take a few seconds the time may differ depending on the size of the data to be loaded e When using a floppy disk instead of USB flash memory the loading time will be longer than when using USB flash memory e Next Registration data can be loaded by two ways using optional foot pedal right footswitch and programming Next Regist in the Registration Sequence Loading time is the same regardless of which way you load the Next Registration data Editing an Existing Registration Sequence You can move or delete the entered Registration Sequence Registration number or Next Regist data from the sequence To move an entry 1 Using the POSITION buttons move the cursor and select the data Registration number or Next Regist you want to move 2 Change the position by pressing the Bar Beat Clock buttons in the display DDK 7 Owner s Manual 189 Rhythm Program we1boId WU AyH 190 DDK 7 Owner s Manual To move the Registration number timing press the DATA SET button To move the Next Regist timing press the NEXT REGIST SET button The position of the Registration number or Next Regist is changed and displayed in the proper order To erase an entry 1 Using the POSITION buttons move the cursor and select the data Registration number or Next Regist you want to delete 2 Press the DELETE button to delete the data Quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program You can quit the Rhythm Sequence Program f
218. ell B 1 Seg Click L Seg Click L Seg Click L Seg Click L Seg Click L Seg Click L co Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Eo Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap DO Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Brush Swirl ii Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap EO Brush Tap Swirl Brush Tap Swirl Brush Tap Swirl Brush Tap Swirl Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal FO Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll JGM Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet HiQ 2 GO Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Electro Snare Soft Snare Noisy Snare Snap Elec REH Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks 5 AO Kick Soft Kick Soft ick Tight L Kick Soft Kick Soft ick 3 3 WAI Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot H Snare Pitched Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot x BO Kick Tight ick Tight ick Wet Kick Tight Kick 2 ick Gate 2 C1 Kick Kick Short ick Tight H Kick Kick Gate ick Gate Heavy 8 GH Side Stick Side Stick Light Stick Ambient Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick gd D1 Snare Snare Short Snare Ambient Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 EA Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap E1 Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight 2 Snare Tight Snap Snare Rock Tight Snare Noisy 3 F1 Floor Tom L Floor Tom L Hybrid Tom 1 om Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1 Hi Hat Closed Hi Hat Closed Hi Hat Closed 2 Hi
219. emporarily turned off This function is especially useful for playing a single part such as the melody over previously recorded accompaniment parts To play back the selected part s During playback press each part button to turn the part you want to playback to PLAY and the part you want to mute to OFF REG_001 WOR sone 1 TEMPO TEMPO PLAYING 100 RESET TINE 00 01 LI aa gt gt RECORD CUSTOM Fast Forward Rewind and Pause Fast Forward and Rewind During playback press the PP Fast forward button or 44 Rewind button and hold it down until the time reaches the desired position Even when the button is released playback is paused To resume playback from the point you ve advanced or reversed to press the Play button or CUSTOM button Pause If you want to temporarily stop playback of the song or songs press the 21 Pause button To resume playback from the point at which the song was paused press the EU Pause button again or press the P gt Play or CUSTOM button DDK 7 Owner s Manual 123 zl Music Data Recorder MDR Changing the Tempo You can change the tempo of the song as the song is playing in the M D R display either while the song is stopped or while it is playing To Change the Tempo Use the TEMPO _4_J_ _J buttons in the display to change the tempo The TEMPO buttons on the panel cannot be u
220. ent is connected to the Internet DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH EA TOA INTERNET DIRECT CONNECTION Wk pta maha s special website for using your Electone STAGEA online over the Int lt Latest News gt A lt moy these specially programmed songs ee Karaha Bang preview pd of the STAGEA These songs c ored to media REFRESH ee such as Smart Media cards E ON Saro e Download the latest version update for your Instrument ictal Yamaha Online me W HOME ed page nas en dispares Control Menu Browser 210 DDK 7 Owner s Manual In the Control Menu located in the left part of the display you can control the displayed website and set various settings The browser display to the right of the control menu is the area in which the website is displayed El Reference Page Changing the Home Page page 217 The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet is called the home page If you want to return to the home page from another website press the HOME button in the Control Menu Scrolling the Display When the size of the web page is too large to be shown at one time in the browser display of the instrument a scroll bar appears at the right side or bottom of the display Touch and move the scroll
221. er to OFF SELECT Turns on the Registration memory numbers that contain the same Voice as the one which is currently set in the Registration at the cursor position The targeted Registration numbers are underlined Unifies the currently turned on parameter s values You unify the relevant parameter values in each Registration memory number or offset them Keep in mind that you cannot restore the original data once you change the parameter s value SETTINGS ALL ON ON SELECT ALL OFF OFF Unifying the currently turned on parameter s value Pressing SET unifies the currently turned on parameter s values to the one in the currently selected Registration at the cursor position A message appears prompting you to confirm the operation E REGIST MEMORY 1 16 Do you want to make all REVERB DEPTH settings to the same as that of currently selected Registration PS EEZ kana me Bes ka NG Esa To continue the operation select UNIFY Select CANCEL to abort the operation Offsetting the currently turned on parameter s value Pressing the buttons in the display or using the Data Control dial offsets the currently turned on parameter s value If you select Pan as the parameter gt buttons are shown instead of If you change the value and if parameter values for some Registration memory number reach the maximum or minimum the following message appears
222. erformance data In advance you need to create the original Registration that will replace the old one 1 Select the song for which you wish to replace the Registrations For details on selecting a song see page 104 2 Press the REGIST EDIT button in the SONG SELECT Page to call up the Regist Edit display The Registration data which has been saved to the song is shown 3 Select the Registration data you wish to replace 4 Press the SAVE button A message appears prompting confirmation of overwriting the Registration data Select OK to overwrite replace or select CANCEL to abort the operation Next Regist Settings Changing the order of the Registration data When playing back a song which uses more than 16 Registration numbers you can use two or more Registration banks saved in a single song and recall them one by one as you play the song This function is called Next Regist M1 M16 M1 M16 N N SSS OSS ai REG_001 REG_002 If you want to use the Next Regist function you ll have to make one of the following settings in advance e Set the Registration Shift mode to User and select Next Regist as the Shift End page 94 e Enter the Next Regist data in the Registration Sequence page 189 1 Save the desired Registrations to a song For instructions on saving two or more Registration banks to a song see page 117 Select the song co
223. es the control of the expression pedal functions Ordinarily this control is set to AUTO AUTO Internal and External is automatically switched INT Internal You can manually control the expression pedal and Foot Pedal even during M D R playback EXT External While playing the M D R or receiving MIDI messages the expression pedal and Foot Pedal is invalid The volume is controlled by the recorded data in a USB flash memory or received MIDI data DDK 7 Owner s Manual 239 Connections 4 Appendix E XG Voice amp Drum List xipuaddy 240 Only for XG song playback Voice Number Voice Number Voice Name Category Voice Name Category MSB LSB PRG MSB LSB PRG 0 0 1 XG GrandPiano PIANO 0 0 14 XG Xylophone CHROMATIC o 1 1 XG GrnaPianoKSP 0 O 15 XG TubularBells PERC 0 18 1 XG MellowGrPno 0 96 15 XG ChurchBells 0 40 1 XG PianoStrings 0 97 15 XG Carillon 0 41 1 XG Dream 0 0 16 XG Dulcimer 0 0 2 XG BrightPiano 0 35 16 XG Dulcimer2 0 1 2 XG BritePnoKSP 0 96 16 XG Cimbalom 0
224. eset Category Preset Preset Preset Voice Name Feet Effect 1 Effect 2 Voice Name Feet Effect 1 Effect 2 2 Theatre Organ 1 H TREMOLO 2 HM ENHANCER 2 DX E Piano 1 8 CHORUS 2 THRU Theatre Organ 2 8 HM ENHANCER THRU DX E Piano 2 H ENSDETUNE THRU Theatre Organ 3 8 GT TREMOLO 1 HM ENHANCER DX E Piano 3 H ST2BANDEQ CELESTE 4 Theatre Organ 4 H TREMOLO 2 HM ENHANCER DX E Piano 4 H ST2BANDEQ TEMPO CROSS Theatre Organ 5 H TREMOLO 2 XG HM ENHNCE Stage E Piano 1 e THRU THRU Theatre Organ 6 8 THRU THRU Stage E Piano 2 8 ST3BANDEQ CHORUS 1 Theatre Organ 7 H TREMOLO 2 THRU Stage E Piano 3 8 ST2BANDEQ EP AUTO PAN Theatre Organ 8 8 THRU XG HM ENHNCE Stage E Piano 4 H ST2BANDEQ PITCH CHANGE Accordion 1 8 ST3IBANDEQ THRU Stage E Piano 5 8 XGTREMOLO XG CMP DIST Accordion 2 8 THRU RU Stage E Piano 6 8 ST 2BAND EQ EP PHASER 3 Accordion 3 H THRU RU 3 Stack E Piano 1 H ST2BANDEQ XG SYMPHONIC Accordion 4 H ST3BANDEQ THRU Stack E Piano 2 H HM ENHANCER ENS DETUNE Bandoneon 8 THRU THRU Clavi 1 16 THRU THRU Reed Organ 8 THRU THRU Clavi 2 16 ST2BANDEQ TOUCH WAH 2 3 Jazz Organ 1 16 j2WAY ROT SP THRU GUITAR Jazz Organ 2 16 ROTARY SP 1 THRU 1 Nylon Guitar 1 16 8 THRU THRU Jazz Organ 3 16 TREMOLO 1 XG ROTARY SP Nylon Guitar 2 16 8 IST 3BAND E THRU Jazz Organ 4 16 TREMOLO 1 ROTARY SP 1 Steel Guitar 1 16 8 ST 2BAND E HM ENHANCER Jazz Organ 5 16 ST3BANDEQ BASEMENT Steel Guitar 2 16 8 THRU THRU Ja
225. essing the Left Footswitch again in the middle of the seguence playback cancels the Rhythm Seguence When you are playing a Rhythm Sequence that is made up of several sequences SEQ buttons pressing the Left footswitch turns off the currently playing Rhythm Sequence and pressing it again starts the next sequence You can also start the Rhythm Sequence playback using the optional foot pedal Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data to external media You can save your own rhythm patterns created in the Rhythm Pattern Program and Rhythm Sequence created in the Rhythm Sequence Program to external media such as USB flash memory Refer to the section Saving Registrations as Registration Data File on page 116 for instructions When loading your original Rhythm data from external media back to the DDK 7 be sure to stop the rhythm if it is playing Loading cannot be executed when a rhythm is running 10 Controllers These leg and foot operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions and switch the effect on off without taking your hands from the keyboard In order to use these controllers you ll need to connect the DDKU P7 Pedal Unit or an optional FC4 5 7 9 Foot Pedal to the DDK 7 Contents 1 Footswitches 193 e Controlling the Rhythm 201 e Controlling the Rhythm 194 e Controlling Glide
226. ettings of the browser but also all settings you have made in the Internet Settings displays including those related to Internet connection 1 Press the SETTING button in the control menu to call up the Internet Settings display 2 Press the Others button at the top right of the display Press the Initialize button to initialize the Internet settings A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation SETTING Browser LAN Wireless Others a Return the environment settings to the factory settings dE tinue EH EZ YES NO EXECUTE CANCEL Select YES to initialize the Internet settings or select NO to abort the operation DDK 7 Owner s Manual 221 Internet Direct Connection uoljoauuo9 eg jeu D Glossary of Internet Terms Broadband An Internet connection technology service such as ADSL and optical fiber that allows for high speed high volume data communication Browser The software used to search for access and view web pages For this instrument this refers to the display that shows the contents of the web pages Cookie A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using the Internet The function is similar to a preference file in a conventional computer program in that it remembers certain information such as your user name and password so you don t have to re enter the information
227. g names of the EL series Electone such as the EL 900 cannot When you change the name of an XG song the extension mid cannot be changed be changed 1 Select the song whose name you want to change For details on selecting a song see page 104 Press the TOOLS button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page DDK 7 Owner s Manual 113 Music Data Recorder MDR HAM JepJooay Lq ASNN Press the CHANGE SONG NAME button The following display appears gy 0R SONG SELECT SELECT SONG 1 use A 9 BR Zu 1 kan 4 zaj amor SA lan ae gt Move the cursor to the desired point by using the 4 gt buttons in the display or the Data Control dial Cursor DATA CONTROL SONGNAME Eina or AJ ej cj oj e Fj e E t i t t i t D i ees Select the desired character type alphabet upper or lowercase or symbol If you select Japanese as the Language in the Utility J a3 9O 3O F 3 f display page 16 you can also select Japanese language characters hiragana and kanji normal ABC abc SYMBOL size katakana half size katakana full size alphabet and full size symbols fin NOTE Select the desired character for entry A song name can contain up to 50 characters An XG song name can contain up to 46 characters After finished select OK to actually enter the name The LCD will return to the TOOLS Page display
228. ga CleanGuitar XG PianoStrings Cool RotorOrgan XG SlowRotary Mega Overdrive XG Dream Cool FullRocker XG FastRotary Mega Distortion XG BrightPiano StadiumOrgan XG ChurchOrgan XG NylonGuitar XG BritePnoKSP RotaryDrive XG ChurchOrgan3 XG NylonGuitar2 XG El GrandPiano PercOrgan XG ChurchOrgan2 XG NylonGuitar3 XG El GrPnoKSP RockOrgan1 XG NotreDame XG Vel GtrHarmo XG DetunedCP80 DanceOrgan XG OrganFlute XG Ukulele XG LayeredCP1 GospelOrg XG Trem OrganFl XG SteelGuitar XG LayeredCP2 DrawbarOrgan1 XG ReedOrgan XG SteelGuitar2 XG Honkytonk JazzOrgan1 XG PuffOrgan XG 12StrGuitar XG HonkytonkKSP RockOrgan2 XG Accordion XG Nylon amp Steel XG El Piano PurpleOrgan 6 XG Accordlt XG Steel amp Body 4 XG El Piano1KSP ElectricOrgan XG Harmonica XG Mandolin XG MellowEP1 DrawbarOrgan2 XG Harmonica2 XG JazzGuitar XG ChorusEP1 2 JazzOrgan2 XG TangoAccord XG MellowGuitar XG HardEl Piano RockOrgan3 XG TangoAccord2 XG JazzAmp XG VXfadeEl P1 ClickOrgan GUITAR XG CleanGuitar XG 60 sEl Piano1 MellowDraw 1 Live NylonGuitar XG ChorusGuitar XG El Piano2 BrightDraw Cool JazzGuitar XG MutedGuitar XG El Piano2KSP 60 sOrgan Cool El Guitar XG FunkGuitar1 XG ChorusEP2 JazzOrgan3 Live SteelGuitar XG MuteSteelGtr XG DXEPHard Tibia 16 4 Live DynoSteel1 XG FunkGuitar2 XG DXLegend TibiaFull Sweet Mandolin KG JazzMan KG DXPhaseEP Tibia 8 4 Cool FunkGuitar KG Overdriven XG DX AnalogEP Tibia 8 Cool Stratsphere XG GuitarPinch XG DXKotoEP Kinura 8 Cool VintageLead XG Distortion XG VXfa
229. gher and lower ranges Some of the Voices may contain cracking and or noisy sounds You may find these mainly in the wind instrument Voices These are purposely added effects to the Voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind instruments such as the pipe vibrations breath noises and squeaks When too many keys are pressed not all of the notes sound Total polyphonic capacity notes sounding for both Upper and Lower Keyboards is 14 notes When you turn the Pedal Polyphonic mode to on the total is 14 for all keyboards Upper Lower and Pedalboard Only one sound is heard when two notes of the Lead or Pedal Voices are simultaneously played For practical performance reasons the DDK 7 has been designed so that only one note of the Lead or Pedal Voices can be played at a time If you want the pedal Voice can be set to polyphonic mode page 42 The Pedal Voices do not sound even though the volume is properly set e The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on Turn off the mode in the display page 71 e TO LOWER buttons in the Pedal Voice sections are turned on Turn the function off page 29 When selecting a Voice or rhythm the Voice or rhythm title at the top of the LCD does not match the selected Voice or rhythm The currently assigned Voice or rhythm is displayed at the top of the LCD and remains until another Voice or rhythm has been selected When keys are pre
230. gistration Shift not only by using the right Footswitch but also the Foot Pedal El Reference Page 1 Set the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift display Registration Shift page 94 Select REGIST SHIFT in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the UTILITY display The Registration Shift function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal E FOOT PEDAL GLOBAL EXP wu AUX OUT PEDAL FOOT PEDALI FOOT PEDAL mmm RE POLARITY SUSTAIN J SLIDE J SUSTAIN J SLIDE 4 0 0 J SOLO J 4 0 0 J SOLO RHYTHM CONTROL J GLIDE J RHYTHN CONTROL J GLIDE ROTARY SPEAKER J REGIST SHIFT ROTARY SPEAKER MA EXPRESSION 3 Press the Foot Pedal when you want to change Registrations Controllers DDK 7 Owner s Manual 203 Q o 3 2 e ba S D 204 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Controlling Expression You can control Expression not only by using the Expression Pedal but also the Foot Pedal 1 Select EXPRESSION in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display The Expression function is now assigned to the Foot Pedal E FOOT PEDAL GLOBAL EXP J MDI AUX OUT GEDA FOOT PEDALI FOOT PEDAL mun EEN mum SUSTAIN J SLIDE J aam SLIDE J Kur solo Kur SOLO RHYTHM CONTROL am RHYTHM CONTROL GLIDE ROTARY SPEAKER J REGIST SHIFT EXPRESSION J OFF ROTARY SPEAKER J REGIST SHIFT J o e 2 Press the Foot Pedal down to contr
231. gle song with the following procedure REG 01 Registration REG 02 Registration to be added REG 50 Registration to be added de El Reference Page Next Regist page 97 ES Programming a Registration 1 First create the original settings you want to save then select the Sequence page 188 destination song For details on selecting a song see page 104 zl 2 Press the REGIST EDIT button in tte SONG SELECT Page to call up the Regist Edit display The Registration data which has previously been saved to the song is shown 3 Press the lowest blank empty Registration button Music Data Recorder MDR e crose ry ATA TO BE LOADED REGIST ker tow 4 Press the SAVE button The Registration data will be added When you play back this song the top Registration in this display will be loaded to the DDK 7 You can also change the order of the Registration data See page 118 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 117 HAM Jepsooey Lq ASNN 118 AA nore If the next Registration data contains User voices the DDK 7 may produce no sound for a few seconds while loading the Registration DDK 7 Owner s Manual Replacing Registrations The M D R also lets you change the Registrations of an existing song without changing the p
232. haCha Grandee D Show Time D Oriental Pad Galaxy March A Top Gear Rock A Love Song A 3 4 Fast Jazz A Majestic Sound A Spacious Piano Galaxy March B Top Gear Rock B Love Song B 3 4 Fast Jazz B Majestic Sound B 70 s Flute Pad Galaxy March C Top Gear Rock C Love Song C 3 4 Fast Jazz C Majestic Sound C Screen Ballad Galaxy March D Top Gear Rock D Love Song D 3 4 Fast Jazz D Majestic Sound D Brass Pad SE A Southern Pop A Movie Ballad A Twilight Sax A Orchestra Swing A Pop Rock Brass SE B Southern Pop B Movie Ballad B Twilight Sax B Orchestra Swing B Dance Brass SE C Southern Pop C Movie Ballad C Twilight Sax C Orchestra Swing C World Strings SE D Southern Pop D Movie Ballad D Twilight Sax D Orchestra Swing D DDK 7 Owner s Manual D Confirming the Version of Your DDK 7 You can confirm the version of your DDK 7 by the following procedure 1 Press the UTILITY button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the Utility Display Press the Version button in the display The Version dialog appears in the display Pressing OK closes the dialog Factory Set Initializing the DDK 7 Reference Page All current settings including Registration Memory User Voices User Rhythms and El 2 Saving Registrations LCD Display settings can be deleted at once by the following procedure Be careful AI E
233. hanai2 0 65 99 XG SoftCrystal 0 96 112 XG Pungi 0 66 99 XG LoudGlocken 0 97 112 XG Hichiriki 0 67 99 XG ChristmasBel 0 O 113 XG TinkleBell 0 68 99 XG VibeBells 0 96 113 XG Bonang 0 69 99 XG DigitalBells 0 97 113 XG Altair 0 70 99 XG AirBells 0 98 113 XG GamelanGongs 0 71 99 XG BellHarp 0 99 113 XG StereoGamelan 0 72 99 XG Gamelimba O 100 113 XG RamaCymbal 0 O 100 XG Atmosphere O 101 113 XG AsianBells 0 18 100 XG WarmAtmos 0 O 114 XG Agogo PERCUSSION 0 19 100 XG HollowRelease 0 O 115 XG SteelDrums 0 40 100 XG NylonEl Piano 0 97 115 XG GlassPerc 0 64 100 XG NylonHarp 0 98 115 XG ThaiBells 0 65 100 XG HarpVox 0 O 116 XG Woodblock 0 66 100 XG Atmos Pad 0 96 116 XG Castanets 0 67 100 XG Planet 0 O 117 XG TaikoDrum 0 0 101 XG Brightness 0 96 117 XG GranCassa 0 64 101 XG FantasyBells 0 O 118 XG MelodicTom 0 96 101 XG Smokey 0 64 118 XG MelodicTom2 0 O 102 XG Goblins 0 65 118 XG RealTom 0 64 102 XG GoblinsSynth 0 66 118 XG RockTom 0 65 102 XG Creeper 0 O 119 XG SynthDrum 0 66 102 XG RingPad 0 64 119 XG AnalogTom 0 67 102 XG Ritual 0 65 119 XG ElectroPerc 0 68 102 XG ToHeaven 0 O 120 XG Rev Cymbal 0 70 102 XG Night 0 O 121 XG GtrFretNoise SOUND o 71 102 XG Glisten o O 122 XG BreathNoise EFFECTS 0 96 102 XG
234. he overwrite position 102 DDK 7 Owner s Manual H Calling Up the M D R Display Press the MDR button in the panel to call up the M D R display All operations related to the M D R such as recording and playing your performances can be done in the M D R display DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH CET CE CE El MDR SONG SELECT TOOLS SONG 1 USB 01 S0NG REG 001 Ts SEs REWAINING 159 82 NB TEMPO a a E x6 Y The M D R display consists of two display pages the SONG SELECT Page and the TOOLS Page In the SONG SELECT Page you can select the song that you want to playback or to which you want to record your performance then playback or record The TOOLS Page has a variety of song utility operations such as copy delete rename etc Pressing any button other than the MDR button while the M D R display is open exits from the M D R display If you exit from the function inadvertently simply press the MDR button again to recall the M D R display All the instructions in this chapter are related to the M D R display To call up the M D R functions and the M D R display press the MDR button Bl Formatting External Media If you find that you are una
235. he Foot Pedal Solo on you can play only Lead Voice 2 and each time you release it Solo off you can play all Voices except Lead Voice 2 on the Upper Keyboard Notes on using Solo e Some Registration Menu settings reverse the polarity of the Foot Pedal for the Solo function In this condition the situation described above is reversed In other words each time you press the Foot Pedal you can play all Voices except Lead Voice 2 and each time you release it you can play only Lead Voice 2 on the Upper Keyboard To return the polarity to its original setting press the button in the display e Pressing the Foot Pedal while holding down a key will not turn Solo on for that key Solo will active when the next key is played after pressing the Foot Pedal e Lead Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if two or more keys are played However in the Solo mode Lead Voice 2 sounds for the last key played DDK 7 Owner s Manual 31 Voices SOdlo 32 BI Voice List This list shows all available Voices on the DDK 7 Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Voice Menu
236. he Voice Edit display In the AWM Page the tonal balance of the entire Voice can be corrected by some EQ parameters In the LAYER Page you can make detailed edits to each Element AWM Page VOICE EDIT er Bure wer 1 TED Ge Accordion 1 or uu KO EQ Lo to LOW FREQ LOW GAIN HIGH FREQ HIGH GAIN Element On Off switches The AWM1 AWM4 buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected Voice You can mute any of the Elements by simply pressing the corresponding button Pressing the button again cancels the mute O EQ LOW FREQ EQ LOW GAIN Sets the frequency and gain level of the low frequency band The EQ LOW FREQ slider sets the desired frequency band over a range of 32 Hz 2 0 kHz The EQ LOW GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band specified by the EQ LOW FREQ slider over a range of 12 dB 12 dB EQ HIGH FREQ EQ HIGH GAIN Sets the frequency and gain level of the high frequency band The EQ HIGH FREQ slider sets the desired frequency band over a range of 500 Hz 16 0 kHz The EQ HIGH GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band specified by the EQ HIGH FREQ slider over a range of 12 dB 12 dB EQ Equalizer Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the room The sound is divided into several frequency bands then by raising or lowering the level for each band the correct
237. his display and you press the Footswitch the rhythm section is switched to Intro 1 ENDING 1 ENDING 3 These functions correspond to the ENDING 1 3 buttons on the panel For example when the ENDING 1 button is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch the rhythm section is switched to Ending 1 After the ending pattern is played the rhythm stops You can also control the rhythm start stop or switch the rhythm sections by using an EI Reference Page optional Foot Pedal Foot pedal page 196 Controlling Glide You can control the Glide effect by using the Left Footswitch EE FOOTSMTCH ED ver MODE mr 1 mmm am SPEAKER GLIDE CONTROL TIME Pressing the Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by a half step and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original O Voice Selections UPPER1 UPPER2 LEAD1 LEAD2 LOWER1 LOWER2 Select the desired Voice section s to which the Glide function is to be applied o 2 2 o 5 E o Oo TIME Determines the speed of the Glide function or in other words how gradually the pitch returns when the Footswitch is released Higher values make the speed slower Range 5 El Reference Page You can also control the Glide effect by using an optional Foot Pedal Foot pedal page 196 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 195 19 04 U0D El Reference Page Rotary Speaker page 50 E Reference Page F
238. hythm Stop O x Electone Exclusive Code Hexadecimal Message Receive Transmit FO 43 70 ID 00 F7 Model ID Data x O FO 43 70 70 30 F7 Request to Send Model ID Data O x FO 43 70 70 40 nn 1 7F F7 Switch ON O O 00 Switch OFF O O FO 43 70 70 40 50 TL TH F7 Tempo O O FO 43 70 78 41 cc dd F7 2 Panel Switch Events O O FO 43 70 78 42 3C data F7 Current Registration Data O O FO 43 70 78 44 data 3 F7 MIDI Parameters O O FO 43 70 70 70 nn 4 F7 MDR O x FO 43 70 70 73 F7 EL ON O x FO 43 70 70 78 00 00 F7 Bar Signal x O X don t care N Device Number 0 on DDK 7 ID Model ID DDK 7 52H DDK 7 Owner s Manual 251 Appendix xipuaddy 1 Switches nn Switch Receive Transmit 45H Left Footswitch O 2 Panel Switch Events MIDI Exclusive Format Selectors FO 43 70 78 41 cc dd F7 cc Switch dd Remarks Code Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range OF Registration Memory 1 16 O 00 0F x Volume cc Switch dd Remarks Code Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range 12 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Volume O 00 7F O 00 7F Volume Data 00 MAX 7F 13 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Volume 00 7F 00 7F Volume Data 00 MAX 7F 14 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Volum
239. ickPad XG Ritual XG Clarinet MelodyMaker XG SoftPad XG ToHeaven PIPE BigTune XG SinePad XG Night 1 Sweet Flute TrumpetSaw XG HornPad XG Glisten Sweet PanFlute AttackSaw XG RotaryStrings XG BellChoir FluteEnsemble PercSquare XG PolySynthPad XG Echoes Flute XG SquareLead XG PolyPad80 XG Echoes2 PanFlute XG SquareLead2 XG ClickPad XG EchoPan ClassicalFlute 4 XG LMSquare 4 XG AnalogPad 4 XG EchoBells Piccolo XG Hollow XG SquarePad XG BigPan EthnicFlute XG Shroud XG ChoirPad XG SynthPiano Shakuhachi XG Mellow XG Heaven XG Creation Whistle XG SoloSine XG Itopia XG StarDust Recorder XG SineLead XG CCPad XG Reso amp Panning Ocarina XG SawtoothLead XG BowedPad XG Sci Fi XG Piccolo XG SawtoothLead2 XG Glacier XG Starz XG Flute XG ThickSaw XG GlassPad XG Recorder XG DynamicSaw XG MetallicPad XG PanFlute XG DigitalSaw XG TinePad 2 XG BlownBottle XG BigLead XG PanPad XG Shakuhachi XG HeavySynth XG HaloPad XG Whistle XG WaspySynth XG SweepPad XG Ocarina XG PulseSaw XG Shwimmer XG Dr Lead XG Converge 5 XG VelocityLead 5 XG PolarPad XG Seq Analog XG Celestial XG CalliopeLead XG PurePad XG ChiffLead XG Rubby XG CharangLead XG DistortedLead XG WireLead XG VoiceLead XG SynthAahs XG VoxLead XG FifthsLead XG BigFive XG Bass amp Lead XG Big amp Low 6 XG Fat amp Perky XG SoftWhirl DDK 7 Owner s Manual 181 Rhythm Program wes
240. ile you listen to the parts being played back start playing the melody on the Upper keyboard When the end of the recorded performance is reached playback is automatically stopped The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts Punch in Recording This lets you re record a specific phrase or section which you dont want to use either that of a specific part s or all parts mn NOTE This function is best used when the phrase to be Select the song which contains the phrase you want to change re recorded has definite beginning and end points with slight pauses before and after For details on selecting a song see page 104 Press the gt Play button to start playback of the song Press the HI Pause button at the point you want to execute punch in recording Press the RECORD button The recording display appears indicating that the Music Data Recorder is ready to record gt W N Set the parts which you want to change to REC status and other parts to PLAY 6 Press the gt Play button to start punch in recording Play the new phrase as you want it to be changed 7 Press the W Stop button to quit the punch in recording as soon as you reach the end of the phrase D Changing the Song Name You can name the song such as giving it a title or indicating the date on which it was WI NOTE recorded However son
241. ine communications To look up the meaning of these terms refer to the Internet Glossary page 222 Contents 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet 209 3 About the Internet Settings Display 218 2 Accessing the Website from the DDK 7 210 EE 218 e Scrolling the Display 211 ELAN ance AA 219 e Following Links 211 e Wireless LAN ii Shon edn oe 219 e Refreshing a Web Page Canceling Loading of a POU EE 220 Web PAGE KIA Kaa 213 4 Exiting from the Internet Display 221 e Return to the Previous Web Page 213 5 Initializing Internet Settings 221 e Saving Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages 214 6 Glossary of Internet Terms 222 e Editing Bookmarks 216 e Changing the Home Page 217 EN Connecting the Instrument to the Internet You can connect the instrument to a full time online connection ADSL optical fiber cable Internet etc via a router or a modem equipped with a router Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connecting the instrument since no modem or router settings can be made from the instrument itself To use the Internet connection you will first need to subscribe to an Internet service or provider Connection example 1 Connecting by cable using a modem without router
242. ing of the song 4 2 Insert a USB flash memory to the USB TO DEVICE terminal Select a blank song for recording your performance For details on selecting a song see page 104 If you want to overwrite an existing song already containing performance data you will need to delete it beforehand Press the RECORD button in the display The following display appears indicating that you can record your performance fy MDR REMAINING 154 33 MB REC STANDBY PART XG_VOLUME REC REC REC REC PLAY 100 g Press the gt Play button An hourglass icon appears indicating that Registration data is currently being read After the hourglass disappears begin playing When you finish playing press the M Stop button in the display The recording is finished and the LCD returns to the SONG SELECT Page The song to which your performance is recorded is automatically named SONG XX xx indicates song number You can change the song name as desired For details see page 113 Re recording Retry If you make a mistake during recording you can re record the song from the beginning 1 Press the RETRY button while the song is still running This automatically stops recording and returns you to the starting point of the song m REMAINING 14 50 MB RECORDING PART XG_VOLUME REC REC REC REC PLAY 100 TINE 00 01 a ECORD RETRY USTOM P Press the gt Play
243. ings OberBrass XG MutePickBass XG SlwAtkStrings TrumpetEns XG FretlessBass XG ArcoStrings MellowHorns XG FretlessBass2 XG 60 sStrings BigBandBrass XG FretlessBass3 XG Orchestra PopBrass XG FretlessBass4 XG Orchestra2 BrassHi XG Syn Fretless XG TremOrchestra AnalogBrass XG SmoothFretless XG Vel Strings TromboneSection XG SlapBass1 XG Strings2 SmallBrass 4 XG ResonantSlap 4 XG S SlowStrings 4 SoftAnalog XG PunchThumb XG LegatoStrings FunkyAnalog XG SlapBass2 XG WarmsStrings TechnoBrass XG Vel SwitchSlap XG Kingdom SynthBrass KG SynthBass1 XG 70 sStrings OberHorns XG SynBass1Dark XG Strings3 FatSynBrass XG FastResoBass XG SynStrings1 XG Trumpet XG AcidBass XG ResoSirings XG Trumpet2 XG Clavi Bass XG SynStrings4 XG BriteTrumpet XG TechnoBass XG SynStrings5 XG WarmTrumpet XG Orbiter XG SynStrings2 XG Trombone XG SquareBass XG ChoirAahs XG Trombone2 XG RubberBass XG StereoChoir XG Tuba XG Hammer XG ChoirAahs2 XG Tuba2 XG SynthBass2 XG MellowChoir XG MutedTrumpet XG MellowSyBass XG ChoirStrings XG FrenchHorn 5 XG SequencedBass 5 XG VoiceOohs 5 XG FrenchHornSolo XG ClickSynBass XG SynBass2Dark XG SmoothSyBass XG ModulrSyBass XG DXBass XG XWireBass 180 DDK 7 Owner s Manual XG SynthVoice XG SynthVoice2 XG Choral XG AnalogVoice XG OrchestraHit XG OrchestraHit2 XG Impact XG FrenchHorn2 XG HornOrchestra XG BrassSection
244. ini OberSweep XG Crystal GrowlSax OctaveHook Messenger XG SynthDr Comp BaritoneSax TranceLead Wave2001 XG Popcorn Live SaxSection FireWire FarEast XG TinyBells Saxappeal Analogon Disclosure XG RoundGlocken MoonLight Blaster BrightOber XG GlockenChime BalladBrass Skyline DarkPad XG ClearBells SaxyMood SquareLead Mystery XG ChorusBells SopranoSax 2 SawtoothLead 2 Sirius 2 XG SynthMallet TenorSax PopLead S amp HGroove XG SoftCrystal AltoSax ProLead Velo Ashrami XG LoudGlocken SaxStack BrightMini EveningStars XG ChristmasBel Live SaxSect Sft TinyLead AngelVibes XG VibeBells Live SaxSect Hrd FunkyLead Atmosphere KG DigitalBells 2 WoodwindEns Paraglide XenonPad XG AirBells Sweet Clarinet Robolead Equinox XG BellHarp Sweet Oboe Fargo GlassPad XG Gamelimba EnglishHorn Portatone Fantasia XG Atmosphere Bassoon BigLead DX Pad XG WarmAtmos Clarinet Warp Symbiont XG HollowRelease Oboe Adrenaline Stargate XG NylonEl Piano XG SopranoSax Stardust Areab1 XG NylonHarp XG AltoSax AeroLead DarkMoon XG HarpVox KG SaxSection MiniLead lonosphere XG Atmos Pad XG HyperAltoSax 3 Impact 3 GoldenAge 3 XG Planet XG TenorSax SunBell Solaris XG Brightness XG BreathyTenor UnderHeim TimeTravel XG FantasyBells XG SoftTenorSax HiBias Millennium XG Smokey XG TenorSax2 Vinylead Dunes XG Goblins XG BaritoneSax PanLead XG NewAgePad XG GoblinsSynth 3 XG Oboe Stringbells XG Fantasy XG Creeper XG EnglishHorn CrystalEyes XG WarmPad XG RingPad XG Bassoon Padbells XG Th
245. ion Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 8 1 53 460 3273 YAMAHA Yamaha Manual Library http www yamaha co jp manual U R G Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division Yamaha Corporation 2006 Yamaha Corporation WJ07570 xxxMWDHx x 01A0 This document is printed on chlorine free ECF paper with soy ink Printed in Japan
246. ion Select OK to format the media or CANCEL to abort the operation 3 Selecting a Song In the SONG SELECT Page you can select a blank song to which you want to record your performance or save the Registration settings or you can select a desired song for playback To select the desired song In the SONG SELECT Page songs in the currently selected media are displayed First call up the desired media and folder if necessary in the display then select the desired song Check the currently selected media at the top of the display For example if you want to select a song in the USB flash memory confirm that USB XX is displayed at the top of the display Currently selected media folder MDR GONGISELECT T0AS E age CI Jm y AA A are FOLDER SELECT PART REGIST kaba AJ teo mam xe SETUP EDIT y RESET lt a EN EN EN ES O For information on selecting the desired media see page 107 2 Press desired song button in the display E x eference Pages Referring to the song name and icons select the desired song The selected song g l S button is highlighted in orange Changing the Song Name page 113 8 S Song Icons page 108 Song containing data Blank song containing no data wa One display contains eight songs Song 1 Song 8 To change the display page and call up other songs press the appropriate number buttons in the display For example pressing the 2 butt
247. ion is made This DDK 7 has a two band high and low digital equalizer that lets you adjust the overall sound according to the type of music you play classical music being more refined and soft pop music more crisp and rock music more dynamic LAYER Page VOICE EDIT NA UPPER voce 1 wm AYER SAVE Accordion 1 AWM2 AM ANNA 1 Dom me EE EH g EE ebe SE WOICE Ei W I oe er a Ll Element select buttons Select the Element you wish to edit Element On Off switches The AWM 1 AWM4 buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected Voice You can mute any of the Elements by simply pressing the corresponding button Pressing the button again cancels the mute Muting all other Elements except for the one you are editing lets you clearly hear that single Element for ease in editing Note that when some Elements are muted playing the keyboard in certain key areas or with certain velocities may result in no sound Display switch buttons The LAYER Page contains three pages The EJ buttons are used to switch among them LAYER Page 1 S VOICE o o gt kd TUPPER VOICE 1 Am LAYER SAVE Accordion 1 Am mus Awa These buttons wn ano ES EY switch the display O VOICE ELEMENT Indicates the Voice Element currently being edited For example the screen above shows that Element 1 of Accordion 1 is being edited You can also call up anothe
248. irm that the desired song to be converted is displayed in the upper half of the display If you want to change the song press the CHANGE button of the Change From section to call up the Song Select display and select the desired song Press the CHANGE button of the Change To section in the display then select the destination If the source song contains two or more Registration banks you ll need to make ready the same number of destination songs to save the converted data Press the EXECUTE button in the display to start conversion A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation Select CONVERT to convert to EL format or CANCEL to abort the operation If the remaining memory of the floppy disk is insufficient conversion cannot be executed An error message appears and the operation is cancelled Converting from EL format You can convert the songs in the floppy disk created with an EL series Electone such as the EL 900 to the DDK 7 format and save it to a USB flash memory To use the floppy disk you ll need to install the optional UD FDO1 floppy disk drive Depending on the original song the sound or tempo of the converted song may differ from the original data or the Next Song function of the original song may not be effective Insert the floppy disk that contains the song you want to convert then select the source song For details on selecting a song see page 104 In the TOOLS Page press the CONVERT
249. is is in the folder that contains protected original song You cannot edit this song To move the protected song in a USB flash memory with a computer you ll need to use the Musicsoft Downloader application If you move the song without Musicsoft Downloader the song cannot be played back Musicsoft Downloader can be obtained at the following Internet address http music yamaha com download DDK 7 Owner s Manual 131 Music Data Recorder MDR HAM Jepsooey Lq ASNN Converting to XG This function allows you to convert the DDK 7 song data to XG format data You can playback the data using XG devices The converted XG song data may sound differently from the original data Confirm that the media should contain enough amount of available memory before the conversion The protected songs cannot be converted to XG format 1 Selects a song to be converted to XG For details on selecting a song see page 104 2 Press the TOOLS button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page 3 Press the CONVERT TO XG button A message will appear prompting confirmation of the converted data MDR SONG SELECT GTS MDR SONG SELECT E sone 1 EH E sone 1 IA USB 01 50NG REG 001 USB 01 SONG REG_001 SETTING SONG mame memory FORMAT Check the converted data YG SONG ap wa gt meon ra ales CONVERT CONVERT CONVERT TOEL FROMEL TO XG EXECUTE CANCEL J JJ 4
250. isplay you can adjust the basic Voice controls including panning touch tone INITIAL AFTER AFTER 8 and volume The displays of the various Voice sections have slight differences in their functions O PAN Determines the position of the Voice in the stereo image Seven pan positions are available TOUCH TONE The Touch Tone function gives you expressive control over the volume and timbre of a Voice All Voices are provided with this expressive function making it possible to perfectly reproduce the subtle dynamic and tonal changes of actual instruments Two types of keyboard touch affect this function Initial Touch and After Touch 1 INITIAL touch WA NOTE Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you play the keys The harder you play the keys the greater the volume and the brighter the Initial Touch may not be bal become effective on some organ Higher settings make the change wider Minimum setting produces no effect KG Range 0 14 2 AFTER touch mn NOTE Controls volume and timbre according to the pressure you apply to the keys After Touch is not applied to after playing them the Pedal Voices The harder you press down on the keys the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will become Higher settings make the change wider Minimum setting produces no effect NOTE Range 0 14 After Touch has no effect on percussive Voices such as piano or vibraphon
251. ital Interface allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other by sending and receiving compatible Note Control Change Program Change and various other types of MIDI data or messages MIDI Messages of the DDK 7 MIDI messages can be divided into two groups the Channel Messages and System Messages Channel Messages consist of data related to the performance on the keyboard for a specific channel System Messages consist of data that allows several MIDI devices to communicate with each other Channel Messages Each time you play the keyboard on the DDK 7 channel messages indicating which keys are played and how strongly are transmitted via a specific channel Similarly the DDK 7 can be played remotely when receiving this data from an external keyboard Note On Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0 through 127 The reception note range is C 2 0 G8 127 C3 60 Note Off Generated when a key is released Velocity Indicates how strongly the key is played The range is 1 127 For more detailed information see MIDI Data Format on page 248 and MIDI Implementation Chart on page 261 e Program Change Program Change messages allow you to change Voices in the middle of a song With these messages you can change the Registrations of the DDK 7 For more detailed information see MIDI Data Format on page 248 and MIDI Implementation Chart on page 261 e Control Change Control Change Message
252. itch page 42 O O O O z Feet page 42 O O O O H Reverb send level page 42 O O O O O O 5 Brilliance page 42 O O O O 3 Volume page 42 O O O O O O E Priority page 42 OF 2 Poly Pedal page 42 o E o o o o e polyphonic mode E Vibrato page 43 O O 3 Touch Vibrato page 44 O O 2 Lead Slide page 44 O O Transpose page 44 O O O O Tune page 44 O O O O Effect 1 2 page 45 O O O O ng Reverb page 46 O gt Sustain page 49 O O O O O O E E Rotary Speaker page 50 o Priority is applied only for Lead Voice 2 Contents 1 Selecting from the Voice Condition display 41 2 Selecting from the panel 46 3 Effect III ceed rai ee aad EN 52 DDK 7 Owner s Manual EI Selecting from the Voice Condition display Choose a Voice on the panel then press the same button on the panel again or press the name of the selected Voice in the display The Voice Condition display appears Voice Condition Display for each Voice has four pages that can be switched by pressing 1 4 buttons at the top right of the display Voice Condition Page 1 P LEAD VOICE 2 em 2 355 4 PEDAL VOICE 1 ED 2 3 4 aa 1 mm oe 1 voice E LT TOUCH TONE PITCH TET EEN BALANCE VOLUME ANN Y TOUCH TONE PITH EET ER BALANCE VOLUME POLY O INITIAL AFTER AFTER 8 8 0 20 ee Lal p I L ks E 0 e WI i IFE In this d
253. ive channel of the DDK 7 is fixed at channel 1 for the Upper Keyboard channel 2 for the Lower Keyboard and channel 3 for the Pedalboard This means that when you are using another MIDI device to play the DDK 7 s Voices you must set the MIDI transmit channel s of the connected device to match the receive channel s of the DDK 7 You can select the transmit channel for each keyboard Upper Lower and Pedal from channels 1 16 See page 238 for more information DDK 7 Owner s Manual 237 Connections SUONOBUUOD 238 DDK 7 Owner s Manual D MIDI Control When you connect your DDK 7 with a second MIDI device such as a synthesizer or computer you can determine how the DDK 7 controls that MIDI device or how the DDK77 is controlled 1 Press the UTILITY button in the panel to call up the Utility Display Press the MIDI button at the top right of the display to call up the MIDI Page E MIDI CONTROL GLOBAL EXP j MDI AUX OUT F PEDAL UA UPPER LOWER PEDAL SUSTAIN EXPRESSION 2ND EXP m cz ons cmo cmo cm WIDI OUT FILTER INTERNAL EXTERNAL AFTER 2ND EXP RHYTHM LEAD1 SYNC EXPRESSION ad B O OUTPUT For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be transmitted Any channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to the Upper keyboard the Lower keyboard the Pedalboard Sustain Expression Pedal and 2nd Expression Pedal The MIDI messages on each key
254. jacks you can connect your DDK 7 to external powered speakers If you re connecting the DDK 7 to a mono device use only the OUTPUT L L R jack O Speaker Left B i d 8 OUTPUT L L R Using a mixer for live performance Generally when you use the DDK 7 on stage in concert etc you should connect it to a mixer By using a mixer you can easily adjust the volume and tone quality of each component To connect to a mixer use the AUX OUT jacks of the DDK 7 The DDK 7 features two types of AUX OUT jacks MAIN and SUB allowing you to assign some parts of the DDK 7 s output to the SUB jacks and the other parts to the MAIN jacks In this way you can apply effects to the specific parts or adjust the volume balance among the parts with an external mixer For details see Selecting Outputs for Each Part on page 228 Connection example Main Speakers pa ex Powerd amp Speakers sa ammo NN External Effector cee o mo Jo AB i BE sone Parts AUX OUT AUX OUT i MAIN SUB UL R R 1442 a Si oleleeelel o e ojojojojo o ojojojoo olololololo o o Quy TH oe na E Jacks Output Type Location AUK
255. l 1 Press the UTILITY button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the Utility Display 2 Move the LCD BRIGHTNESS slider by touching it directly or using the Data Control dial Higher settings make the display brighter and lower settings make it darker O UTILITY EXP J MIDI AUX OUT F PEDAL Go DATA CONTROL 8167 IOUCH PANEI LCD MIC TRANSPOSE PITCH _ INITIALIZE LANGUAGE SOUND BRIGHTNESS REVERB VOLUME LCD BRIGHTNESS DDK 7 Owner s Manual 17 aping Aojonpojjuj yoINO 18 DDK 7 Owner s Manual ES Voice Display You can visually confirm the currently assigned Voices to each keyboard currently selected rhythm Registration Shift and so on in the Voice Display How to call up the Voice Display The Voice Display always appears when the DDK 7 is turned on To call up the Voice Display from any other display press the VOICE DISPLAY button DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH C E E y E VOICE DISPLAY 2D Gy UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 ChamStrs1 HEAR azma Leg PEDAL VOICE 1 LONER KEYBOARD Feta MAA REGISTRATION HHop Light OFF TEMPO BAR BEAT 120 STOP FingrBass1 The Voice Display consists of three different pages that can be switched by pre
256. le L Snare Drum Roll Pandeiro Tambourine PERCUSSION 3 Analog SD Bells Castanet Tambourine SNARE BRUSH Hand Claps Jingle Bells Castanet SD Brush Shot 1 Finger Snap Bell Tree Jingle Bells SD Brush Shot 2 Scratch Triangle Open Bell Tree SD Brush Roll Noise Percussion Triangle Mute Triangle Open TOM PERCUSSION 3 Wood Block H Triangle Mute Tom 1 otsuzumi 1 Wood Block L Wood Block H Tom 2 otsuzumi 2 Sticks Wood Block L Tom 3 otsuzumi 3 Whip Slap Sticks Tom 4 otsuzumi 4 Finger Snap Whip Slap Tom Brush Shot 1 Ohtsuzumi 1 Hand Clap Finger Snap Tom Brush Shot 2 Ohtsuzumi 2 PERCUSSION 4 Hand Clap Tom Brush Shot 3 Taiko 1 HiQ PERCUSSION 4 Tom Brush Shot 4 Taiko 2 Click Noise HiQ Synth Tom 1 Ohdaiko 1 Scratch H Click Noise Synth Tom 2 Ohdaiko 2 Scratch L Scratch H Synth Tom 3 Kakegoe 1 Seq Click L Scratch L BASS DRUM Kakegoe 2 Seq Click H Seq Click L Bass Drum Light Kakegoe 3 Metronome Click Seq Click H Bass Drum Heavy Bass Drum Attack Synth Bass Drum CYMBAL Metronome Bell Metronome Click Standard Kit 1 Bass Drum March Crash Cymbal 1 Standard Kit 2 CYMBAL Concert BD Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Metronome Bell CYMBAL Analog BD Short Splash Cymbal Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Analog BD Long Chinese Cymbal Splash Cymbal Crash Cymbal 2
257. lect L R L amp R Determines the input configuration Effect Type Effect Type HALL 1 PLATE 2 HALL 2 WHITE ROOM HALL 3 TUNNEL HALL CANYON HALL L BASEMENT ROOM 1 XG HALL 1 ROOM 2 XG HALL 2 ROOM 3 XG ROOM 1 ROOM 4 XG ROOM 2 ROOM S XG ROOM 3 ROOM M XG STAGE 1 ROOM L XG STAGE 2 STAGE 1 XG PLATE STAGE 2 GM PLATE PLATE 1 Parameter Value Description Time 0 3 30 0 s Determines the decay time of the reverb Dry Wet D63 gt W D lt W63 Determines the balance of the original sound dry and the effect sound wet DELAY Produces delayed distinct repeats of the sound or echoes This is also useful for creating rhythmic repeats in the sound Effect Type DELAY LCR XG DLY LCR DELAY LR ECHO CROSS DELAY TEMPO DELAY TEMPO ECHO TEMPO CROSS DDK 7 Owner s Manual Feedback Delay Time 0 1 1486 0 msec Determines the feedback time of the delayed repeats The larger the value the onger the time between delayed repeats For Delay LR the left and right channels can be set independently Feedback Delay 1 0 1 1486 0 msec Determines the first feedback delay time of the L R delay Feedback Delay 2 0 1 1486 0 msec Determines the second feedback delay time of the L R delay Feedback Level 63 63 Determines the amount of delayed repeats in the sound When this is set to 0 the delayed repe
258. lect the copy source location GD sa emp DDK 7 Owner s Manual KBP 1 Select the copy source Preset 1 here from the list A message appears prompting confirmation of the operation Press the COPY button in the display to copy Preset 1 When COPY is selected a Completed message momentarily appears in the display Press the CANCEL button in the display to abort the operation Detailed settings for each percussion instrument You can independently adjust the settings of pan pitch reverb and volume for each instrument The settings here are system settings that cannot be memorized to Registration memory 1 Turn off the volume of the relevant keyboard the keyboard to which the instrument to be changed is assigned 2 Press the SETUP button at the top right of the K B P display to call up the SETUP Page 3 Press the appropriate key the key to which the instrument to be changed is assigned The selected instrument s name is shown on the display and you can change its settings ma hati ke eu vm SETUP The name of the ae selected instrument Ride Cymbal 1 PITCH PITCH REVERB VOLUME RESET COARSE FINE Ii i gt HINA SN coal E 66606 d O PAN Determines the position of the currently selected instrument in the stereo image Seven pan positions are available PITCH COARSE Adjusts the pitch of the curre
259. lly connected between a modem and a computer although some modems have a built in router Server A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network providing access to files and services Site Short for website this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together For example the collection of web pages whose addresses begin with http www yamaha co jp is referred to as the Yamaha site SSID This is an identification name for specifying a particular network over a wireless LAN connection Communication is possible only between terminals with matching SSID names SSL Short for Secure Sockets Layer a standard for transmitting confidential data such as credit card numbers over the Internet Subnet mask A setting used to divide a large scale network into several smaller networks URL Short for Uniform Resource Locator a string of characters used to identify and link to specific websites and pages on the Internet A complete URL usually starts with the characters http Web page Refers to each individual page that makes up a website Wireless LAN ALAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless cable free connection 222 DDK 7 Owner s Manual BE Connections On the backside and front left side of the DDK 7 keyboard is a separate panel equipped with various input output terminals and miscellaneous controls
260. load the latest MIDI driver software from the Yamaha web site at http music yamaha com download Connecting your DDK 7 to a computer opens up a whole new world of musical possibilities You can save your original songs to computer and create notation score writing application or sequencing software is needed and even upload your original DDK 7 song data to your own website to promote your talents or share songs with your friends You can also control the DDK 7 from the computer for example by playing a MIDI file on the computer to play back the sounds of your DDK 7 Using the USB terminal Using the DDK 7 s USB TO HOST terminal and a standard USB cable connect the DDK 7 and the computer USB cable USB TO HOST E BLA 88 iG Computer MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminals When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal make sure to observe the following points Failing to do so may result in freezing of the computer corrupting data and even losing data If the computer or the instrument freezes turn the power to the instrument off or restart the computer e Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal exit from any power saving mode
261. mated Effect Type Effect Type CHORUS 1 GM CHORUS 4 CHORUS 2 FB CHORUS XG CHORUS 1 CELESTE 1 XG CHORUS 2 CELESTE 2 XG CHORUS 3 CELESTE 3 XG CHORUS 4 CELESTE 4 GM CHORUS 1 SYMPHONIC GM CHORUS 2 XG SYMPHONIC GM CHORUS 3 ENS DETUNE Parameter Value Description LFO Freq 0 00 39 7 Hz Determines the frequency of oscillation or the speed of the wavering effect LFO Depth 0 127 Determines the depth of oscillation or the amount of the wavering effect nput Mode Mono Stereo Determines the input configuration Detune 50 50 cent Determines the amount of detuning or pitch shifting is applied to the delayed repeats L DelayTime 0 0 50 0 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the left channel R DelayTime 0 0 50 0 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the right channel Dry Wet D63 gt W D lt W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and the effect sound FLANGER This creates a metallic periodic sweeping effect similar to Chorus but with a brighter more resonant sound Effect Type FLANGER 1 FLANGER 2 XG FLANGER 1 XG FLANGER 2 XG FLANGE
262. matically playing the Lower keyboard does not produce any sound even when the keys are played Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another the Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of an Intro Ending pattern The Accompaniment cannot be heard even when an appropriate Accompaniment type is selected and the rhythm has been started e The Accompaniment volume may have been set to O Be sure to raise the Accompaniment volume in the Rhythm Condition display page 71 e All Accompaniment parts may be set to off mute Set the desired part on page 70 The harmony notes of the Melody On Chord function cannot be heard The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead Voices Increase the volume of the Upper Keyboard Voices The bass phrase of the Auto Bass Cord cannot be heard The pedal polyphonic mode may be set to on Turn it off in the Voice Condition display page 42 REGISTRATION MEMORY Certain functions have not been memorized to Registration Memory Some functions cannot be memorized Refer to page 90 264 DDK 7 Owner s Manual VOICE EDITING During Voice editing the specified Voice isn t heard even when the keyboard is played e The Element is turned to mute or its level is set to minimum Turn it to on or increase the volume e You may have played keys outside the range of Note Limit Play only keys within th
263. mbale 1 Low Mid Tom H Mid Tom L CYMBAL Timbale 2 High High Tom Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 Timbale 2 Low BASS DRUM High Tom Crash Cymbal 2 Timbale 3 High Kick BASS DRUM Crash Cym Mute Timbale 3 Low Kick Tight Kick Short Ride Cymbal 1 Timbale 4 High Kick Soft Kick Tight Ride Cymbal 2 Timbale 4 Low PERCUSSION 1 Kick So Ride Cymbal Cup Cowbell 1 Conga H Open PERCUSSION 1 Orchestra Cymbal Cowbell 2 Conga L Conga H Open Orch Cymbal Roll Cowbell 3 Conga H Mute Conga L Orch Cymbal Mute Cowbell 4 Bongo H Conga H Mute Cymbal March PERCUSSION 1 Bongo L Bongo H Cym Brush Shot Cabasa Timbale H Bongo L Tam Tam Shaker Timbale L Timbale H HI HAT Maracas High Cowbell Timbale L Hi Hat Open Maracas Low Claves Cowbell Hi Hat Close Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Hi Hat Pedal 1 Guiro Long Guiro Short Guiro Long Hi Hat Pedal 2 Wood Block High Maracas Guiro Short Analog HH Open Wood Block Mid Vibraslap Maracas Analog HH Close Wood Block Low PERCUSSION 2 Vibraslap SNARE DRUM Claves Surdo Mute PERCUSSION 2 Snare Drum Light Castane Surdo Open Surdo Mute Snare Drum Heavy Vibraslap Cuica Mute Surdo Open Snare Drum Rim 1 PERCUSSION 2 Cuica Open Cuica Mute Snare Drum Rim 2 Agogo High Cabasa Cuica Open SD Accent 1 Agogo Low Shaker Cabasa SD Accent 2 Triangle Open Agogo H Shaker SD Reverb 1 Triangle Mute Agogo L Agogo H SD Reverb 2 Windbell Down Samba Whistle H Agogo L Synth Snare Drum Windbell Up Samba Whistle L Samba Whistle H Orch Snare Drum Tambourine PERCUSSION 3 Samba Whist
264. ment 70 e Detailed settings for each percussion instrument 4 Automatic Accompaniment Auto Bass Chord 83 A BC UU AA AA 71 e Kit Assign et 85 EN Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button A total of 274 rhythms can be instantly selected from the Rhythm Menu Display which is called up by pressing the RHYTHM button Selecting a rhythm In the explanation below 16Beat 1 in the POPS category is selected as an example 1 Press the Rhythm button in the RHYTHM section on the front panel LT K B P 1 K B P 2 RHYTHM Rhythm button The Rhythm Menu is displayed 60 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Select the desired Rhythm category with the category buttons in the display You can also choose the User category to select a User rhythm you have created in the Rhythm Pattern Program RHYTHM Rhythm category MARCH Marching Band 1 EEN EE Sege eps 6 8 March 1 6 8 March 2 6 8 Kids 6 8 Organ March A s For example to call up 16Beat 1 select the POPS category RHYTHM POPS 8Beat Light 1 get Lisht 1 Beat Light 2 8Beat Lisht 3 Beat Light 4 Fok Rock 1 Fok Rock 2 os get Asian Pops Unplugged 1 Unplugged 2 Unplugged 3 Beat adria The name of the selected category Pops is displayed on the upper left The Rhythm name shown under
265. ment volume and reverb Touch the slider in the display or use the Data Control dial to adjust the volume reverb RHYTHM Lee Big Band 1 RUYT BITIN DATA CONTROL MER LC WODE MENOR REVERB d i Automatic Accompaniment Auto Bass Chord A B C REVERB VOLUME LOVER at l jala est el CHORD ABC The Auto Bass Chord A B C function works with the Rhythm section of the DDK 7 to automatically produce bass accompaniment as you play It adds an entirely new dimension to your performance by effectively putting a full backing band at your disposal There are three modes used for producing Automatic Accompaniment patterns EI Reference Page Before using the A B C function turn Pedal Poly off If Pedal Poly is set to on the bass pattern of the A B C will not sound POLY page 42 To set the A B C function Rhythm Condition Display RHYTHM Big Band 1 Ge MENU AUTO FILL PERCUSSION ACCOWPANINENT ARC MODE MEMORY VOLUME 16 REVERB VOLUME all Select the A B C modes in the Rhythm Condition Display emm VERB K B P 1 K B P 2 RHYTHM SINGLE FINGERED CUSTOM CHORD ABC DDK 7 Owner s Manual 71 Rhythm Keyboard Percussion uoissnoja dq p3gogAsy Wy AyH 72 Bil wore When playing certain chords aug dim7 sus4 6 and m6 make sure to play the root of the chord a
266. mines the central requency of the high frequency range that is boosted or cut EQ Hi Gain 12 12 dB Determines the amount over which the high frequency range is boosted or cut Low High L63 gt H L lt H63 Determines the volume Balance balance between low and high speakers MIC L R Angle 0 180deg Determines the L R angle of he apparent microphone Dist Drive 0 127 Determines the depth of distortion The higher the value the greater the amount of distortion Amp Type Off Stack Combo Determines the amplifier type Tube simulated Drive 0 127 Determines the amount of distortion DISTORTION This effect adds distortion to the sound Effect Type Effect Type DIST HARD 1 V DIST HARD DIST HARD 2 V DIST SOFT DIST SOFT 1 COMP DIST DIST SOFT 2 XG CMP DIST ST DIST HARD AMP SIM ST DIST SOFT XG AMP SIM OVERDRIVE ST AMP SIM 1 ST OVERDRIVE ST AMP SIM 2 XG DIST XG ST AMP XG ST DIST Parameter Value Description Drive 0 127 Determines the amount or degree of distortion in the sound Amp Type Off Stack Combo Determines the type of Tube amplifier that is simulated LPF Cutoff 1 0 18kHz Thru Determines the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter Frequencies above this value are cut or filtered out OutputLevel 0 127 Determines the level or volume of the processed sound EQ Low Gai
267. molo Strings H AMBIENCE THRU Octave Brass 4 H THRU THRU 3 Strings187 8 THRU THRU Octave Brass 5 D THRU THRU Strings2 amp Viola 8 THRU THRU Octave Brass 6 8 THRU THRU Strings3 amp 4 H AMBIENCE THRU Octave Brass 7 8 ECHO THRU Strings78Violin5 8 THRU THRU 3 Trumpet 1 H THRU THRU Violin5 amp Cello 8 HM ENHANCER THRU Trumpet 2 H THRU THRU Octave Strings 1 8 THRU THRU Trumpet 3 D THRU THRU Octave Strings 2 8 THRU THRU Trumpet 4 8 THRU THRU 4 Violin 1 8 THRU THRU Trumpet 5 H HM ENHANCER THRU Violin 2 H AMBIENCE RU Trumpet 6 H THRU THRU Violin 3 H THRU THRU Trumpet 7 H J AMBIENCE THRU Violin 4 8 THRU THRU Muted Trumpet 1 H THRU THRU Violin 5 H AMBIENCE THRU Muted Trumpet 2 H THRU THRU Violin 6 8 AMBIENCE THRU Muted Trumpet 3 H PHASER 1 THRU Viola 8 AMBIENCE THRU Flugel Horn 1 H THRU THRU Cello 1 H RESONATOR THRU Flugel Horn 2 H THRU THRU Cello 2 8 THRU THRU 4 Trombone 1 16 8 IST 2BAND EQ THRU Pizzicato Violin 8 AMBIENCE ROOM S Trombone 2 16 8 THRU THRU CONTRABASS Trombone 3 16 8 THRU THRU 1 Contrabass 1 8 THRU THRU Trombone 4 16 8 THRU THRU Contrabass 2 8 THRU THRU Muted Trombone 1 16 8 THRU THRU Contrabass 3 16 8 THRU THRU Muted Trombone 2 16 8 ST3BAND EQ PHASER 1 Contrabass 4 8 THRU THRU Contrabass 5 H AMBIENCE RU Acoustic Bass 1 8 AMBIENCE RU Acoustic Bass 2 8 HM ENHANCER THRU Pizzicato Bass 1 8 THRU THRU Pizzicato Bass 2 8 THRU THRU
268. n 12 12 dB Determines the amount of EQ boost or cut in the low frequency range EQ Middle 12 12 dB Determines the amount of EQ Gain boost or cut in the mid frequency range Overdrive 0 100 Yo Determines the depth of overdrive The higher the value the greater the amount of distortion Device Transistor Vintage Determines the device that Dist 1 Dist 2 Fuzz will create distortion Transistor VintageTube Distortion Fuzz and so on Speaker Flat Stack Combo Determines the simulated Twin Radio speaker type Flat Stack Megaphone Combo Twin Radio egaphone and so on Presence 0 20 Values in the higher range can give vocals more presence Comp 48 6 db Determines the input level at Threshold which compression begins to be applied Dry Wet D63 gt W D lt W63 Determines the balance of the original sound and the effect sound DDK 7 Owner s Manual 55 Voice Controls and Effects Ste PUB SJOJJUO 3210A DISTORTION A combination of Distortion and Delay WAH This uses an automatic up down filter sweep to change the timbre of the sound producing a Effect Type Effect Type wahwab sound DIST DELAY V_DIST H DLY ODRV DELAY V_DIST S DLY Effect Type Effect Type XG DIST DLY DIST T DL
269. n 54 00 7F Portamento Control 1 16ch x DDK 7 Owner s Manual Appendix xipuaddy Code Hexadecimal Function Receive Transmit Remarks Bn 5B 00 7F Reverb Send Level 1 16ch x Bn 5D 00 7F Chorus Send Level 1 16ch x Bn 5E 00 7F Variation Effect Send Level 1 16ch x Bn 60 00 7F Data Increment 1 16ch x Bn 61 00 7F Data Decrement Bn 62 00 7F NRPN LSB 1 16ch x Bn 63 00 7F NRPN MSB Bn 64 00 7F RPN LSB 1 16ch x Bn 65 00 7F RPN MSB Bn 78 00 All Sound Off 1 16ch x Bn 79 00 Reset All Controllers Bn 7B 00 All Note Off Bn 7C 00 Omni Off Bn 7D 00 Omni On Bn 7E 00 Mono Bn 7F 00 Poly Cn 00 7F Program Change 16ch Control 1 16ch Dn 00 7F After Touch 1ch UK 2ch LK x PEDAL 1 16ch En 00 7F 00 7F Pitch Bend x UK x LK 1 16ch x 1 16ch Can be changed in the MIDI settings page 238 Can be output when assigned to channel 4 2 Realtime Messages Code Hexadecimal Function Receive Transmit Remarks F8 Clock O O FA Start O O FC Stop O O FE Active Sensing O O FF Reset x x Received only when in the Ext mode 3 System Exclusive Messages 3 1 Format Universal Realtime Messages Code Hexadecimal Message Receive Transmit FO 7F 7F 04 01 SS TT F7 2 Master Volume O x X FO 7F 7F 04 03 SS TT F7 2 Master Fine Tuning O x D FO 7F 7F 04 04 00 TT F
270. n 1 in the Voice Menu in any Voice section WH upper voice 1 WA ba EZ J Ba Ra Accordion 1 Theatre Organ Theatre Organ 2 UPPER1 E LEAD1 LEAD2 Theatre Organ 3 Mute all other Voice sections except for the targeted Voice section 2 Press the PROGRAM button to call up the PROGRAM Display DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH J Gen EE EE 3 Select the desired voice section at the left half of this display I PROGRAM SELECT ITEM FOR EDITING VOICE RHYTHM SEQUENCE PATTERN SEO RHYTHM 2 NEW Sto Sto RHYTHM 3 4 After you have selected the Voice section the AWM Page first page of the Voice Edit display will appear SEQ UPPER1 UPPER2 LEADI LEAD2 1 LOVER LOWER PEDALI PEDAL2 138 DDK 7 Owner s Manual EE UPPER Ges 1 ES Accordion 1 al j E EE a aes Pe ee Ee LOW FREQ LOW GAIN HIGH FREQ HIGH GAIN Culla The message Voice data is too large to edit may appear when you press the PROGRAM button If this message appears select another Voice DDK 7 Owner s Manual 139 Voice Edit Upa 9910A 140 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Editing an AWM Voice You can edit an AWM Voice on the AWM Page and LAYER Page in t
271. n Menu List 22 e Adjusting Parameter Values by Using the Display 6 Confirming the Version of Your DDK 7 23 elle EEN 15 7 Factory Set Initializing the DDK 7 23 3 LCD Display Settings 16 e Selecting the Display Language 16 e Muting the Touch Panel Sound 17 e Adjusting the Display Brightness 17 EN Getting Started 1 Connect the power cord First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC INLET on the DDK 7 then plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall mmm A Only use the voltage specified as correct for the DDK 7 The required voltage A is printed on the name plate of the DDK 7 Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold If you intend to use the instrument in another location or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage please consult with a qualified technician 2 Connect the speakers or headphones Since the DDK 7 has no built in speakers you will need to monitor the sound of the instrument by using external equipment Connect a set of headphones powered speakers or other playback equipment as required El Reference Page Using Headphones page 225 Playing the Sounds of the DDK 7 Through an External Audio System page 226 Using a mixer for live perfo
272. n Pedale A1 205 Voices for each keyboard AEN 24 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons 26 11 Transpose and Pitch Controls 208 Voice ito 32 3 Organ Flutes 37 12 Internet Direct Connection 209 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet 209 Accessing the Website from the DDK 7 210 4 Voice Controls and Effects 40 About the Internet Settings Display 218 Selecting from the Voice Condition display pagi Exiting from the Internet Display lt 221 Selecting from the pDanel 46 Initializing Internet Settings 221 aa NA 52 Glossary of Internet Terms 1 1 asaan 222 5 Rhythm Keyboard Percussion 60 13Connections 223 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm button 60 Accessory Jacks and Controls sseecee 223 Rhythm H 68 Connecting Headphones or External System 225 ACCOM PANIMIG ii aa 70 Connecting a Pedal Unit iia 229 Automatic Accompaniment Auto Bass Chord Connecting a Foot Pada cee 229 IO 71 Connection with Computer 230 Melody On Chord MO 73 Connecting External DeviceS 231 Keyboard Percuselon mama 74 MIDI AA WAA AA 235 MI E 238 6 Registration Memory 89 Storing REgiStratoNSs iesniegti 89 14 Appendix sso naasa sanas sine ener 240 Selecting Registrations diissii 91 XG VOICES am
273. n from any of its display pages 1 Press the PROGRAM button on the panel If your original Voice has already been saved the Voice Edit function quits automatically If the edited Voice has not been saved a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation Select EXIT to quit the Voice Edit function or CANCEL to abort the operation and return to the previous display When quitting Voice Edit the square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds indicating that the Voice you have created is currently being saved Do not turn the power off while the Voice is being saved EJ Recalling an Edited Voice Once your original AWM Voice has been saved it can be selected from the User menu in each Voice section Refer to chapter 2 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons page 26 HH upper voice 1 AMA ESS A a USER VOICE mi a E a USER1 ER al cl e a HER HER ME User 10 User 11 User 12 User 13 User 14 User 15 User 16 9 Rhythm Program The DDK 7 includes powerful rhythm programming functions Rhythm Pattern Program and Rhythm Seguence Program Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to record your own original rhythms and save them as user rhythms Rhythm Seguence Program lets you connect the eristing rhythms or your original rhythms to create complete rhythm tracks which you can automatically play back during your performance Moreover Rhythm Seguenc
274. n off and never plug unplug the USB cable when the connected USB storage device is of the self powered type Doing so may result in the operation of the DDK 7 freezing or hanging up e While the instrument is accessing data such as Save Load and Delete operations do NOT unplug the USB cable do NOT remove the media from the device and do NOT turn the power off to either device Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices MIDI This section explains what MIDI is and what it can do as well as how you can use MIDI on your DDK 7 What is MIDI No doubt you have heard the terms acoustic instrument and digital instrument In the world today these are the two main categories of instruments Let s consider a grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments They are easy to understand With the piano you strike a key and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note With the guitar you directly pluck a string and the note sounds But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note Acoustic guitar note production Digital instrument note production y 7 eternal ani Q E D Playing the keyboard Pluck a string and the body resonates Based on playing information from the keyboard the sound a sampled note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers As shown in the illustration above in an electronic instrumen
275. n the left indicates the current bar or measure and the one on the right indicates the number of the beat in each bar 66 DDK 7 Owner s Manual You can also see the Tempo and Bar Beat indications in the Voice Display In the Voice Display both Tempo and Bar Beat can be seen in one display Reference Page Voice Display page 18 DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH ESG EEES CENT aD 2 3 UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 ChamStrs1 eee eee ep LOYER KEYBOARD PEDAL VOICE 1 VOICE 1 Piano FingrBass1 RHYTHM MAN REGISTRATION HHop Light OFF TEMPO BAR BEAT 12 0 STOP Ia HZ VOICE DISPLAY Changing the rhythm reverb Rhythm Keyboard Percussion You can adjust the amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and the percussion sounds 5 Reference Page used in the rhythms in the Rhythm Condition display Reverb page 46 RHYTHM 8Beat Light 1 vum DATA CONTROL When the Reverb depth for the entire instrument in Reverb Display Page 1 is set to the minimum the setting here will have no effect Range 0 24 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 67 uoIssnojag p3gogAsy Wy AyH BY Rhythm List This list shows all available rhythms on the DDK 7 Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Rhythm Menu
276. n to the browser DDK 7 Owner s Manual 217 Internet Direct Connection uoljoauuo9 eg jeu 218 DDK 7 Owner s Manual EN About the Internet Settings Display Erom the Internet Settings display you can make various settings related to the Internet connection including preferences for the menus and displays The Internet Settings display has four sub displays Browser LAN Wireless LAN and Others Browser SETTING Browser LAN Wireless Others Encode Western European 0 Hone pase YAMAHA O Set this pase as Hone Register m9 Restore default Hone Initialize 0 Show images off On 86 Character entry keys Alphabetical ASCII O Tine zone Japan GHT 9 00 7 EXECUTE Encode Selects the character code encoding for the browser Home page Shows and allows editing of the web page which is set as the home page Set this page as Home For details refer to Changing the Home Page on page 217 O Restore default Home Restores the home page setting Show images Image data and pictures in the web page are shown in the browser when this is set to on Image data is not shown when this is set to off Character entry keys This setting lets you select the character order of the virtual keyboard for entering characters When this is set to Alphabetical the keys are in alphabetical order When this is set to ASCII the keys are arranged as a conventional
277. nd Clap Bongo H Tip El Snare Drum Bongo H Heel F1 Floor Tom L Bongo H Slap E Hi Hat Closed Bongo L Open 1 f Hand Clap G1 Floor Tom H Bongo L Open 3 f WAW Hi Hat Pedal Bongo L Rim 5 A1 Low Tom Bongo L Tip Em Hi Hat Open Bongo L Heel Conga H Tip B1 Mid Tom L Bongo L Slap Conga H Heel c2 Mid Tom H Nakarazan Dom Timbale L Open Conga H Open EW Crash Cymbal 1 Cabasa Conga H Mute D2 High Tom Nakarazan Edge Conga H SlapOpen SS Ride Cymbal 1 Hager Dom 3 Conga H Slap E2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hager Edge Conga H SlapMute F2 Duhulla Dom Bongo H Paila L Conga L Tip Ge A Tambourine Bongo L Timbale H Open Conga L Heel G2 Duhulla Tak Conga H Mute Conga L Open MEA Conga H Open Conga L Mute A2 Conga L Conga L SlapOpen EA Zagrouda H Conga L Slap B2 Zagrouda L Conga L Slide c3 Kick Soft Katem Dom Bongo H Open 1 f Cowbell Top E Side Stick Katem Tak Bongo H Open 3 f z D3 Snare Soft Katem Sak Bongo H Rim ee EA Arabic Hand Clap Katem Tak Bongo H Tip E3 Snare Drum Doff Tak Bongo H Heel Guiro Short F3 Floor Tom L Tabla Dom Bongo H Slap Guiro Long A Hi Hat Closed Tabla Tak 1 Bongo L Open 1 f G3 Floor Tom H Tabla Tik Bongo L Open 3 f a Hi Hat Pedal Tabla Tak 2 Bongo L Rim Tambourine A3 Low Tom Tabla Sak Bongo L Tip Ea Hi Hat Open Tabla Roll Edge Bongo L Heel z B3 Mid Tom L Tabla Flam Bongo L Slap C4 Mid Tom H Sagat 1 Timbale L Open Maracas
278. nds to the REVERB slider in the Rhythm Condition display Range 0 24 KEYBOARD PERCUSSION Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion Range 0 24 Sustain The sustain effect selectable for the each Voice section causes Voices to gradually fade a Reference Page out when the keys are released The sustain on off and sustain length settings are independent for each Voice section providing maximum expressive control Foot Pedal pagg 196 The optional Foot Pedal can also be used to switch sustain on off for voice sections other than Pedal Voice 1 and 2 To add sustain to the Voices and call up the Sustain page Press the SUSTAIN button located to the left of the panel to set the sustain The Sustain display appears DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH J C Ce The Sustain display consists of two pages SUSTAIN Display Switches the sustain function on off DE LOWER PEDALI PEDALZ HE Sustain length value The display shows the on off status and the current sustain length values for each Voice section The values here must be set high enough for the sustain effect to be noticeable Press the ON OFF button in the display to select ON above the Voice section name for
279. ne 55 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal 56 Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell 57 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 58 Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap 59 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 60 Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H 61 Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L 62 Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute 63 Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open 64 Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L 65 Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H 66 Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L 67 Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H 68 Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L 69 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa 70 Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas 71 Samba Whistle H O Samba Whistle H O Samba Whistle H O Samba Whistle H O Samba Whistle H O Samba Whistle H O 72 Samba Whistle L O Samba Whistle L O Samba Whistle L O Samba Whistle L O Samba Whistle L O Samba Whistle L O 73 Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short 74 Guiro Long O Guiro Long O Guiro Long O Guiro Long O Guiro Long O Guiro Long O 75 Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves 76 Wo
280. ng level e When cleaning the instrument use a soft dry cloth Do not use paint thinners solvents cleaning fluids or chemical impregnated wiping cloths Handling caution e Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument e Never insert or drop paper metallic or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard If this happens turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel e Do not place vinyl plastic or rubber objects on the instrument since this might discolor the panel or keyboard e Do not rest your weight on or place heavy objects on the instrument and do not use excessive force on the buttons switches or connectors e Do not use the instrument device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level since this can cause permanent hearing loss If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears consult a physician Saving and backing up your data e Always save data to a USB flash memory or other external media in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error Backing up the external media e To protect against data loss through media damage we recommend that you save your important data onto two external media Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications
281. ngle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Dog DDK 7 Owner s Manual Horse Bird Tweet MSB LSB SFX Kit 2 Key PCNote 126 0 2 Off 36 Phone Call O 37 Door Squeak O 38 Door Slam O 39 Scratch Cut O 40 Scratch H 3 o 41 Wind Chime O 42 Telephone Ring O CarEngnlgnition O 53 Car Tires Squeal O 54 Car Passing O 55 Car Crash O 56 Siren O 57 Train O 58 Jet Plane O 59 Starship O 60 Burst O 61 Roller Coaster o 62 Submarine O Laugh O 69 Scream O 70 Punch o fA Heart Beat O O Foot Steps E o al a Machine Gun O o Laser Gun O lt Explosion O O Firework DDK 7 Owner s Manual 247 xipuaddy Es MIDI Data Format 1 Channel Messages 1 1 DDK Mode X indicates Not available O indicates Available Code Hexadecimal Function Receive Transmit Remarks 8n nn 00 7F Note Off 1ch x UK 2ch x LK 3ch x PEDAL 4ch x LEAD 1 5 14ch x XG 15ch x Keyboard Percussion 9n nn 00 Note Off 1ch 1ch UK 9n nn 01 7F Note On 2ch 2ch LK 3ch 3ch PEDAL 4ch x LEAD 1 5 14ch x XG 15ch x Keyboard Percussion An nn 00 7F Polyphonic After Touch
282. ngo Mute Castanet Bongo L Conga L Heel Conga L Heel Conga High Snare Studio L Conga H Mute Conga L Open Conga L Open Bongo Slap Sticks Conga H Open Conga L Mute Conga L Mute Conga Low Kick Ambience H Conga L Conga L SlapOpen Conga L SlapOpen Open Rim Shot Zagrouda H Conga L Slap Conga L Slap Timbale 1 Hig Kick Ambience L Zagrouda L Conga L Slide Conga L Slide Timbale 1 Low Kick Studio Cutting Noise 1 Phone Call Kick Soft Bongo H Open 1 f Bongo H Open 1 f Side Stick Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Side Stick Bongo H Open 3 f Bongo H Open 3 f Timbale 2 Hig Snare Studio M Door Slam Snare Soft Bongo H Rim Bongo H Rim Hand Clap String Slap Scratch Cut Arabic Hand Clap Bongo H Tip Bongo H Tip Timbale 2 Low Snare Studio L Scratch H 3 Snare Drum Bongo H Heel Bongo H Heel Timbale 3 Hig Floor Tom L Wind Chime Floor Tom L Bongo H Slap Bongo H Slap Woodblock High Hi Hat Closed Telephone Ring Hi Hat Closed Bongo L Open 1 f Bongo L Open 1 f Timbale 3 Low Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Bongo L Open 3 f Bongo L Open 3 f Woodblock Mid Hi Hat Pedal Hi Hat Pedal Bongo L Rim Bongo L Rim Timbale 4 Hig Low Tom Low Tom Bongo L Tip Bongo L Tip Woodblock Low Hi Hat Open Hi Hat Open Bongo L Heel Bongo L Heel Timbale 4 Low Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Bongo L Slap Bongo L Slap Vibraslap Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Timbale L Open Timbale L Open Triangle Mute Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Tambourine High Tom High Tom Triangle Open Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Castanet Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click
283. no Sax 2 8 THRU THRU Resonance Pad 8 H DELAY LR TEMPO CROSS Baritone Sax 16 8 THRU THRU Resonance Pad 9 8 V_FLANGER ECHO Resonance Pad 10 8 DELAY LR XG CHORUS 1 Resonance Pad 11 8 COMPRESSOR DELAY LR DDK 7 Owner s Manual 33 Voices SODI0A Category Preset Preset Preset Category Preset Preset Preset Voice Name Feet Effect 1 Effect 2 Voice Name Feet Effect 1 Effect 2 3 Bell Pad 1 8 CELESTE 1 DELAY LR 4 Synth Brass 1 8 PITCH CHANGE THRU Bell Pad 2 8 XG CHORUS 3 CROSS DELAY Synth Brass 2 8 THRU THRU Bell Pad 3 8 XG CHORUS 3 DELAY LR Synth Brass 3 8 THRU THRU Bell Pad 4 8 XG CHORUS 4 DELAY LR Synth Brass 4 8 ST3BANDEQ THRU Bell Pad 5 8 CHORUS 1 XG DLY LCR Synth Brass 5 8 XG 3BAND EQ THRU Bell Pad 6 8 XG CHORUS 2 DELAY LR Synth Brass 6 8 XG 3BAND EQ XG CHORUS 4 Bell Pad 7 8 XG CHORUS 2 DELAY LR Synth Brass 7 8 COMPRESSOR THRU Bell Pad 8 8 XG AT PAN 1 DELAY LR Synth Brass 8 8 ST2BANDEQ DELAY LR Bell Pad 9 4 XG 3BANDEQ DELAY LR Synth Bra
284. ns to Sensitivity 0 127 Determines the degree to be applied which the wah filter is DelayTime 0 1 1486 0 msec Determines the time that affected by your playing elapses between the original touch sound and the delayed DelayTime 0 1 1486 0 msec Determines the time that repeat elapses between the original Overdrive 0 100 Determines the depth of sound and the delayed overdrive The higher the repeat value the greater the amount Delay 63 63 Determines the amount of of distortion Feedback delayed repeats in the Device Transistor Vintage Determines the device that sound Dist 1 Dist 2 Fuzz will create distortion Comp 48 6db Determines the input level at Transistor VintageTube Threshold which compression begins to Distortion Fuzz and so on be applied Speaker Flat Stack Combo Determines the simulated Dist Out Level 0 127 Determines the output level Twin Radio speaker type Flat Stack of the distorted sound Megaphone Combo Twin Radio Dry Wet D63 gt W D lt W63 Determines the balance of Megaphone and so on the original sound and the Presence 0 20 Values in the higher range effect sound can give vocals more presence Dry Wet D63 gt W D lt W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound DDK 7 Owner s Manual DYNAMIC This effect also called compression sgueezes the overall dynamic range of the sound and has a gain control letting you make soft
285. ntaining the Registrations for which you want to change the order For details on selecting a song see page 104 Press the REGIST EDIT button in the SONG SELECT Page to call up the Regist Edit display TENPO RESET PART SETUP ae MDR Tous MDR SONG 1 USB 01 S0N6 REG_001 SONG 1 USB 01 S0N6 Ges REMAINING 159 02 WB Tess REGIST mn DATA TO BE LOADED d i sm SONGISELECT Tous REG_001 Ss Change the Registration order in the order you want to recall First select the specific Registration bank you want to edit then move copy or delete the selected data as needed to change the order SONGISELECT Tous USB 01 SONG REG_001 A DATA TO BE LOADED REGIST YAI E LOAD Ze gt ees SEQUENCE O Registration Data List From this list select the Registration you want to move copy or delete The selected Registration is highlighted in orange When more than five Registration banks are saved in the song a scroll button LIKA is available for scrolling through the Registration Data List O MOVE Moves the selected Registration bank up or down DATA TO BE LOADED When loading the Registration bank to the panel select the desired data you want to load For more information see page 121 DDK 7 Owner s Manual JI 119 Music Data Recorder MDR HAM JepJooay Lq ASNN 120 DDK 7 Owner s Manual O LOAD
286. ntly selected instrument by 100 cents Range 64 63 PITCH FINE Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by one cent allowing more detailed tuning of the instrument than PITCH COARSE Range 64 63 O REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently selected instrument Range 0 24 VOLUME Determines the volume of the currently selected instrument Range 0 24 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 83 Rhythm Keyboard Percussion D a bes 3 3 x 9 lt o o D o O Dm Q Le n O o 5 84 DDK 7 Owner s Manual RESET Initializes settings such as pan pitch and reverb to their default values Pressing the EXECUTE button calls up the following display prompting confirmation of the operation vk EE Heer e IT Restore preset settings SET EXECUTE mn Press the EXECUTE button in the display to restore initialize the default settings When EXECUTE is selected a Complete message momentarily appears on the display Press the CANCEL button in the display to abort the operation Kit Assign List ELC Ti
287. nto any openings e Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands Fire warning e Do not put burning items such as candles on the unit A burning item may fall over and cause a fire If you notice any abnormality e f the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it immediately turn off the power switch disconnect the electric plug from the outlet and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others or damage to the instrument or other property These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply Power cord e When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet always hold the plug itself and not the cord Pulling by the cord can damage it e Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time or during electrical storms e Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple connector Doing so can result in lower sound quality or possibly cause overheating in the outlet e Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations or extreme cold or heat such as in direct sunlight near a heater or in a car during the day to prevent
288. od Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H 77 Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L 78 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 79 Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Scratch L 2 80 Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute 81 Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open 82 Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker 83 Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells 84 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree 85 No Sound 86 87 88 89 90 91 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 245 Appendix gt he ke o D 2 x 246 MSB LSB Analog Kit Key Dance Kit Key Jazz Kit Key Brush Kit Key Symphony Kit Key SFX Kit 1 Key PCNote 127 0 26 Off 127 0 28 Off 127 0 33 Off 127 0 41 Off 127 0 49 Off 126 0 1 Off 12 13 Surdo Mute Kick Dance 1 Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute 14 Surdo Open Kick Dance 2 Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open 15 HO Hi Q HO Hi Q Hi Q 16 Whip Slap Whip Slap O Whip Slap
289. of the less necessary percussion sounds with the CLEAR button in the INPUT Page and try saving the pattern again After saving the Rhythm be sure to quit Rhythm Pattern Program page 174 before turning the power off Turning off the DDK 7 without quitting Rhythm Pattern Program erases the User Rhythm you have created Confirming rhythm patterns before saving The rhythm pattern you have created will be saved with 15 sections collectively into one rhythm Before saving we recommend that you confirm the contents of each section Example When saving the Main A and Main B sections you have created into one user rhythm First select Main A by using the SECTION button on the SETTING Page then press the START button on the panel This lets you hear the Main A pattern you have created Confirm that the rhythm pattern is what you want to save as Main A Next select Main B by using the SECTION button then play it back and confirm that this is what you want to save as Main B If the Main A and or Main B patterns contain undesired data or no data create the desired data by using the Assemble function page 153 After confirming the desired section Main A and Main B here we recommend that you confirm that all other sections contain no data If unnecessary data is contained in some sections which you dont want to save delete that unnecessary data This can reduce the data size of the user rhythm DD
290. ol the Expression al Expression Pedals The Pedal Unit DDKU P7 features a expression pedal and a 2nd expression pedal St The Expression pedal can be used to control the volume with your foot as you play Reference Page The 2nd Expression Pedal can be used to control the Pitch Bend and the Tempo of the Connecting a Pedal Unit Rhythm The explanation on the 2nd Fxpression Pedal is given here eee O El Reference Page ES Getting Started page 11 aua Expression Pedal EE 2nd Expression Pedal e Pedal Unit 1 Press the UTILITY button on the front panel The Utility display appears 2 Press the EXP button in the upper right of the display to call up the EXP Expression Page E 2ND EXPRESSION GLOBAL 4 MODE PITCH BEND TEMPO NARROW UPPERT UPPER LEADI LEAD PEDALT PEDAL Cima In this display you can assign the Pitch Bend control or Tempo control to the 2nd Expression Pedal If both Pitch Bend and Rhythm Tempo controls are set to ON both functions are applied when you press the 2nd Expression Pedal Generally one of them is assigned to the 2nd Expression Pedal DDK 7 Owner s Manual 205 o 2 2 o 5 E o o Controlling Pitch Bend HL 2ND EXPRESSION GLOBAL ERP MDI AUX OUT FPEDAL PITCH BEND UPPER1 UPPER2 LEAD1 LEAD PEDAL1 IESSE D MODE Determines the range of the Pitch Bend control Each step changes the pitch
291. olarPad 0 65 81 XG SoloSine 0 66 96 XG Celestial 0 66 81 XG SineLead 0 0 97 XG Rain SYNTH o o 82 XG SawtoothLead 0 45 97 XG Clavi Pad EFFECTS 0 6 82 XG SawtoothLead2 0 64 97 XG HarmoRain 0 8 82 XG ThickSaw 0 65 97 XG AfricanWind DDK 7 Owner s Manual Voice Number Voice Number Voice Name Category Voice Name Category MSB LSB PRG MSB LSB PRG 0 66 97 XG Carib SYNTH 0 28 106 XG MutedBanjo ETHNIC o o 98 XG SoundTrack EFFECTS o 96 106 XG Rabab 0 27 98 XG Prologue 0 97 106 XG Gopichant 0 64 98 XG Ancestral 0 98 106 XG Oud 0 0 99 XG Crystal 0 O 107 XG Shamisen 0 12 99 XG SynthDr Comp 0 O 108 XG Koto 0 14 99 XG Popcorn 0 96 108 XG Taisho kin 0 18 99 XG TinyBells 0 97 108 XG Kanoon 0 35 99 XG RoundGlocken 0 O 109 XG Kalimba 0 40 99 XG GlockenChime 0 O 110 XG Bagpipe 0 41 99 XG ClearBells 0 O 111 XG Fiddle 0 42 99 XG ChorusBells 0 O 112 XG Shanai 0 64 99 XG SynthMallet 0 64 112 XG S
292. oll Floor Tom L Timbale H a Triangle Mute Hi Hat Closed Timbale L G3 Tambourine Floor Tom H Agogo H EA Triangle Open Hi Hat Pedal Agogo L A3 Castanet Low Tom Cabasa Za Cowbell 1 Hi Hat Open Maracas B3 Timbale 1 Low Mid Tom L Samba Whistle H C4 Timbale 1 High Mid Tom H Samba Whistle L Ea Wood Block Low Crash Cymbal 1 Guiro Short D4 Conga Low 3 High Tom Guiro Long EW Wood Block High Ride Cymbal 1 Claves E4 Conga High 3 Chinese Cymbal Wood Block H F4 Bongo Low Ride Cymbal Cup Wood Block L ia Agogo Low Tambourine Cuica Mute G4 Bongo High Splash Cymbal Cuica Open CH Agogo High Cowbell Triangle Mute A4 Cuica Low Crash Cymbal 2 Triangle Open Wm Hand Claps Vibraslap Shaker B4 Cuica High 3 Ride Cymbal 2 Jingle Bells C5 Shaker Bell Tree Em l D5 Tm E5 E S F5 S z G5 ER A5 a B5 3 z C6 Indicates the keys of the DDK 7 keyboard and DDKU P7 The 10 kits Standard Kit 2 Symphony Kit have the same sound assignments as Standard Kit 1 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Gi Al B1 SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Preset 2 PK Preset 1 LK Preset 1 UK Preset 2 PK Preset 1 LK Preset 1 UK c1 Cutting Noise 1 Phone Call WET Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak D1 gt Door Slam EE String Slap Scratch Cut El Scratch H 3 F1 Wind Chime Telephone Ring C2 D2 E2
293. ompaniment parts are cleared When selecting the desired part a display prompting confirmation of the operation appears Select CLEAR to execute the operation or select CANCEL to abort the operation El Reference Page Accompaniment page 70 NOTE If you select BASS here the bass phrase in the A B C will be cleared DDK 7 Owner s Manual 153 Rhythm Program webojd WU AyH Step Write and Real Time Write There are two different methods you can use to program rhythms Step Write and Real Time Write Step Write allows you to enter percussion sounds as individual note values As a method it is very similar to writing down the notes on a sheet of music paper each note is entered one at a time and though you can hear each individual note entered you cannot actually hear the pattern playing as you create it Step Write is good for precision and for entering percussion sounds whose note placement and rhythmic value has been determined such as a bass drum that plays every beat in a measure Real Time Write on the other hand is similar to using a multi track tape recorder you can hear previously recorded parts of the pattern as you record new parts on top Real Time Write is best for capturing the feel of a rhythm because it allows you to actually play the pattern as you are creating it Each method has its own advantages and uses Which method you use depends partly on the type of rhythm you intend to
294. on calls up Song 9 16 while the 3 button calls up Song 17 24 and so on T Q Pa D o 2 o fe D CC D Ks a so no D gt MDR TOOLS ka SONG SELECT TOUS USB 01 SONG REG_001 rr il em em elo ZS mem xo Eva Press the number buttons to change the CU a cispiayed songs A A SONG 2 gt BIR ao uu es Song 1 Song 8 When the 1 button is selected When the 3 button is selected Dow vW Song 1 Song 2 Song 3 Song 4 Song 17 Song 18 Song 19 Song 20 Song 5 JC Song 6 II Song 7 at Song 8 song 21 Song 22 Song 23 Song 24 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 105 HAM JepJooay Lq ASNN 106 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Song Part Information Pressing the PART SETUP button calls up the Part Setup display of the currently selected song letting you confirm which parts are played when playing the song MDR SONG SELECT TOOLS SONG 1 USB 01 SONG REG_001 REMAINING 156 52 NB PART SETUP CLOSE J Emnra error PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY OFF CC EIER DI ES When playing back the song by pressing the P gt button only those parts that are set to PLAY in the Part Setup display actually play while parts that are set to OFF are muted If the song contains no performance data all parts are set to OFF You can change the status for each part by changing the PLAY OFF settings for each par
295. onnection to an external amplifier speaker system These outputs can be selected for each part The output level is fixed and cannot be controlled with the MASTER VOLUME Dial 2 MAIN L L R R jacks This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier speaker The output level is fixed and cannot be controlled OUTPUT L L R R jacks This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier speaker The output level can be controlled Connecting Headphones or External System Before connecting the DDK 7 to other electronic components turn off the power to all the components Before turning the power of the components on or off set all volume levels to minimum 0 Otherwise electrical shock or damage to the components may occur Using Headphones To use headphones connect to the PHONES jack PHONES El Reference Pages Connecting a Pedal Unit page 229 Reference Page Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through the External Speakers of the DDK 7 page 232 El Reference Pages Playing the Sounds of the DDK 7 Through an External Audio System page 226 Recording the Sounds of the DDK 7 to an External Recorder page 231 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 225 Connections SUONOBUUOD 226 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Playing the Sounds of the DDK 7 Through an External Audio System By using the OUTPUT
296. oot pedal page 196 196 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Controlling Rotary Speaker You can control the Rotary Speaker effect on off by using the Left Footswitch HA FOOTSMTCH RIGHT j MODE When the Rotary Speaker button is selected in this display and you press the Footswitch the Rotary Speaker effect is switched on or off This function corresponds to the ROTARY SP SPEED button on the panel To use this function you ll need to make the appropriate Rotary Speaker settings for each Voice section or Organ Flute Voice For details see page 50 You can also control the Rotary Speaker effect on off by using an optional Foot Pedal a Foot Pedal To use the Foot Pedal you will need to connect an optional Foot Pedal FC4 FC5 FC7 FC9 to the DDK 7 The Foot Pedal then can be used to turn one of the following functions on and off Up to two Foot Pedals can be connected to the DDK 7 You can assign one function for each Foot Pedal in the FOOT PEDAL Page of the Utility display Note that Some functions will need to be turned on or its parameters set beforehand Assignable Functions Sustain Lead Slide Melody On Chord Solo Rhythm Glide Rotary Speaker Registration Shift Expression To control Expression use the FC7 FC9 To control other functions use the FC4 FC5 y FC4 FC7 Assigning functions to a Foot Pedal 1 Press the UTILITY button to call up the Utility display
297. or optional Foot Pedal you can jump to a specified Registration or step through the panel Registrations in sequence either in numeric order or in any order you specify Registration Shift has three modes Shift Jump and User These are set in the Regist Shift display You can also view and check the Registration Shift mode in the Voice Display Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift display Connect the Pedal Unit DDKU P7 or optional Foot Pedal FC4 FC5 to the instrument DDKU P7 FC4 FC5 If you want to use the Foot Pedal set the desired parameters in the Regist Shift display explained in this section then assign the Regist Shift function to the Foot Pedal Refer to the section Controlling Registration Shift on page 203 Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift display 1 Press the FOOT SWITCH button on the panel Press the RIGHT button at the top right of the display to call up the RIGHT Page Regist Shift display REGIST SHIFT Display E FOOTSMTCH REGIST SHIFT _LEFT_ RIGHT MODE C API O OFF Turns off the Registration Shift assignment When you select OFE you cannot change Registrations by using the Right Footswitch or with an optional Foot Pedal SHIFT In the Shift mode each press of the Right Footswitch or with an optional Foot Pedal selects the Registration Memory presets in their numerical order After the last Registration is re
298. ove the cursor colored orange along the Registration row in the display Entered Registration numbers are shown in boxes while the numbers in the row above indicate the position in the sequence in other words the number of successive presses of the Right Footswitch Up to 80 steps Registrations can be memorized T Moves the cursor to the first position 4 Moves the cursor one step to the left gt Moves the cursor one step to the right gt gt Moves the cursor five steps to the right DATA These are data controls used to enter and delete Registration numbers in the Registration row SET For initially entering a Registration number to a blank space in the Registration row or for replacing a number at the current cursor position To enter a number press the desired Registration Memory button the selected button will light then press SET in the display The entered Registration number will appear in the Registration row After using SET to enter Registrations the cursor can be moved among the numbers INSERT For inserting a Registration number just before the current cursor position To perform the operation first move the cursor to a numbered position Then press the desired Registration Memory button the selected button will light and press INSERT in the display The new Registration number is inserted at the cursor position and all other numbers to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new n
299. ox 30053 S 400 43 Goteborg Sweden Tel 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A DK 2730 Herlev Denmark Tel 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6 P O Box 260 SF 00101 Helsinki Finland Tel 09 618511 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Neringspark 1 N 1345 ster s Norway Tel 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P O Box 8120 16 128 Reykjavik Iceland Tel 525 5000 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH SiemensstraBe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 49 4101 3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation Asia Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa cho 10 1 Hamamatsu Japan 430 8650 Tel 8 1 53 460 2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH SiemensstraBe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16 513 P O Box 17328 Jubel Ali Dubai United Arab Emirates Tel 971 4 881 5868 ASIA THE PEOPLE S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music amp Electronics China Co Ltd 25 F United Plaza 1468 Nanjing Road West Jingan Shanghai China Tel 021 6247 2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd 11 F Silvercord Tower 1 30 Canton Road Tsimshatsui Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 2737 7688 INDONESIA PT Yamaha Music Indonesia Distributor PT Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center Jalan Jend Gatot Subroto Kav 4 Jakarta 12930 Indonesia Tel 21 520 2577
300. p Drum Listessi aaa 240 Saving the Registration data to USB flash memory 92 XG Drum Map mwina 245 Initializing Registration Memor 93 MIDI Data Format 248 Registration TE 94 Troubleshooting neen 263 Unifying a specific parameter ee 99 SPOCHICATIONS AA 266 dote 268 7 Music Data Recorder MDR 102 Calling Up the M D R Display 103 Formatting External Media 103 Selecting a Song 104 Recording 110 Changing the Song Name 1 1 eee 113 Saving Registrations as Registration Data File 116 Recalling Recorded Registrations 121 Playing Back a Song Other Functions Tools Quick Introductory Guide 2 Voices Organ Flutes Voice Controls and Effects Rhythm Keyboard Percussion Registration Memory Music Data Recorder MDR Voice Edit Rhythm Program 10 Controllers 11 Transpose and Pitch Controls 12 Internet Direct Connection 13 Connections 14 Appendix Front Panel LCD display LEAD 1 2 DISPLAY SELECT page 24 page 10 UPPER 2 0 Qs ss Sondas page 24 PEDAL 1 2 page 25 LOWER 1 2 page 25 bi A BE J S 52 REGIST MENU page 20 RHYTHM KEYBOARD PERCUSSI
301. point Q Make a written note of these settings in case you have to enter the settings again SSID Channel Ch Encryption On Off WEP key type ASCII Hexadecimal E WEP key length 64 bit 128 bit CANCEL WEP key DDK 7 Owner s Manual 219 Internet Direct Connection uoljoauuo9 eg jeu NOTE An access point that is encrypted in a non WEP format cannot be used NOTE If no signal from the access point is received the access point cannot be listed NOTE The WEP key type length and WEP key are not entered automatically You have to enter them by yourself if you want to use an access point that is encrypted REH wore When using two or more non proxy servers separate each server name with a comma 220 DDK 7 Owner s Manual O Access Point Pressing the Display Information button calls up the access point list It shows the access points near the DDK 7 Once you select the desired access point and press the OK button a message appears prompting confirmation of whether to transfer the access point settings to the DDK 7 or not When you select YES the SSID Channel and Encryption settings are transferred to the DDK 7 SSID Determines the SSID setting Channel Determines the channel O Encryption Determines whether or not the data is encrypted O WEP key type WEP key length WEP key These settings are available only when Enc
302. pressed down Press it down with your toe Foot Pedals has no effect OFF is selected in the Foot Pedal display Select function to assign it to the Foot Pedal page 196 The DDK 7 panel does not function normally or the content of the memorized data has changed This happens very rarely Occasionally power surges and spikes due to electrical storms or other reasons may cause the DDK 7 to malfunction and or alter the contents of memorized data If this happens perform the Factory Set operation to reset the DDK 7 page 23 The Pedal Unit does not work A cable of the Pedal Unit is disconnected Make sure that power is OFF when connecting or disconnecting the pedal Some parts cannot be heard from the Headphones or an external speakers The parts are assigned to AUX OUT SUB jacks If you want to hear all parts from Headphones select AUX OUT MAIN jacks for all parts page 228 If you want to hear all parts from an external speakers use the output from the mixer DDK 7 Owner s Manual 263 Appendix xipuaddy Problem Possible Cause and Solution VOICES RHYTHMS The pitch may sound excessively high on the Pedalboard and low in the higher registers of the Lower and Upper keyboards This may occur when you compare the DDK 7 s sounds with that of a piano Because of the difference of the harmonics structure the tuning system of the DDK 7 is different from the piano in the hi
303. r Element from another Voice and replace the currently selected Element with it Pressing the VOICE or ELEMENT button in the display calls up the Voice or Element menu from which you can select the desired Voice Element DDK 7 Owner s Manual 141 O LEVEL Determines the output level of the Element Range 0 127 NOTE LIMIT Determines the lowest and highest notes in the range for which the Element sounds The setting of the HIGH slider cannot be set lower than that of the LOW slider Some Elements are not affected by this parameter Range C 2 G8 O PAN Determines the position of the Element in the stereo image Range L64 R63 LAYER Page 2 MA UPPER VOCE 1 wm NERY oe Accordion 1 WE tn Amo wl wl wl EH EH EJ NOTE SHIFT TUNE ATTACK RELEASE CUTOFF RESONANCE EME RATE WE FREO 0 0 99 80 18500cent 32 wai bak i a L O NOTE SHIFT Determines the pitch settings in semitones Range 64 63 lt 9 be b m 2 O TUNE FINE Determines the fine tuning Range 64 63 ATTACK RATE Determines how quickly the Element will reach its maximum level after the key is played Higher values produce a faster attack Range 0 127 O RELEASE RATE Determines how much time it takes for the level to reach 0 after the key is released Higher values make the time shorter Range 1 127 142 DDK 7 Owner s Manual CUTOFF
304. r all assignments using the CLEAR button in the display ASSIGN Page 1 Press then release the CLEAR button The following display appears prompting confirmation of the operation EZ KBP 1 uk D3 TamTam MENU SETUP elo gl get CH Are you sure you want to clear all Cre assignments Multi 2 Press CLEAR in the display to erase all data When CLEAR is selected a Completed message momentarily appears on the display Press CANCEL in the display to abort the operation Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings You can copy the Preset Keyboard Percussion to one of the User locations or copy from one User location to another In the instructions below Preset 1 is copied to User 1 1 Press the K B P 1 button to copy Preset 1 To copy Preset 1 select the K B P 1 button to copy Preset 2 select the K B P 2 button To copy either User location select button K B P 1 or K B P 2 2 Press the MENU button at the top right of the display to call up the MENU Page DDK 7 Owner s Manual 81 Rhythm Keyboard Percussion D a bes 3 3 x 9 lt o o D S o O Dm o Q Le n O o 5 82 Within the Menu buttons select the User location as the destination for ekample User 1 O KBP 1 KIT Multi Kit WE lle NG TENU ASSIGN SETUP y a ge Press the COPY FROM button in the display A list appears letting you se
305. r registering bookmarks by pressing the ADD button w BOOKMARK posh YAMAHA Ja pa Untitled ADD CHANGE DELETE J MOVE ig Page title Select the position of the new bookmark by pressing the desired position directly or using the UP DOWN button or the Data Control Dial up BOOKMARK DOWN YAMAHA Untitled 4 DATA CONTROL EXECUTE eng Y CANCEL rerne A To save the bookmark press the EXECUTE button or press the CANCEL button to cancel 5 To return to the browser press the EXIT button Opening a Bookmarked Page 1 Press the BOOKMARK button in the control menu to call up the Bookmark display then select the desired bookmark 2 Press the JUMP button to open the page of the selected bookmark DDK 7 Owner s Manual 215 Internet Direct Connection uoljoauuo9 eg jeu 216 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Editing Bookmarks From the Bookmark display you can change the names and rearrange the order of your bookmarks as well as delete unnecessary bookmarks from the list D 5 DELETE O MOVE Eg J J J J Qe cance J J J J 7 os race um ZZ UP DOWN Moves the selection position in the Bookmark list JUMP Opens the web page of the selected bookmark ADD Used when saving a bookmark page 214 O CHANGE Changes the name of the selected bookmark Pressing this button calls up the display for entering ch
306. range by a semitone Range 1 12 The setting 2 NARROW results in a small amount of pitch variation over two semitones the setting 12 WIDE results in a large amount of pitch variation over one octave O Voice Sections PITCH BEND Selects the Voice sections to which the Pitch Bend function will be applied and turns the function ON Pitch Bend can be selected independently or together for Upper Voices 1 and 2 Lead Voice 1 and 2 Pedal Voices 1 and 2 Q o 3 2 o ba 2 D 206 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Controlling the Rhythm Tempo HM 2ND EXPRESSION oe GERD MOI j AUX OUT F PEDAL MODE PITCH BEND IFFFFEEF Determines the range of tempo change Range 1 12 The setting 2 NARROW results in a small amount of tempo change 70 140 the setting 12 WIDE results in a large amount of tempo change 5096 200 O TEMPO When you want to control the tempo with the 2nd Expression Pedal set this to ON When set to on pressing the pedal down with your toe speeds up the tempo and pressing it back with your heel slows it down Controllers DDK 7 Owner s Manual 207 FT o 5 Mm ke fo Mm D o D a I 3 I O o 5 2 gt o 7 208 There are two pitch related controls on the DDK 7 Transpose and Pitch Transpose allows you to change the key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the tuning Transpose and Pitch can be
307. re for example three times per measure in 3 4 time to serve as a l rhythmic guide when programming patterns Set to On here with Real Time Write Entering Percussion Sounds ye cs prog SP to a Rhythm Pattern Real Time Write page 162 152 DDK 7 Owner s Manual O ASSEMBLE Copies the part from another rhythm to the currently selected rhythm You can assemble various sections from multiple rhythms to create your original rhythm Pressing the ASSEMBLE button calls up the following display DRUI PATTERN SETTING INPUT MY amp SAVE FILE Select copy source Rhythm Section and Part Select the part for the copy destination Press here to execute the copy Select the copy source Rhythm Section and Part Then select the destination You can copy only one part or all parts of a rhythm After setting the source and destination press EXECUTE Copy is executed and returning to the previous display CLEAR PART Clears a specific part or parts from the currently selected rhythm Pressing this button calls up the following display PATTERN SETTING INPUT Oe srp SAVE FILE Marching Band cem part EE MAIN DRUM ADD DRUM CHORD CHORD PAD PHRASE PHRASE BASS ta Select the part you want to delete from the displayed parts You cannot select a part that contains no data the button is grayed out If you select ALL here the percussion and all acc
308. rmance page 226 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 11 aping Aojonpojjuj Yaind 12 A Do not use the instrument device or headphones for a long period of time ata Speaker Left y Speaker Right high or uncomfortable OUTPUT L L R R volume level since this can cause permanent hearing loss PHONES A 3 Turn the power on Make sure the volume settings of the DDK 7 and external devices are turned Even when the power down to the minimum switch is turned off electricity is still flowing to MASTER VOLUME the product at the minimum Sr level Turn the power on by pressing the POWER switch on the DDK 7 front panel then turn the power on the amplifiers POWER ON BLOFF For turning the power on or off When powering down the setup make sure to switch off the power of the external device or lower its volume before switching off the DDK 7 4 Set the MASTER VOLUME control The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control that affects the volume of DT note when you connect an the entire instrument external audio device to the AUX OUT jacks the output MASTER VOLUME level is fixed and cannot be controlled ji Decreasing Increasing the volume the volume Now that you ve set up the DDK 7 properly you re ready to begin playing it The Expression Pedal on the DDKU P7 Pedal Unit can be used to control the volume with your foot as you play DDK 7
309. rom any of its display pages When you quit the sequence you have made will be automatically saved To quit the Rhythm Sequence Program Press the PROGRAM button on the panel The Voice Display appears indicating that the Rhythm Sequence Program is closed When quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program the square at the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds indicating that the sequence is currently being saved Do not turn the power off while the sequence is being saved Playing Rhythm Seguences To play any of the rhythm seguences you have created 1 Press the appropriate Sequence button SEQ 1 SEQ 4 on the panel The SEQ button s lamp lights Yeh eenz bw A TT N SEQ 3 SEQ 4 Press the rhythm START button The rhythm in the selected sequence starts playback The Registration Memory also changes with the Rhythm Sequence playback if the sequence includes a Registration Sequence Rhythm playback automatically stops when the sequence reaches its end If you ve stopped rhythm playback in the middle of the sequence press the START button again to resume playback Playing All Sequences in Order You can also have up to all four rhythm sequences automatically play in order one after another 1 Press the desired Sequence buttons making sure that all their LEDs are lit 9 Press the rhythm START button The rhythm sequences start from the lowest number and pla
310. ryption above is enabled These set the type and length of the encryption key Others SETTING Browser LAN Wireless 0 Proxy server Y Proxy port 8080 1 Non proxy server Delete cookies Delete maf Delete all bookmarks Delete mao Initialize setup Initialize 0O Connect information Display information EXECUTE CANCEL Proxy server Proxy port Non proxy server Determines the proxy server name port number and the host name for a main non proxy server The settings here are only necessary when using a proxy server Delete cookies Deletes the contents of all saved cookies Delete all bookmarks Deletes all saved bookmarks O Initialize setup Restores all settings in the Internet Settings displays to their defaults See Initializing Internet Settings on page 221 Connection information Shows detailed information on the current connection 4 Exiting from the Internet Display Pressing any button other than INTERNET button quits the Internet Direct Connection and closes the website display Pressing the INTERNET button again automatically opens the previously opened website D Initializing Internet Settings The settings of the Internet function are not initialized when using the Initialize operation of the DDK 7 page 23 Internet settings must be initialized separately as explained here Initializing will reset to the default values not only the s
311. s a process of rounding off timing or duration values so that each note plays with precise timing You can select nine types of Quantize value o AN es E NM E 7 SL EE E d ds A s FREE A b Py A ES With this button change the displayed Quantize buttons With Step Write It allows you to automatically correct the length duration and timing of each note you enter Steps Depending on the Quantize Values O 2 gt on Le o D so Ca O a a O a Por E EE Wa R NG MES pa O SC eee ern Clock 0 120 240 360 480 1 beat Setting Quantize to FREE results in the finest least amount of quantization 1 480 beat With Real Time Write It allows you to automatically correct the timing of the notes you play according to the specified Quantize resolution No correction occurs when you select FREE Generally you should set Quantize to be the same as the shortest note you intend to play Original data you play Quarter note length After applying a iJ quantize value to the original data qe q a DDK 7 Owner s Manual 161 Rhythm Program Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern Real Time Write While you listen to the entered rhythm or metronome click play the Upper Lower keyboards to enter the desired percussion so
312. s adresser 4 Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd 135 Milner Avenue Scarborough Ontario MIS 3R1 Canada Tel 416 298 1311 U S A Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park Calif 90620 U S A Tel 714 522 9011 CENTRAL amp SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de M xico S A de C V Calz Javier Rojo G mez 1149 Col Guadalupe del Moral C P 09300 M xico D F M xico Tel 55 5804 0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda Rua Joaquim Floriano 913 4 andar Itaim Bibi CEP 04534 013 Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL Tel 011 3704 1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America S A Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2 B 1053 Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 1 4371 7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America S A Torre Banco General Piso 7 Urbanizaci n Marbella Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia Ciudad de Panam Panam Tel 507 269 5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Kemble Music U K Ltd Sherbourne Drive Tilbrook Milton Keynes MK7 8BL England Tel 01908 366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd 61D Sallynoggin Road Dun Laoghaire Co Dublin Tel 01 2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH SiemensstraBe 22 34 25462 Rellingen Germany Tel 04101 3030 SWITZERLAND LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central
313. s let you select Voice banks control the volume panning modulation portamento time brightness and various other sound parameters through specific Control Change numbers For more detailed information on the Control Change messages available on the DDK 7 see MIDI Data Format on page 248 and MIDI Implementation Chart on page 261 System Messages e System Exclusive Messages System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and Voice Registration data MIDI Channels MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels Using these channels 1 16 the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program MIDI operates on the same basic principle The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel MIDI Transmit Channel via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument If the receiving instruments MIDI channel MIDI Receive Channel matches the Transmit Channel the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2 The rece
314. s makes the Lead Voices ideal for lead or solo instruments such as Trumpet and Saxophone Voices for the Lower Keyboard Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Lower Keyboard for playing together Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Voices for each section can be selected from the panel LOWERT1 LOWER2 PEDAL1 PEDAL2 UPPER1 UPPER2 LEAD1 LEAD2 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 JI IN JI ll OE ua ua aa ua j n Lower Keyboard Voice 2 z gt x E gt x gt x gt x gt x gt x gt x gt x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN Voices for Pedalboard Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Pedalboard for playing together Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2 Voices for each section can be selected from the panel Pedal Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if two or more pedals are played by El Reference Page default POLY page 42 VOICE SECTION LOWER1 LOWER2 PEDAL1 PEDAL2 UPPER1 UPPER2 LEAD1 LEAD2
315. s the lowest note in that chord DDK 7 Owner s Manual O A B C MODE OFF Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function SINGLE FINGER The Single Finger mode provides the fastest and easiest means to obtain many different chord bass combinations You can produce major minor 7th and minor 7th chords by simply using one or at most two or three fingers to play the chords The chord produced will sound in the same octave regardless of where it is played on the Lower keyboard Key of C I Major chords Press the root of the chord the note that corresponds to the chord s name Minor chords Simultaneously press the root and any one black key to the left of it III 7th chords Simultaneously press the root and any one white key to the left of it Minor 7th chords qT Simultaneously press the root as well as any black key and any white key to the left of it O 3 O N Playing single finger chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous chords to your performance FINGERED CHORD The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces bass accompaniment for chords played in the Lower keyboard It allows you to use a wider range of chord types than in the Single Finger mode In the Fingered Chord mode you play full chords while the Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern If you play only one or two notes in the Lower keybo
316. scription Sensitivity 0 127 Determines the modulation sensitivity for the input change Threshold 0 127 Determines the input level at which effect begins to be applied Dry Wet D63 gt W D lt W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound RING MOD Parameter Value Description Frequency 0 7 5002 6 Hz Determines the frequency for the Amplitude Modulation Frequency 0 127 Determines detailed Fine adjustment of the Amplitude Modulation LFO Wave Triangle Sine Selects a triangular wave or sine wave as the wave for modulation LFO Depth 0 127 Determines the wave depth The higher the value the greater the effect Dry Wet D63 gt W D lt W63 Determines the balance of original sound and the effect sound ISOLATOR Parameter Value Description On Off Off On Determines the on off status or the effect Low Mute Off On ute switch for the low frequency range Middle Mute Off On ute switch for the mid frequency range High Mute Off On ute switch for the high requency range Low Level 0 127 Determines the level of the ow frequencies Middle Level 0 127 Determines the level of the mid frequencies High Level 0 127 Determines the level of the high frequencies THRU Bypass control This cancels the effect processing Effect Type Thru DDK 7 Owner s Manual 59 Voice Controls and Effects 5 Rhythm Keyboard Percussion This DDK 7 features 2
317. sec reverberation Pitch Fine 1 50 50 Fine pitch adjustment to LPF Cutoff 28 5HZ Determines the cutoff detune the sound and create 21 6 kHz Thru frequency of the Low Pass a chorus effect Filter The portion of the Pitch Fine 2 50 50 Fine pitch adjustment to signal above the specified detune the sound and create frequency is cut a chorus effect Dispersion 0 16 Determines the resonance Initial Delay 0 1 400 msec Determines the time that time elapses between the original Wet Level 0 127 Determines the level of the sound and the early effected sound reflections Feedback 63 63 Determines the amount of VOICE CANCEL Level delayed repeats in the Parameter Value Description Sound When this is set to Low Adjust 0 26 Determines the frequencies 0 the delayed repeat from in the lower portion of the the second time will not middle range that are sound attenuated DryMWet D63 gt W D lt W63 Determines the balance of High Adjust 0 26 Determines the frequencies original sound and the effect in the upper portion of the sound middle range that are attenuated TALKING MOD MISCELLANEOUS Parameter Value Description ji Vowel a i u e 0 Determines the specific Creates special effects vowel used for the talking effect Effect Type Drive 0 127 Determines the effect depth AMBIENCE OutputLevel 0 127 Determines the output level f the effect IMPULSE EXP of the effect processed sound RESONATOR VOICE CANCEL LO FI TALK
318. sed Snare Noisy 2 Snare Noisy 4 Ride Cymbal Cup Hi Hat Peda Snare Noisy 3 Snare Roll Hi Hat Open SNARE DRUM Snare Snap Elec Side Stick Anlg Hi Hat Closed Snare Rock Snare Roll Open Rim Shot Hi Hat Pedal Snare Rock Tight Side Stick Brush Tap SNARE DRUM Snare Noisy Open Rim Shot Brush Slap Snare Snappy Snare Roll Brush Tap Brush Swirl Snare Tight Snap Side Stick Brush Slap Reverse Cymbal Snare Soft Open Rim Shot Brush Swirl TOM Snare Roll Brush Tap Reverse Cymbal Tom Analog 1 Side Stick Brush Slap TOM Tom Analog 2 Open Rim Shot Brush Swirl Tom Electro 1 Tom Analog 3 Brush Tap Brush Tap Swirl Tom Electro 2 Tom Analog 4 Brush Slap TOM Tom Electro 3 Tom Analog 5 Brush Swirl Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 4 Tom Analog 6 Brush Tap Swirl Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 5 BASS DRUM TOM Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 6 Kick Analog Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 4 BASS DRUM ick Anlg Short Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 5 Kick Gate Heavy ick 3 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 6 Kick Gate PERCUSSION 1 Tom Room 4 BASS DRUM Kick 3 Conga Analog M Tom Room 5 Kick Gate Conga Analog L Metronome Click Metronome Bell CYMBAL Conga Analog H Timbale H Claves Maracas Bongo H Timbale L Guiro Long Vibraslap Bongo L Cowbell Dance Guiro Short PERCUSSION 2 Timbale H Claves 2 Maracas Surdo Mute Timbale L Guiro Long Vibraslap Surdo Open Cowbell Analog Guiro Short PERCUSSION
319. sed to change the tempo for the Music Data Recorder The range is 50 200 The original recorded tempo is 100 and values less than 100 indicate slower tempo values greater than 100 indicate faster tempo OR SNGSELEGT TONS SONG 1 USB 01 50NG REG_001 mmm am SELECT REMAINING 149 90 NB d REGIST Nag TEMPO o 8 EDIT 120x T ee ep mmm mg mg mg MJ alc gt cusron 7 To reset the changed tempo Use the TEMPO RESET button in the display to reset the tempo to its original value c o o 100 U EI w D MDR USE _ Tous _ 3 E sone 1 Aa Ge mmm ag SELECT REMAINING 159 82 NB 2 TEMPO Farr REGIST TEMPO 2 100 RESET s A a ke ER 9 y E eum A A emm JI i lt lt gt E mm 124 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Repeat Playback This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all songs on a folder or only one specific song 1 Select the song you wish to play back If you wish to play back all songs on a folder select the first song that will be played back For details on selecting a song see page 104 O Press the TOOLS button at the top right of the display to call up the TOOLS Page 3 Press the REPEAT SETTING button to call up the Repeat Setting display MOR SONG SELECT MOR Se ee em E sone 1 DEE NOS A aen Ce USB 01 S06 REG_001 Use O1 50N6 CS od Pai See NI _ 4
320. sed to switch the effect on off See page 196 for details El Reference Page Footswitches page 193 Foot Pedal page 196 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 51 Voice Controls and Effects Ste PUB SJOJJUO 80107 52 EN Effect List REVERB Produces a gentle wash of aftertones in the sound recreating the subtle ambience and depth of actual performance Spaces and rooms Parameter Value Description L DelayTime 0 1 1486 0 msec Echo 0 1 371 5 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the left channel R DelayTime 0 1 1486 0 msec Echo 0 1 371 5 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the right channel C DelayTime 0 1 1486 0 msec Echo 0 1 371 5 msec Determines the time that elapses between the original sound and the delayed repeat in the center of the stereo image L gt R Delay Time 0 1 743 0 msec Determines the time for the sound to move from left to right when using Cross Delay R gt L Delay Time 0 1 743 0 msec Determines the time for the sound to move from right to eft when using Cross Delay DelayTime 32th 4th When using Tempo Delay this sets the time between delayed repeats to match the tempo of the rhythm song InputSe
321. ser 8 Subordinate Auto Bass Chord 3 Type Memory LOWER PEDAL Performance Melody On Chord 3 Type Memory LOWER PEDAL PROGRAMS Voice Edit Layers AWM 4 Parameter Element ON OFF EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain Level Note Limit Pan Note Shift Tune Fine Attack Rate Release Rate Cutoff Frequency Resonance LFO waveform LFO Speed LFO Pitch Modulation Depth LFO Frequency Modulation Depth LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth Rhythm Pattern Sections INTRO 1 2 3 ENDING 1 2 3 MAIN A B C D FILL IN A B C D BREAK Program Note Resolution 480 ppq parts per quarter note Beat 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 Measure 32 Kits 20 Drum Kits 5 SFX Kits Accompaniment Chord1 2 Voice 480 Voices Effects Reverb 29 Types Chorus 15 Types Variations 183 Type Percussion Instrument Pan Volume Reverb Pitch Coarse Fine Setting 266 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Rhythm Seguence Seguence 140 measures x 4 Sequences Program Registration Sequence 140 Registration x 4Sequence Next Registration Sequence Program Set Resolution 96 ppq parts per quarter note Keyboard Percussion Kits 16 Drum Kits Assign Drum Setup Pan Volume Reverb Pitch Coarse Fine Registration Shift Steps 80 Steps Shift End Stop Top Next Regist Unifying parameter Parameters Reverb Voice Rhythm Volume Pan Brilliance Sustain M D R Folder Up to 100 folders can
322. serie SAVE FILE Marching Band 1 Wama INTRO 1 E 01 04 000 SCH SG BrassSection J LE AS ACCENT REST La EA Ez pag INSTRUMENT MW oe Da ad CHANGE 3 Turn the Data Control dial to change the Gate Time Changing the Voices for Accompaniment Parts In Rhythm Pattern Program you can create your original drum patterns using Main Drum and Add Drum and original backing patterns using Chord 1 and Chord 2 Moreover you can change the Voices for all accompaniment parts including Pad Phrase 1 and Phrase 2 Voices can be changed in the VOICE EFFECT Page 1 Press the VOICE EFFECT button at the top of the display to call up the VOICE EFFECT Page Press the VOICE button in the display The following display will appear PATTERN SETTING INPUT G serie SAVE FILE Marching Band 1 VOLUME voice PAN REVERB CHORUS mam INIRO 1 aI DRUM ADO Ro ai SSeS Select the desired part for which you wish to change the Voice The Voice menu appears PATTERN SETTING wen S SS ae FE Marching Band 1 VOLUME PAN REVERB CHORUS VARIATION INTRO 1 MNN ADO ROR MOR See EE XG Synstrngs4 NG Smstriness NG Smstrnes2 46 sans ESE pava oa Kasa 4 Select the desired Voice and the Voice menu automatically fm sane closes The Voice menu that appears Af eg he desired Voi A h a 1 here is not the same as the ter selecting the desired
323. settings displayed language English or Japanese touch panel sound and display brightness Selecting the Display Language The LCD display can be shown in two languages English and Japanese The default setting is English 1 Press the UTILITY button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the Utility Display DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH CUCIJC CIC KEES y y e GQ AKW ES Version MIE TRANSPOSE PUCH INITIALIZE Na Ve Le wn E EL ERR 2 Press the desired button aza Japanese or English E mum am BP MDL aan FPEDAL Version TRANSPOSE PITCH INITIALIZE REVERB YOLUHE Al Chen eer Eu Ce Ne SOUND LANGUAGE Muting the Touch Panel Sound The DDK 7 is set by default with the touch panel sound turned on giving you audio feedback when you press a button or control If you want to mute the touch panel sound follow the procedure below Quick Introductory Guide 1 Press UTILITY button to call up GLOBAL Page of the Utility Display 2 Press the OFF button of the TOUCH PANEL SOUND to mute the sound TOUCH PANEL SOUND To turn the sound on again select ON in Step 2 Adjusting the Display Brightness You can adjust the display brightness to a comfortable easy to read leve
324. sing a Voice button once calls up the Voice Menu display Pressing it a second time calls up the Voice Condition display Successive presses alternate between the two displays VOICE SECTION PEDAL1 PEDAL2 LOWER1 LOWER2 UPPER1 CH LEAD1 LEAD2 When the Voice Condition display is shown pressing VOICE MENU button on the display also calls up the Voice Menu From the Voice Condition display you can control Voice related parameters such as Pan Effect Volume and so on For more information on the Voice Condition display see page 41 About the To Lower function Voices selected for the Lead Voice 1 Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2 sections can also be played on the Lower Keyboard when the TO LOWER button in each section is on When TO LOWER is on the Lead Voice and Pedal Voice cannot be played on the Upper Keyboard and Pedalboard respectively The To Lower function is not available in the Lead Voice 2 section VOICE SECTION LOWER1 LOWER2 PEDAL1 PEDAL2 UPPER1 UPPER2 LEAD1 LEAD2 MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MI
325. sing the COPY FROM RHYTHM and SECTION buttons select EI DEE the rhythm and the section which has the accompaniment you Basic settings for the Rhythm wish to use Pattern page 151 PATTERN SETTING wm Ji BUM SAVE J FILE PATTERN SETTING INPUT KC J Spy SAVE J FILE 7 Warching Band Tram vm mea es as RHYTHW SECTION PART SC em Marching Band 1 MAIN A MAIN DRUM J D Marc Band 1 Marching Band 3 Alpine March 6 8 March 6 8 March 2 6 8 Kids 8 8 Orzan March Broadway Fa pr Bros 4 Using the COPY TO PART button select the desired accompaniment part CHORD 1 or CHORD 2 to be used for the Rhythmic Chord pattern 5 Using the COPY FROM PART button select the accompaniment part you want to copy DDK 7 Owner s Manual 163 Rhythm Program 6 Press the EXECUTE button to execute the copy The desired accompaniment part Rhythmic Chord pattern has been copied To create your own backing patterns with the Rhythmic Chord function The Rhythmic Chord pattern can be entered by the same methods as the rhythm Step Write and or Real Time Write 1 Press the INPUT button at the top of the display to call up the INPUT Page 2 Select the part CHORD 1 or CHORD 2 which you want to create for the Rhythmic Chord pattern PATTERN SETTING went D serie SAVE FILE maba coo e BrassSection E GATE TINE ACLI Ka Ky a E ACCENT
326. sounds louder and thus give more punch to the sound Effect Type M BAND COMP COMPRESSOR NOISE GATE Parameter Value Description Type Normal Low Mid High Low High Low Mid Mid High FullBit Wild Attacky LowEnd Hard Basic Determines the compressor type EQ Low Gain 63 63 Determines the amount of ow frequency gain boost or cut EQ Middle Gain 63 63 Determines the amount of mid frequency gain boost or cut EQ Hi Gain 63 63 Determines the amount of high frequency gain boost or cut Attack 1 40 msec Determines how soon the compression effect is applied once the compressor has been triggered as a result of Threshold below Release 10 680 msec Determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal drops below the Threshold point Threshold multi band compressor 32 432 compressor 48 6 dB Noise Gate 72 30 dB Determines the level of the input signal required to trigger the compressor Signals at a level below the Threshold pass through unaffected signals at and above the Threshold are compressed Ratio 1 0 20 0 Determines the amount of compression of the sound for signals passing the Threshold This is expressed as a ratio the change in output signal relative to the change in input The range here is 1 1 no
327. ss 9 8 CROSS DELAY THRU 4 Space Pad 1 8 ENS DETUNE DELAY LR Synth Brass 10 8 ENS DETUNE CROSS DELAY Space Pad 2 8 XG FLANGER 1 DELAY LR Synth Brass 11 8 REVERS GATE DELAY LR Space Pad 3 8 DELAY LR XG FLANGER 1 Synth Brass 12 8 ST3BANDEQ TEMPO CROSS Space Pad 4 16 PITCH CHANGE DELAY LR Synth Brass 13 8 ST 2BAND EQ ENS DETUNE Space Pad 5 8 XG CHORUS 1 DELAY LR 5 Synth Strs 1 8 ST2BANDEQ XG CHORUS 1 Space Pad 6 8 V_FLANGER TALKING MOD Synth Strs 2 8 ST 3BANDEQ XG CHORUS 1 5 Noisy Pad 1 8 ENS DETUNE DELAY LR Synth Strs 3 8 XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY Noisy Pad 2 8 ENS DETUNE TALKING MOD Synth Strs 4 8 XG 3BAND EQ XG CHORUS 1 Noisy Pad 3 8 XG FLANGER 2 DELAY LR Synth Strs 5 8 XG CHORUS 1 CROSS DELAY Noisy Pad 4 8 ECHO XG FLANGER 2 Synth Strs 6 8 PHASER 1 ER 1 Noisy Pad 5 8 EO DISCO CANYO Synth Strs 7 8 KGCHORUSI CROSS DELAY SYNTH 6 Synth Bell 1 8 XG CHORUS 1 TEMPO DELAY 1 Synth Lead 1 8 CELESTE 1 TEMPO DELAY Synth Bell 2 8 XG PCH CHG 1 THRU Synth Lead 2 8 ODRV DELAY PHASER 1 Synth Bell 3 8 ST3BANDEQ TEMPO DELAY Synth Lead 3 8 ER 1 DELAY LR Synth Bell 4 8 XG HM ENHNCE XG SYMPHONIC Synth Lead 4 8 XG CHORUS A THRU Synth Bell 5 8 CROSS DELAY TUNNEL Synth Lead 5 8 XG CHORUS 3 TEMPO CROSS Synth Bell 6 8 XG HM ENHNCE XG SYMPHONIC Synth Lead 6 8 XG CHORUS 4 XG DLY LCR Synth Bell 7 8 CROSS DELAY TUNNEL Synth Lead 7 8 GM CHORUS 3 DELAY LR Synth Decay 1 8 ST 2BAND EQ EMPO CROSS Synth Lead 8 8 V_DIST S
328. ssed the sounds of percussion instruments are also heard The Keyboard Percussion function has been turned on When not using the function be sure to turn it off page 74 Even though a User button s rhythm has been selected and started the pattern does not sound Since the User buttons contain User rhythms no rhythm will sound if a pattern has not been saved to the selected User button EFFECTS The Touch Tone function does not operate Adjust the Touch Tone settings in the Voice Condition display page 41 The Reverb effect is not applied to the desired Voice sections even when the total Reverb depth on the panel is increased Increase the Reverb depth for the desired Voice sections in Reverb Display Pages 2 3 The Rotary Speaker effect cannot be heard even when the ROTARY SP SPEED button in the DISPLAY SELECT section is on Rotary Speaker must be selected first in Voice Condition display Pages 3 and or 4 for panel Voices or in the Organ Flute Voices ATTACK VOLUME Page for Organ Flute Voices ACCOMPANIMENT The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not change even when pressing different keys of the keyboard Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave interval on the Lower keyboard If notes with the same letter name are pressed outside of that range the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch While an Intro Ending pattern is auto
329. ssing one of the ENDING 1 3 buttons automatically ENDING adds an ending phrase before stopping the rhythm ii When you press the Ending button while rhythm is playing back the rhythm will automatically stop after the ending phrase is played You can have the ending gradually slow down ritardando by pressing the ENDING button once again while the ending is playing To switch the rhythm sections You can change the rhythm section of the Main phrase by pressing the desired MAIN FILL IN A D button The selected section s lamp above the button is lit MAIN FILL IN A B C D ICT To use the Fill In patterns As you play the DDK 7 along with the rhythm occasionally press the selected MAIN FILL button as desired The Fill In pattern one measure will be played and the selected Fill In section s lamp above the button flashes When you use the Auto Fill In function Fill Ins will be played automatically The Auto Fill In function is set in the Rhythm Condition display Pressing the Rhythm button on the panel again or pressing the rhythm name of the selected rhythm in the display again calls up the Rhythm Condition Display RHYTHM 8Beat Light 1 WENU gt REVERS VOLUME REVERB VOLUME 8 Sl D INGLE Lower FINGERE CUSTOM 7 F ser el PEDAL When Auto Fill is set to ON in the left side of the
330. ssing the 1 2 or 3 button at the top right of the display Voice Display Page 1 Switching the Display Pages E VOICE DISPLAY UPPER KEYBOARD S LOVER KEYBOARD PEDAL VOICE 1 2 gt BEE CLT eremm OFF o lim Light TEMPO BAR BEAT Voice Sections Shows the Voices currently assigned to each Voice section You can also mute specific Voice section by pressing its button the button is grayed out RHYTHM Shows the currently selected rhythm A B C MODE Shows the mode of the Auto Bass Chord O TEMPO Shows the current rhythm tempo BAR BEAT Shows the bar beat when the rhythm is playing REGISTRATION Shows the current position of the Registration Shift Voice Display Page 2 E REGIST MEMORY 1 16 TED AAA 2 s a s e r 8 9 to a2 13 14 46 16 HI AH SEEEEEEEEEEEEEE in aaa PARA SETTINGS REVERB me ser meon ox TIME DEC SELECT ALL OFF or You can confirm the parameter values for example Reverb Volume Pan for each Registration Memory simultaneously Moreover you can unify a specific parameter used in various Registration Memories at one time See page 99 for the details Voice Display Page 3 JI MELODY ON CHORD 1 fb Determines the Melody On Chord modes See page 73 for details El Reference Page Selecting a Voice page 26 Reference Page Selecting a rhythm page 60 El R
331. such as suspended sleep standby of the computer e Before turning on the power to the instrument connect the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal e Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on off or plugging unplugging the USB cable to from the USB TO HOST terminal e Quit any open applications e Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a Song e While a USB device is connected to the instrument you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations When turning the power of the instrument off then on again or when alternately connecting disconnecting the USB cable Using the MIDI IN OUT terminals By using an optional MIDI interface such as the UX16 you can connect the DDK 7 to the computer with the MIDI IN OUT terminals on the instrument Connect the DDK 7 and the MIDI Interface with two standard MIDI cables one connecting the OUT terminal on the DDK 7 to the MIDI IN terminal on the interface and the other connecting the IN terminal on the DDK 7 to the MIDI OUT terminal on the interface Connect the MIDI interface to the computer with a USB cable MIDI Interface for example UX16 a MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI e OUTO N a
332. t controls Advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step The size of a single step is determined by the Quantize value Rhythm Program DDK 7 Owner s Manual 157 Change the accent level by using the ACCENT buttons or Accent box The Accent box allows for finer changes PATTERN SETTING INPUT GEI serup_ SAVE FILE Marching Band TRA WALI KIJA PART uu peter kt JCl Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute AE Au e USR kl hl el em A om el INSTRUMENT Accent box Touch on the box to enable the Accent box Turning the Data Control dial changes the accent level over a range of 0 127 The minimum setting results in no sound ACCENT buttons Determines the coarse accent level Eight accent levels from ppp to fff are available Press the desired Accent button to change the currently selected note to the selected level To move an entered note 1 Select the note you want to move as in Step 1 on page 157 2 Press the Rhythm Clock box to enable the box PATTERN SETTING INPUT D seue SAVE FILE ae ed ER IEA PART Symphony Kit Ok Gran Cassa Mute Mute Steeg GAIE TINE ES E Y 2 AO Aj KI E co zi jd I S Samara D gt Ki gt 3 v o G a 3 INSTRUMENT 3 Turn the Data Control dial to change the position by one clock 158 DDK 7 Owner s Manual To change the length of an entered note Th
333. t XG Koto XG FootSteps XG Taisho kin XG MachineGun XG Kanoon XG LaserGun XG Kalimba XG Explosion 2 XG Bagpipe XG Firework XG Fiddle XG Shanai XG Shanai2 XG Pungi XG Hichiriki XG TinkleBell XG Bonang XG Altair XG GamelanGongs XG StereoGamelan XG RamaCymbal pi Rhythm Seguence Program With the Rhythm Seguence Program function you can string together any of the DDK 7 s existing rhythms and the rhythms of your own creation together to make complete rhythm compositions You can save four rhythm compositions each can contain up to 140 bars to the Sequence buttons on the panel for future recall Two or more rhythm compositions can be played back in succession letting you divide a song into parts and play back the rhythm data as desired Here are a couple of example applications e When you want to play more than two songs in a medley save the rhythm composition for each song to a separate sequence button You can then recall each desired song by simply pressing the corresponding sequence button to which the song is saved e When you want to practice a song in separate sections for example separately practicing the verse chorus and bridge divide the song into the relevant parts For example save the intro part to the SEQ 1 button the main chorus part to the SEQ 2 button the ending to the SEQ 3 button and so on Then recall the desired part simply by pressing the appropriate sequence button You can also pl
334. t and pressing the SAVE button in the display To change the media folder 1 Press the FOLDER SELECT button in the SONG SELECT Page to call up the Folder Select display e MDR E Tous MDR SONG SELECT TOUS SONG 1 USB 01 SONG REG_001 SONG 1 USB 01 50NG REG_001 REMAINING 168 82 NG ra SELECT ell FOLDER SELECT crose D us osons em Kei Eva SEN Keen E Ha Bad wiel ee AA WWII OD pres Ed pl aaa ESOS eO Current Media Folder Displays the currently selected media folder For example if USB 01 Folder1 is shown the folder named Folder1 in the USB flash memory is selected Media Folder List Displays the media or folders Up to 120 folders can be displayed Scroll Buttons If the Media Folder List contains many folders more than can fit on the display you can scroll the display with these buttons O UP Selects the upper layer folder or media For example when USB 01 Folder1 Folder1 in the USB flash memory is selected pressing the UP button selects USB DL CREATE FOLDER Creates a new folder in the Media Folder List Up to 120 folders can exist in one media or within a single upper folder Pressing this button calls up the New Folder display in which you can enter the desired name Enter the name and press the OK button to create a new folder The method for entering the folder name is the same as that of th
335. t the sampled note previously recorded note stored in the tone generator section electronic circuit is played based on information received from the keyboard and output through the speakers So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production For example let s say you play a C quarter note using the grand piano sound on the keyboard Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as with what Voice with which key about how strong when was it pressed and when was it released Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator Using these numbers as a basis the tone generator plays the stored sampled note Example of Keyboard Information Voice number with what Voice 01 grand piano Note number with which key 60 C3 Note on when was it pressed Timing expressed numerically quarter note Velocity about how strong 120 strong As described above your keyboard performance and panel operations such as Voice selection are handled as MIDI events All rhythm related data including rhythm patterns auto accompaniment patterns Rhythm Sequences etc also consist of MIDI messages DDK 7 Owner s Manual 235 Connections SUONOBUUOD 236 DDK 7 Owner s Manual MIDI Musical Instrument Dig
336. tar 0 41 40 XG DXBass 0 18 27 XG MellowGuitar 0 64 40 XG XWireBass 0 32 27 XG JazzAmp 0 0 41 XG Violin STRINGS 0 0 28 XG CleanGuitar 0 8 41 XG SlwAtkViolin 0 32 28 XG ChorusGuitar 0 0 42 XG Viola 0 0 29 XG MutedGuitar 0 0 43 XG Cello 0 40 29 XG FunkGuitar4 0 0 44 XG Contrabass 0 41 29 XG MuteSteelGtr 0 0 45 XG Trem Strings 0 43 29 XG FunkGuitar2 0 8 45 XG SlwAtTremStr 0 45 29 XG JazzMan 0 40 45 XG SuspenseStr 0 0 30 XG Overdriven 0 0 46 XG PizzicatoStr 0 43 30 XG GuitarPinch 0 0 47 XG Orch Harp 0 0 31 XG Distortion 0 40 47 XG YangChin 0 40 31 XG FeedbackGtr 0 0 48 XG Timpani ENSEMBLE 0 41 31 XG FeedbackGtr2 0 0 49 XG Strings1 0 0 32 XG GtrHarmonics 0 3 49 XG StereoStrings 0 65 32 XG GtrFeedback 0 8 49 XG SlwAtkStrings 0 66 32 XG GtrHarmonics2 0 24 49 XG ArcoStrings 0 0 33 XG AcousticBass BASS 0 35 49 XG 60 sStrings 0 40 33 XG JazzRhythm 0 40 49 XG Orchestra 0 45 33 XG VXUprghtBass 0 41 49 XG Orchestra2 0 0 34 XG FingerBass 0 42 49 XG TremOrchestra 0 18 34 XG FingerDark 0 45 49 XG Vel Strings 0 27 34 XG FlangeBass 0 0 50 XG Strings2 0 40 34 XG Bass amp DistEG 0 3 50 XG S SlowStrings 0 43 34 XG FingerSlap 0 8 50 XG LegatoStrings 0 45 34 XG FingerBass2 0 40 50 XG WarmStrings 0 65 34 XG ModulatedBass 0 41 50 XG Kingdom 0 0 35 XG PickBass 0 64 50 XG 70 sStrings 0 28 35 XG Mut
337. termines the amount of reverb applied to each accompaniment part Range 0 127 D gt Ki gt 3 o G a 3 168 DDK 7 Owner s Manual CHORUS Display VOLUME Marching Band 1 INTRO 1 PATTERN SETTING INPUT G setup SAVE FILE O CHORUS TYPE Determines the type of the chorus effect Pressing the CHORUS TYPE button calls up the chorus type list PATTERN SETTING INPUT D seue SAVE FILE Marching Band 1 VOLUME VOICE PAN REVERE VARIATION LA O Select the desired chorus type and the list automatically closes Chorus sliders Determines the amount of chorus effect applied to each accompaniment part Range 0 127 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 169 Rhythm Program VARIATION Display PATTERN SETTING INPUT Ofe seme J SAVE FILE J Marching Band 1 VOLUME VOICE PAN REVERB CHORUS INTRO 1 TO WARIAIION TYPES VARIATION TYPE VARIATION Variation Effect Category El Reference Page o Selects the effect category of the variation effect Pressing the VARIATION button calls Effect List page 52 a up the effect category list PATTERN SETTING INPUT GERD seme SAVE FIE PATTERN SETTING INPUT GRED Sup SAVE FLE Marching Band 1 VOLUME voice ru revere CHORUS aa aer e e FLANGER PHASER TREMOLO AUTO P DISTORTION
338. the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components e Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV radio stereo equipment mobile phone or other electric devices Otherwise the instrument TV or radio may generate noise e Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over e Before moving the instrument remove all connected cables e When setting up the product make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible If some trouble or malfunction occurs immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet Even when the power switch is turned off electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level When you are not using the product for a long time make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet 9B 11 1 2 2 DDK 7 Owner s Manual e Do not place the instrument against a wall allow at least 3 cm one inch from the wall since this can cause inadequate air circulation and possibly result in the instrument overheating e Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components turn off the power for all components Before turning the power on or off for all components set all volume levels to minimum Also be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listeni
339. the volume of the XG song the same function as XG VOLUME above Each channel button below each slider for example the CH1 button lets you set the part to mute or play the same function as the PART buttons above DDK 7 Owner s Manual 127 HAM JepJooay Lq ASNN 128 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 9 Other Functions Tools The TOOLS Page in the M D R display has many functions such as song copy song delete etc Song Copy This function lets you copy data recorded in one song to another song You can copy and exchange the data even between two different media Songs created with the EL series such as the EL 900 cannot be copied Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media in advance If memory space is insufficient or if the folder already contains 100 songs Song Copy is not available Copying of XG songs is done with a different method from Song Copy here Refer to XG Song Copy page 133 Moving a Protected Song A protected song can be copied within a folder but it cannot be copied to another folder or media If you specify another folder or media as the copy destination a message appears prompting moving of the song not copying When the EXECUTE button is pressed the protected original song and all protected edited songs which come from the same protected original song will be moved together To copy within one media Insert the appropriate media To copy a
340. ting PRESET calls up the original factory vibrato settings for the Voice When PRESET is selected DELAY DEPTH and SPEED parameters cannot be edited Selecting USER lets you adjust the vibrato settings for yourself O 2 DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the vibrato effect Higher settings increase the delay of the vibrato Speed ps Delay Ce Depth onset Range 0 14 O 3 DEPTH Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect Higher settings result in a more pronounced vibrato The minimum setting cancels the vibrato effect Range 0 14 O SPEED Determines the speed of the vibrato effect Higher settings increase the speed of the vibrato Range 0 14 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 43 Ste PUB SJOJJUO 3210A 44 RN ore Touch Vibrato is not applied to the Pedal Voices El Reference Page Controlling Lead Slide with Foot Pedal page 199 El Reference Page Transpose for entire instrument page 208 El Reference Page Pitch for entire instrument page 208 DDK 7 Owner s Manual O TOUCH VIBRATO Turns the Touch Vibrato function on or off Setting Touch Vibrato to on lets you apply vibrato to individual notes as you play them by after touch The harder you press down the key the greater the vibrato will be When Touch Vibrato is off vibrato depth cannot be controlled no matter how hard you press th
341. tion Memory settings to an external storage device such as eference Page Na ji USB flash memory with sixteen Registrations comprising a single file Saving Registrations as Registration Data File i page 116 memory For details about using other external storage devices see chapter 7 Music Data Recorder M D R The instructions below explain how to save the Registration data to a USB flash 1 Insert a USB flash memory into the USB TO DEVICE terminal on the left side of the DDK 7 2 Press the MDR button on the panel to call up the M D R display DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH J 24 ZJ 2 J MDR SONG SELECT TOOLS E SONG 1 USB 01 S0NG Re REMAINING 159 82 NB FOLDER SELECT DER SELECT PART REGIST TENPO SETUP EDIT Na KZ RESET 3 Select the song to which you want to save the Registration data page 104 4 Press REGIST EDIT button in the display to call up the Registration Edit display E BEE 5 Press the SAVE button in the display A message appears indicating the Registration data is currently being saved Recalling Recorded When the operation is completed the message closes Registrations page 121 El Reference Page Changing the Song Name page 113 DDK 7 Owner s Manual 4 Initi
342. tions button in the M D R display to start the song and activate The Shift End mark ES bell will automatically be put at the end of the Registrations you these functions entered when Top or Next Regist is selected as the Shift End The CUSTOM Custom Play button will not activate the Next Regist function RE ore If the next Registration data contains User voices the DDK 7 may produce no sound for a few seconds while loading the Registration Confirming the Registration Shift setting in the Voice Display You can confirm the Registration Shift mode in the Voice Display Page 1 Press the VOICE DISPLAY button on the panel to call up the Voice Display The Registration Shift mode is shown at the bottom right of the display gt T o gt D gt z O ER pra oc E E O 0 oc DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH JI pa e kasa y E VOICE DISPLAY LY UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1 ChamStrs1 wame Ge ag LOVER KEYBOARD PEDAL VOICE 1 VOICE 1 eg FingrBass Bolado NAAA REGISTRATION OFF Hop Light OFF TEMPO 1 20 BAR BEAT STOP i DDK 7 Owner s Manual 97 AYOWAW NOILVYLSIDSY 98 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Registration Shift OFF REGISTRATION OFF The current Registration number is displayed Registration Shift
343. tro 1 3 Main A D Fill In A D Break Ending 1 3 as rhythm pattern variations Each of these fifteen sections in turn has eight different parts made up of MIDI sequence data You can load any patterns styles which have been created by an SFF compatible instrument Instruments compatible with SFF have the Style File Logo on the panel DDK 7 Owner s Manual 175 Rhythm Program weJ6o1qg wyWAyy Percussion Kit List Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Hit Kit Room Kit Rock Kit Electro Kit Live Std Kit Live Funk Kit Live Std P Kit Live Funk P Kit C 1 FEE Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute D 1 Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q E 1 Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap F 1 Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H JE Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L G 1 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise A 1 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click MA Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome B
344. trs 3 Chanber Strs 4 E Hl UPPER VOICE 1 AAO 7ga is Er WW 2 122 Strings 2 Strings 3 Strings 4 Voice menu Strings 5 Strings 6 Strings 7 Strings 8 Select the desired instrument category with the category buttons in the display You can also choose the User category to select a User voice you have created For example to call up Piano 1 select the Piano category Voices The name of the selected category Piano is displayed on the upper left The Voice name shown under the category name is that of the currently assigned Voice and is irrelevant to the Voice menu below 3 Select the desired Voice name Piano 1 for ekample from the El Halina Paba Voice menu The Voice menu contains many Piano Voices more than can fit on one display page To change the display pages press the appropriate number buttons in the display Voice List page 32 PIANO Piano 1 The color of the selected Voice name changes to orange indicating that it has been selected Changing the Voice volume There are two ways to set the Voice volume using the VOLUME buttons on the panel and using the volume slider in the display The VOLUME buttons let you make coarse adjustments to the volume while the slider gives you fine control DDK 7 Owner s Manual JI 21 lt 9 o bg Mn DI nore Depending on the volume value set by the slider two adjacent VOLUME lamps may be
345. uit the Rhythm Sequence Program page 190 Auditioning a Sequence You can play a sequence you are editing at any time to audition the changes Move the cursor to the desired position for playback Move the cursor by using the Data Control dial or the POSITION buttons on the display MH SEQUENCE wei 28eat Light WENU j RHYTHM REGIST No 1 5 10 ASA SAS 3 E ee Beat Light wi e DATA CONTROL POSITION OCA 2 Press the rhythm START button on the panel BREAK FT Et SYNCHRO START START The Sequence plays back Pressing the START button again stops playback Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence You can insert a new rhythm between the rhythms you have already entered or delete the entered rhythm from the sequence 8 i 1 eu 7 HB SEQUENCE seer feat Light MENU REGIST No 1 5 10 PATTERN SUE mun mee mt bi BE oa mes mee ae POPS mama GO 2 Na ey get Light 1 Beat Light 2 8Beat Light 3 8Beat Light 4 Folk Rock 1 Folk Rock 2 60 s Beat Asian Pops Unplugged 1 Unpi 8Beat Adria Unplugged 3 DAT e 2 lugged 2 POSITION Y EEEE 1 POSITION These are cursor controls for moving the cursor colored orange along the rhythm row in the display fe Moves the cursor to the first position 4 Moves the cursor one step to the left gt Moves the cursor one step to the right gt gt
346. umbers Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the Registration Shift function s capacity of 80 If the insert operation exceeds this capacity a Data Full message appears and the operation cannot be executed DELETE For deleting a Registration number at the current cursor position To delete the unnecessary number move the cursor to a numbered position and press DELETE in the display CLEAR For erasing all current user Registration Shift settings After selecting CLEAR a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation Select CLEAR to clear all data The message Clear all data momentarily appears in the display and returns to the previous display Select CANCEL to abort the operation SHIFT END El Reference Page Determines how to end the Registration shift function i Saving Two or More STOP Selects the last Registration and quits the operation Registration Banks to One Song page 117 TOP After the last preset is reached the first preset is called up again starting the sequence SE over again from the beginning OTT wore NEXT REGIST After the last preset is reached the next Registration data in the Song is When you play the song called up This function is available only when two or more Registration data sets are saved 2 y SC A using Next Regist function in one Song This function is handy when you need to play a song with more than sixteen apyays press the P Play Registra
347. unds 1 Select the desired part to which the percussion sounds are entered and the desired drum kit by following Steps 1 3 on page 154 2 Set the appropriate Quantize value The positions at which the sounds are input will be corrected according to the predetermined Quantize value in the Real Time Write operation For details refer to page 161 PATTERN SETTING INPUT D semp SAVE FILE Marching Band 1 Eng Marching Band Y EC ER D I Symphony Kit C1 Gran Cassa Mute QUANTIZE At TE nC BE ADD DRUM ALLENI om PPP pp P mp 3 Pa cam mf S St Sit T ee Press the rhythm START button in the panel The rhythm or Metronome starts playing enabling the Real Time Write operation PATTERN SETTING INPUT crecer serie SAVE FILE Marching Band 1 INTRO 1 PARE Symphony Kit REAL TIME WRITE QUANTIZE GATE TIME Dem II ADD DRUM ACCENT P p D gt Ss gt 3 Ha o a D 3 CHORD1 PPP PP REST CHORD mf f INSTRUMENT j JI SIS CLEAR CHANGE 4 While the rhythm is running play the percussion sounds from the Upper and or Lower keyboards If you have started the Rhythm Pattern Program by copying a preset rhythm you can listen the selected rhythm as you play the sound If you have started El Reference Page o from scratch set the Metronome to on in the
348. up the Reverb pages Press the REVERB button located to the left of the panel to set the Reverb effect The Reverb display appears DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH J n a amp The Reverb display consists of four pages REVERB Page 1 E REVERB WD 2 31 4 em 20 DEPTH Fine adjustment of the depth of reverberation or the level of the reflected sounds When this parameter is set to the minimum the settings in the pages that follow have no effect Range 0 24 REVERB Page 2 E REVERB Tj Ep 3 2 ORGAN UPPER LOWER 24 a o O TYPE Determines the reverb type for each of the Voice sections and the Organ Flute Voice El Reference Page Effect Li 52 Several types can be selected Room Hall Stage and so on SE EE Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the Reverb Type list Press the number buttons to change the display pages The list contains many reverb types more than can fit on one display page To change the display pages press the appropriate number buttons 1 or 2 in the display Select the desired reverb type in the list After changing the reverb type the TIME parameter below is automatically changed corresponding to the selected reverb type TIME Determines the
349. urn the MIC VOLUME knob to the right Similarly no reverb can be heard even though you raise the reverb level here unless you raise the total reverb level in the REVERB display Controlling External MIDI Devices from the DDK 7 You can use the DDK 7 to remotely play the Voices of a MIDI keyboard or tone generator combining them with the DDK 7 and letting you create even richer more multi layered sound textures The MIDI receive channels of the MIDI keyboard must match the transmit channels on your DDK 7 The DDK 7 transmits as digital data a variety of performance messages along with note information including values that indicate how far the expression pedal is pressed down and how hard you play the keyboard How the connected external device responds to these messages depends on the particular device MIDI messages MIDI cable MIDI OUT MIDI IN e6 C 88 DO o 852255 oo 6 AA AA ERE NAA MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used A Ad Tone generator El Reference Page Reverb page 48 Reference Page What is MIDI page 235 BE ore When you are using the M D R MIDI data cannot be transmitted DDK 7 Owner s Manual H 233 Connections SUONOBUUOD REH wore When you are using the M D R MIDI data cannot be received E Reference Pages Internet Direct Connection
350. ved from the chords you play on the Lower keyboard or from the chords that are played for you if you use Automatic Accompaniment Melody On Chord has three different modes each providing a different set of harmonics to accompany the melody played Melody On Chord can also be controlled with the Footpedal To set the M O C function Press the VOICE DISPLAY button then call up the Page 3 by using the Page buttons Voice Display Page 3 DISPLAY SELECT VOICE REGIST FOOT MDR INTERNET UTILITY PROGRAM SUSTAIN REVERB DISPLAY MENU SWITCH H H ATLETA E MELODY ON CHORD 1 2 The Melody On Chord display appears DDK 7 Owner s Manual 73 Rhythm Keyboard Percussion uoissnoja dq p3gogAsy Wy AyH M O C MODE OFF Cancels the Melody On Chord function Mode 1 Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody played Mode 2 Produces harmonies of up to three notes in a range close to the melody played El Reference Page Mode 3 Controlling Melody On Chord Produces harmonies of up to four notes in a range relatively distant from the melody with Footpedal page 200 played Melody On Chord can be heard only when the Upper Keyboard Voice section s volume is set to the appropriate value Melody On Chord does not apply to the Lead Voices D Keyboard Percussion The Keyboard Per
351. y in order automatically to the highest number For example if you press Sequence buttons 4 2 and 1 in that order the sequences will be played back not in the order you pressed them but in their numeric order 1 2 then 4 This function effectively allows you to make a long rhythm sequence that exceeds the 140 pattern memory limit of a single sequence Pressing one of the SEQ buttons while a Rhythm Sequence is playing back automatically cancels the pressed sequence and its LED turns off You cannot cancel a sequence that is currently playing The SEQ lamp goes out when the sequence assigned to it is finished playing DDK 7 Owner s Manual 191 Rhythm Program weiBo1g WU AyH El Reference Page Connecting a pedal unit page 229 Footswitches page 193 El Reference Page Connecting a foot pedal page 229 Foot pedal page 196 192 DDK 7 Owner s Manual To start a sequence using the Left Footswitch You can start or stop the Rhythm Sequence playback using the left footswitch To use the left footswitch pedal unit must be connected to the DDK 7 1 Press the desired Sequence buttons making sure that all their LEDs are lit 2 Press the FOOT SWITCH button on the panel to call up the Footswitch display LEFT Page 3 Set the control mode of the Footswitch to RHYTHM STOP See page 193 for information about the Footswitch settings 4 Press the Left Footswitch with your right foot to turn the seguence on Pr
352. ythm from the displayed rhythm menu ES SEQUENCE wani MENU REGIST No 1 5 10 PATTERN CATEGORY J 8Beat Light 2 POPS WW Cl 8Beat Light 3 8Beat Light 4 60 s Beat Asian Pops Rock POSITION DATA aa asana SE Fee ES ISS paras panay Select a rhythm section Main A D Fill in A D Intro 1 3 Jon NOTE Ending 1 3 or Break by pressing one of the rhythm control When entering an Intro buttons on the panel section check the number of The selected rhythm and section appears at the top of the display Sars UB PDA Press the SET button in the display b One bar of the selected rhythm is entered and its name is displayed as a box in the rhythm row on the display When the rhythm is entered the cursor colored orange will automatically move to one step right A maximum of 140 bars can be entered to a single sequence When you select an ending pattern and press the SET button an entire ending pattern more than one bar is entered You cannot enter a rhythm after an ending pattern DDK 7 Owner s Manual 185 Rhythm Program D gt Ki gt 3 v o Q a 3 186 DDK 7 Owner s Manual Repeat steps 2 through 5 above to enter the rhythm and create your own rhythm composition 6 Turning the power off before quitting or closing the Rhythm Sequence Program erases any sequences you have made Before turning the power off q
353. zz Organ 6 16 ST3BANDEQ XG ROTARY SP 12Str Guitar 16 8 IST 2BAND E XG HM ENHNCE Jazz Organ 7 16 ST2BAND EQ ROTARY SP 1 Jazz Guitar 1 16 8 THRU THRU Jazz Organ 8 16 ST2BANDEQ XG ROTARY SP Jazz Guitar 2 16 8 THRU THRU Jazz Organ 9 16 STIBANDEQ DUAL ROTSP 2 Harp 1 H THRU THRU 4 Pop Organ 1 H ST2BANDEQ TREMOLO 1 Harp 2 8 THRU THRU Pop Organ 2 8 ST3BANDEQ_ DUAL ROTSP 1 Harp 3 8 JER1 THRU Pop Organ 3 8 XG3BANDEQ DUAL ROTSP 1 2 Elec Guitar 1 16 8 ST 2BAND E SYMPHONIC Pop Organ 4 H ST2BANDEQ DIST 2ROT SP Elec Guitar 2 16 8 ST 2BAND E V DIST SOFT Pop Organ 5 H XGPCH CHG 1 DIST 2ROT SP Elec Guitar 3 16 8 ST 2BAND E ST OVERDRIVE Rock Organ 1 H ST2BANDEQ ODRV ROT SP Elec Guitar 4 16 8 ODRV T DLY THRU Rock Organ 2 H V DIST SOFT DUAL ROTSP 2 Elec Guitar 5 16 8 ST 2BAND E V_DIST SOFT Rock Organ 3 H COMP DIST ROTARY SP 1 uted Guitar 16 8 ST 2BAND E TEMPO DELAY 5 Organ Bass 1 8 THRU THRU Distortion Gtr 1 16 8 IST 2BAND E WAH OD T DLY Organ Bass 2 16 THRU THRU Distortion Gtr 2 16 8 IST 3BAND E V_DST H TDLY Organ Bass 3 16 THRU THRU Distortion Gtr 3 16 8 IST 3BAND E DIST T DLY Organ Bass 4 16 THRU RU 3 Banjo 8 THRU THRU PIANO andolin 8 THRU 1 Piano 1 8 THRU THRU Pedal Steel Gtr 8 THRU Piano 2 8 XG HM ENHNCE THRU PERCUSSION Piano 3 H AMBIENCE HRU 1 Vibraphone 1 8 THRU Honkytonk Piano 8 LO FI ST 3BAND EQ Vibraphone 2 8 HANCER AUTO PAN Harpsichord 1 8 THRU THRU Marimba 1 e TH

Yamaha DDK-7 Musical Instrument User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents